Wny 210 157 Part 6

WNY 210 : Renovation Phase l - MIC Room, and 4th flr Hallway and Common Areas
WNY 210 : Renovation Phase II - Remaining Hallways, Lobbies and Common Areas /
WNY 157: Renovation Phase lII - Hallways, Lobbies and Common Areas
Washington Navy Yard, DC
Work Order Number TBD Date: 07/27/2010
PART 6
ATTACHMENTS
Part 6 contains attachments with information that will help the contractor develop a
suitable design and construct without hindrance.
Specifications:
o PART 2A
o Exhibit 10A: SECNAV 5510.36
o Spec SECTION 260943.13 - DIGITAL-NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS
o Spec SECTION 22-00-00 - PLUMBING
– Design Sketches (Preliminary Renderings) provided for overall design intent,

see drawings for final layout and design:
o Lobby (2),
o MIC Room
o Hallway
o Authorized MSC Logo
– Product data (BOD):

o The manufacturers and numbers referenced are not intended to be
proprietary. Approved equals will be accepted provided they are similar in
quality, size and finish, and meet regulatory and LEED requirements.
–
Item/materials BOD Product / Accessories BOD Manuf/Supplier/contact
Flooring C&A Tandus carpets • Shaw carpets
• 24 x 24 Carpet tile • Dale Tile
• Backing: ECOFlex MODULAR • Nurazzo
• Terrazzo (Nurazzo – ¼ inch • Commercial Carpets of America
gauge) 12 x 12 border (Marble • OR EQUAL
M106- Cocoa Brown), 24 x 24
field (Crystal C504 - Black
Diamond and/or C501 - Amber)
Wall • Woodworks Ekos • Armstrong

panels/Base • DIRTT Wall • MOI
• Back painted panels • OR EQUAL
• Velcro panels
• Etched /graphic panels
Suspended • Woodworks ceiling Canopies • Armstrong

Ceiling systems • 24 x 24 Tegular Wood veneer • OR EQUAL
and accessories panels
• Axiom knife edge trim
• 24 x 24 Cirrus beveled tegular
RFP WNY 210 157 Part_6.doc 7/27/2010 Page 1 of 3

Entrance mats Gridline LB frame • Construction Specialties

• American Floor Mats, Inc
• OR EQUAL
Restroom • Hand Dryer Xlerator 220V • Excel Dryer Inc
accessories • Dyson Airblade • DYSON
Light fixtures • EDGE : WA-PP-EX4B, T Lamps • Pinnacle Architectural lighting
• PUREX FX : 24’’ X 24’’ /T Lamps
• LEDALITE / PHILLIPS
• Prescolite: D6LED4-6D9LED350
K8MFC-WT • LITECONTROL
• Columbia Lighting: EPC22 -224G • Lutron : www.onesa.com

-DL-LUTRON; ECOSYSTEM
BALLAST –F5830
• ALERA: PLK-122T5-CM48-OA-
LUTRON ECOSYSTEM BALLAST
–MW-SGL-F5835
• LAM LIGHTING SYSTEM: SL20-

2/39BX-DRA-CB-XX-FINISH
VOLTAGE
• EST: 2200-DRS-4000-99M-062-
DM-IN-SM1
• Prescolite: SDPS6LED4-35K-8-
277V-LUTRON 3D HILUME
DIMMING
• ALBEO TECHNILOGIES: LS-

B1_502DR0-DIM
• ELECTRIX LUMILEDGE: LLSR-

FR7 (40) / (16)
Furniture : • KI Jury Base seating STYLE: • DYNAMIC BUSINESS
CLR/finishes Piretti Managerial – INTERIORS, LLC
TBD UPHOLSTERED • MOI
• High back swivel chairs w/ arms • NELLO
BOD: ADI Scorpio EXEC polished
aluminum base and upper leather
• Elongated wood conference table
for 14 w/ 3 recessed power pods
(2 power/2 data ea)
• Low profile floor raceway: BOD -
Connectrac system

Project Drawings:
1 Cover Sheet G1.01
2 Schedules G1.02
3 Wall Types and Door Types G1.03
4 Demo Plan/ Demo RCP - MIC A1.01
5 Floor Plan/ RCP - MIC A1.11
6 Closet Floor and Ceiling Plans A1.12
7 Finish Plan/FF&E Plan - MIC A1.21
8 Elevations - MIC A1.31
9 Elevations - MIC A1.32
10 Architectural Details - MIC Room A1.41
11 Electrical - MIC Room A1.42
12 New Plan - 210 Floor 1 A2.11
16 Hallway Elevations - 210 Floor 1 A2.31
19 Hallway Details 1 - 210 A2.41
20 Hallway Detials 2 - 210 A2.42
21 New Plan/RCP - 157 Floor 1 A3.11
29 Restrooms 210 - Sheet 1 A4.01
33 Restroom Details 157/210 A4.41
34 Mechanical Demo/ Existing - MIC M1.01
35 Mechanical Plan - MIC M1.11
36 Mechanical Plan - 210 Floor 1 M2.11
44 Mechanical Specs M3.41
45 Mechanical Details M3.42
46 Plumbing - 210 Sheet 1 P4.01
48 Plumbing - 210 Schedules P4.03
51 Plumbing - 157 Schedules P4.06

th
WNY 210 : Phase l - Renovation MIC Room, and 4 flr Hallway and Common Areas
WNY 210: Renovation Phase II - Remaining Hallways, Lobbies and Common Areas
WNY 157: Renovation Phase lII - Remaining Hallways, Lobbies and Common Areas

Small Project Part 2, Attachment A
Project-Specific General Requirements
The following requirements supplement those contained in the body of Part 2, General
Requirements, for Small Projects. Paragraph numbers in Part 2 correspond to paragraph numbers
used in Part 2, Attachment A.
Paragraph 3 POST AWARD KICKOFF MEETING (PAK)

CPM to provide after contract is awarded.
Paragraph 4 DESIGN
Submit design drawings or sketches, calculations and manufacturer’s data to demonstrate

compliance with contract requirements. The Contractor is encouraged to prepare design
drawings more like shop drawings to minimize construction submittals.
Provide hard 3 copies of design submittal package to the following reviewers 1 week prior to the
in-progress review meeting:
FEAD/
Client
Deliverable/submittals PWD
MSC
Architect
Final Design Development
Half-size Drawings or Sketches 3 1
Specifications and Manufacturer’s Cut 3 1
Sheets/LEED supporting docs
FF&E Lead time/Design/Construction 3 1
Schedule
Budget Management Status/Cost 2 1
Estimate
Energy Calculations/LEED 2 1
PROD Form (Permits) 2 1
Finish Samples 2 3
1. Submittal packages will be considered for Government review and approval during the Post
Award Kick-off Meeting.
The following design submittals must be approved by the Contracting Officer prior to the start of
construction:
a. Electrical design: wiring diagrams and associated panels
b. HVAC upgrades and redistribution
c. Plumbing and new restroom reconfigurations
Small Project Part 2, Attachment A - Page 1 of 5

th
2. Construction submittals are to be Contractor-approved, except those listed below:

a. DOR Approval required for:
1) Fire Protection related submittals
2) All components of the interior doors, hardware, cabinets, fireproofing/firestopping,
railings, paint, finish materials/colors.
3) HVAC Testing, Adjusting, and balancing.
4) Furnishings, fixtures, and equipment packages
5) Flooring materials and installation schedules
6) Wall panel system and associated accessories
7) Suspended Ceiling systems and associated accessories
8) Plumbing, new restroom reconfigurations and accessories
b. Government Approval required for:
1) Telecommunications
2) SPAWAR: security
3) JPAS: Joint personnel adjudication system
4) Digital Lighting Network Controls System
3. Submit the following construction submittals, approved by the DOR, to the Government for
surveillance:
a. Submit fire protection related submittals pertaining to spray-applied fire proofing and
fire stopping, exterior fire alarm reporting systems, interior fire alarm & detection
systems, and fire suppression systems including fire pumps and standpipe systems.
b. Submit HVAC Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing required submittals.
c. Submit telecommunications shop drawings for coordination with the NMCI / VTC
Contractors.
d. Submit Performance Verification and Acceptance Testing required by LEED, IBC or
this RFP.
e. Submit Final LEED Certification Documentation for US Green Building Council
Certification.
f. Submit electrical wiring diagrams pertaining to HVAC and lighting systems used to
make up the Reflected Ceiling Plan system for each floor in each bldg.
Paragraph 5 FIRE PROTECTION AND LIFE SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
All work performed on means of egress, fire rated elements, Fire Suppression, Mass Notification,
and Fire Alarm Systems shall be reviewed, inspected and approved by Government’s FPE for WNY.
1. Area of Responsibility: Examples include, but are not limited to, water distribution systems
including fire pumps and fire hydrants, fire resistive assemblies such as spray-applied fire proofing of
structural components and fire rated walls/partitions, mass notification, fire alarm and detection
systems, fire suppression and standpipe systems, means of egress components, and emergency
and exit lighting fixtures. Related submittals shall be forwarded to the Government FPE prior to
starting work for that item.
1. Construction Surveillance: Government’s FPE shall visit the construction site as necessary
to ensure life safety and fire protection systems are maintained and/or reinstalled in
accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. Frequency and duration of the field visits
are dependent upon particular system components, system complexity, and phase of

th

construction. At a minimum, field visits shall occur just prior to installation of suspended
ceiling system to inspect the integrity of passive fire protection features and fire suppression
system piping, preliminary inspections of mass notification, fire alarm/detection and
suppression systems, and final acceptance testing of mass notification, fire alarm/detection
and suppression systems.
a. Preliminary and Final Inspections and Acceptance Testing: Government’s FPE shall
personally witness all preliminary inspections and testing of mass notification, fire
alarm/detection and suppression systems. Once preliminary inspections and testing
have been successfully completed, the Government’s FPE shall certify to the QC
Manager that systems are fully compliant and ready for final inspection and acceptance
testing. The QC Manager shall provide 14 days advance notice to the Contracting
Officer to schedule the final inspection and acceptance testing with the activity Fire
Inspection Office and the NAVFAC Fire Protection Engineer.
b. Final Life Safety/Fire Protection Certification Documentation: The Contractor shall
coordinate with Government’s FPE for written certification that all life safety and fire
protection features and systems have been installed in accordance with applicable
criteria and manufacturer's requirements. This certification shall summarize all life safety
and fire protection features considered.
Paragraph 6 QUALITY CONTROL
Paragraph 7 SUBMITTAL PROCESSING
S UBMITTAL/BENCHMARK DURATION BENCHMARK RECEIVED S TATUS

1 Quality Control Plan
2 Material Safety Data Sheets
3 Design/Construction
Schedule
4 Waste Management Plan
5 Safety and Health Plan
6 Schedule of Prices
7 Budget Management
Summary
8 Record Drawings
9 Operation and Maintenance

Information
10 Licenses and Permits
11 Badge Requests
12 Statement of
Acknowledgement SF 1413
13 Demolition and Work Plan

th
S UBMITTAL/BENCHMARK DURATION BENCHMARK RECEIVED S TATUS

14 Design Development Docs
15 Final Design Docs
16 Submittal Register
17 Waste Management
Opportunity Assessment
Form
18 Performance/Payment
Bonds
19 Environmental Protection
Plan
20 Certificates of Insurance
21 DD Form 1354
Paragraph 8 SUPERVISION: Fluent in English and other language as necessary to be able to

communicate with employees.
Paragraph 10 BUDGET MANAGEMENT

This project requires a Budget Management System be developed and maintained. The Budget
Management System shall represent major portions of the work such as HVAC, site work, and
exterior skin. The purpose of budget management is to balance scope and value during critical
project design decisions. Update the budget management status at regular intervals during design,
at a minimum with design submittals, for review by and discussion with the COR. The final budget
management summary shall correspond with the final Schedule of Prices.
Paragraph 14 SCHEDULE OF PRICES (values): To be provided to PM by contractor before start

of construction.
Paragraph 15 INVOICES: WAWF system - coordinate with Contract specialist.
Paragraph 19 CONTRACTOR WORK SITE: Lay down areas for staging to be coordinated w/
Government Construction Manager at kick off meeting. Probable location: alley area between
WNY 210 and WNY 157.
Paragraph 20 TEMPORARY UTILITIES

Backflow preventers shall have a certificate of full approval from FCCCHR-USC, University of
Southern California, attesting that the design, size, and make of each backflow preventer has
satisfactorily passed the complete sequence of performance testing and evaluation for the
respective level of approval. Certificate of Provisional Approval will not be acceptable.

th
Paragraph 21 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS AND PROTECTION

The Contractor is required to complete and submit evidence of completion of the Environmental
Compliance Assessment Training and Tracking (ECATTS) program. For more detailed
information on ECATTS see UFGS 01 57 19.00 20.
Paragraph 22 WASTE MANAGEMENT

An Opportunity Assessment Form is required for this project as part of the Waste Management
Plan. Address waste reduction, recycling and salvage and include in Waste Management Plan.
Paragraph 23 RECORD DRAWINGS AND OPERATION & MAINTENANCE (O&M) DATA

Provide the Contracting Officer with two copies of half size as-built drawings, and two CDs
containing drawings (in both pdf and Autocad 2006 formats) and all construction submittals.
Paragraph 24 WARRANTY: Provide copy of warranties with submittals and OPMs.
Paragraph 25 PERFORMANCE EVALUATIONS

To be discussed with Contract specialist or Rick Rutledge 202-685-0830 .
Paragraph 26 WORK HOURS, ACCESS AND PASSES

Work schedule can be coordinated in 3 shifts (24 operation) with the proper JPAS. Schedule to
be discussed with RFP.
Paragraph 27 SECURITY REQUIREMENTS

JPAS: Joint Personnel Adjudication System. Contact (PWD) Dave Crouse in PWD 202-685-8256
for forms and documentation submittal. Contact Mr. William Johnson @ MSC (Military Sealift
Command) 202-685-5145 for security status or information.
Paragraph 28 REQUIRED INSURANCE

Contact Contract specialist Lou Ann Demoske at 202-685-0848 or Rick Rutledge 202-685-0830.
Paragraph 30 GOVERNMENT FURNISHED MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT

Contact contract specialist or Rick Rutledge 202-685-0830 .
Paragraph 34 SAFETY AND OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH

The DOR is required to edit and submit UFGS 01 35 29, Safety and Occupational Health
Requirements.
Safety and Health Officer (SSHO): The Site Safety and Health Officer may serve also as the
Superintendent.
a. Hot Work: To be addressed at the project kick-off meeting.
b. Pre-Outage Coordination Meeting: To be addressed at the project kick off meeting.
**End of PART 2 Attachment A**

SECNAV M-5510.36
June 2006
EXHIBIT 10A
VAULT AND SECURE ROOM (OPEN STORAGE AREA) CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS
1. VAULT
a. Floor and Walls. Eight inches of reinforced-concrete to

meet current structural standards. Walls are to extend to the
underside of the roof slab.
b. Roof. Monolithic reinforced-concrete slab of thickness
to be determined by structural requirements, but not less than
the floors and walls.
c. Ceiling. The roof or ceiling shall be reinforced-
concrete of a thickness to be determined by structural
requirements, but not less than the floors and walls.
d. Door. Vault door and frame unit shall conform to
Federal Specification AA-D-600, Class 5 vault door. Doors shall
be equipped with a built-in GSA-approved combination lock
meeting Federal Specification FF-L-2740.
2. SECURE ROOM
a. Walls, Floor, and Roof. The walls, floor, and roof

construction shall be of permanent construction materials; i.e.
plaster, gypsum wallboard, metal panels, hardboard, wood,
plywood, or other materials offering resistance to, and evidence
of unauthorized entry into the area. Walls shall be extended to
the true ceiling with permanent construction materials, wire
mesh, or 18-gauge expanded steel screen.
b. Ceiling. The ceiling shall be constructed of plaster,
gypsum, wallboard material, hardwood, or any other acceptable
material.
c. Doors. The access door to the room shall be
substantially constructed of wood, metal, or other solid
material and be equipped with a built-in GSA-approved
combination lock meeting Federal Specification FF-L-2740. For
open storage areas approved under previous standards, the lock
may be the previously approved GSA combination lock until the
door has been retrofitted with a lock meeting Federal
Specification FF-L-2740. When double doors are used, an
astragal will be installed on the active leaf of the door. The
hinge pins of outswing doors shall be peened, brazed, or spot
welded to prevent removal. Doors other than the access door
shall be secured from the inside (for example, by a dead bolt
lock, panic dead bolt lock, or rigid wood or metal bar which
10A-1
SECNAV M-5510.36
June 2006
extends across the width of the door, or by any other means that
will prevent entry from the outside. Key operated locks that
can be accessed from the exterior side of the door are not
authorized. Each perimeter door shall be protected by a
balanced magnetic switch that meets the standards of UL 634.
d. Windows. All windows which might reasonably afford
visual observation of classified activities within the facility
shall be made opaque or equipped with blinds, drapes, or other
coverings. Windows at ground level will be constructed from or
covered with materials which provide protection from forced
entry. The protection provided to the windows need be no
stronger than the strength of the contiguous walls. Open
storage areas which are located within a controlled compound or
equivalent may eliminate the requirement for forced entry
protection if the windows are made inoperable either by
permanently sealing them or equipping them on the inside with a
locking mechanism and they are covered by an IDS either
independently or by the motion detection sensors in the space.
e. Openings. Utility openings such as ducts and vents
shall be kept at less than man-passable (96 square inches)
opening. Openings larger than 96 square inches shall be
hardened per the Military Handbook 1013/1A.
10A-2
SECTION 260943.13
DIGITAL-NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Digital-Network Lighting Control System.
2. Fluorescent Electronic Dimming Ballasts.
3. Motorized Shades:
a. Motorized interior privacy and room darkening roller shades.
B. Related Sections:
1. Rough Carpentry: Blocking for support of window shade brackets and pocket assemblies.
2. Plaster and Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum board substrate for window shade systems.
3. Acoustical Ceilings: Shade pockets, pocket closures, and accessories.
4. Addressable Fixture Lighting Control: Digital Electronic Dimming components and ballast
module interfaces.
5. Lighting Control Devices: Occupancy sensors.
6. Lighting Control Panel Boards: Lighting panels (switching) controlled by Digital Network Lighting
Control System.
7. Modular Dimming Controls
8. Wiring Devices: Receptacles
9. Interior Lighting Fixtures, Lamps, and Ballasts: Fluorescent electronic dimming ballasts.
10. Integrated Automation: Building integrator shall provide integration of the lighting control system
with Building Automation Systems.
11. Audio-Video Systems: Connections to audio/visual equipment.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute/Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (ANSI/IEEE) ;

C62.41-1991 – Recommended Practice for Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.
B. ASTM International (ASTM)

1. D4674 -02a Standard Test Method for Accelerated Testing for Color Stability of Plastics
Exposed to Indoor Fluorescent Lighting and Window-Filtered Daylight.
2. G21-96 (2002) - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials
to Fungi.
3. G22-76 (1996) - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Plastics to Bacteria.
C. International Electrotechnical Commission.

1. (IEC) 801-2 Electrostatic Discharge Testing Standard.
2. IEC/EN 60669-2-1 switches for household and similar fixed electrical installations - electronic
switches.
3. IEC/EN 55014-1 (2000) - Emission Test for Electrical Motor-Operated and Thermal Appliances
for Household and Similar Purposes, Electrical Tools and Similar Electrical Apparatus.
4. IEC/EN 61000-3-2 (2000) - Limits for Harmonic Currents Emissions.
5. IEC/EN 61000-3-3 (1995) - Limitation of Voltage Fluctuations and Flicker.
6. IEC/EN 55014-2 (1997) - Immunity Test for Household Appliances Electrical Tools and Similar
__________________________________________________________________________________________
6/10/10
260943.13 - 1
Electrical Appliances.
7. IEC/EN 60335-1 (2004) - Household and Similar Electrical Appliances - General Requirements.
8. IEC/EN 60335-2-97 (2002) - Household and Similar Electrical Appliances - Particular
Requirements for Drives for Roller Shutters, Awnings, Blinds, and Similar Equipment.
D. International Organization for Standardization (ISO); 9001:2000 – Quality Management Systems.
E. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

1. WD1 (R2005) - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices.
2. WD6 – Dimensional Specifications.
3. Ballast standards
F. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

1. 94 – Flammability Rating
2. 489 (2002) - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and Circuit-Breaker
Enclosures.
3. UL498 – Standard for Attachment Plugs and Receptacles.
4. 508 (1999) - Standard for Industrial Control Equipment.
5. UL514C – Standard for Non-metallic Outlet Boxes, Flush Device Boxes, and Covers.
6. 916 – Energy Management Equipment.
7. 924 (2003) - Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment
8. 935 (2005) - Fluorescent Ballasts
9. 1310 – Class 2 Power Units.
10. 1472 (1996) - Solid-State Dimming Controls.
G. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 701 (2004) - Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame
Propagation.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. The Digital Network Lighting Control System includes computer-based software that provides
control, configuration, monitoring, alerting and reports. System includes:
1. Lighting Management Panel
2. Digital Network Lighting Control Manager - light management computer
3. Light management computer software.
4. Energy savings display software
5. Factory assembled dimming and switching panels, power interfaces and power modules
6. Low voltage wall stations, control interfaces and sensors
7. Solid-state high frequency fluorescent dimming ballasts
a. 3-Wire (Line Voltage Controlled) Dimming Ballasts
b. Digital (Low Voltage Controlled) Dimming Ballasts
8. Addressable fixture lighting control components and ballast module interfaces
9. Window treatments
10. Open Loop Solar Adaptive Shade Algorithm
11. Permanently installed occupancy/vacancy sensors and power packs
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Part 6:
B. Specification Conformance Document: Indicate whether the submitted equipment:
__________________________________________________________________________________________
6/10/10
260943.13 - 2
1. Meets specification exactly as stated.
C. Shop Drawings; include:

1. Schematic (one-line diagram) of system.
D. Samples:
1. Samples showing available color and finish selections for controls.
E. Product Data: Catalog cut sheets with performance specifications demonstrating compliance with
specified requirements.
F. Sequence of Operation to describe how each area operates and how any building wide functionality
is described.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications:
1. Minimum 10 years experience in manufacture of lighting management systems.
2. Manufacturer: Minimum 5 years experience in manufacture of precision-engineered, low-voltage
motorized shading systems.
3. Quality System: Registered to ISO 9001:2000 Quality Standards, including in-house
engineering for product design activities.
4. Assign responsibility for design, engineering, installation, and performance of window shade
system to single manufacturer and their qualified dealers and installers.
5. Furnish shading system and electrical control equipment for complete installation and single
source responsibility of shading and lighting control.
6. Qualified to supply specified products and to honor claims against product presented in
accordance with warranty.
B. Lighting control system components:

1. Listed by UL specifically for the required loads. Provide evidence of compliance upon request.
C. Window Shade Installer Qualifications:

1. Qualified to install and start-up specified products by prior factory training, experience,
demonstrated performance, and acceptance of any requirement of the manufacturer, subsidiary
of the manufacturer, or licensed agent.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B. Include installation, programming, and maintenance instructions.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not install equipment until following conditions can be maintained in spaces to receive equipment:
1. Ambient temperature:
a. Lighting Control System and Window Shades: 0 degrees to 40 degrees C (32 degrees to
104 degrees F).
b. Digital Network Lighting Control Manager, system computer: 10 degrees to 35 degrees C
(50 degrees to 90 degrees F)
c. Fluorescent dimming ballasts: 10 degrees to 60 degrees C (50 degrees to 140 degrees F)
2. Relative humidity: Maximum 90 percent, non-condensing.
__________________________________________________________________________________________
6/10/10
260943.13 - 3
3. Lighting control system must be protected from dust during installation.
B. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate pre-wiring of system utilizing manufacturer’s approved low voltage wiring to each shade
drive location.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer’s Enhanced 8 Year Limited Warranty:

1. 8-year limited parts warranty for the replacement of defective Digital-Network Lighting
Components from the date of system startup completion.
2. 2-year Silver Level Support and Maintenance Plan that covers 100 percent parts and labor from
the date of the system startup completion.
B. Digital Network Lighting Control Manager is covered by a 1-year parts and labor warranty.
C. Provide manufacturer’s warranty covering 5 years with factory startup on ballasts and ballast
modules from date of purchase.]Retain paragraph below if Shades will be included to meet project
requirements. Edit to coordinate with other sections in the Project Manual.
D. Provide manufacturer’s 2 year parts and labor and 8 years limited parts warranty for defective shade
equipment.
1.10 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Make ordering of new equipment for expansions, replacements, and spare parts available to end-
user, qualified dealer or installer.
B. Make new replacement parts available for minimum of 10 years from date of manufacture.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Lighting Controls: Ten-year operational life while operating continually at any temperature in an
ambient temperature range of 0 degrees C (32 degrees F) to 40 degrees C (104 degrees F) and 90
percent non-condensing relative humidity.
B. Designed and tested to withstand discharges without impairment of performance when subjected to
discharges of 15,000 volts per IEC 801-2.
2.2 DIMMING / RELAY PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Electrolytic capacitors to operate at least 20 degrees C below the component manufacturer's

maximum temperature rating when device is under fully-loaded conditions in 40 degrees C (104
degrees F) ambient temperature.
B. Load Handling Thyristors (SCRs and triacs), Field Effect Transistors (FETs), and Isolated Gate
Bipolar Transistors (IGBTs): The component’s maximum current rating to be at least two times the
dimmer’s/relay’s rated operating current.
C. Capable of withstanding repetitive inrush current of 50 times operating current without impacting
__________________________________________________________________________________________
6/10/10
260943.13 - 4
lifetime of dimmer/relay.
D. Design and test dimmers/relays to withstand line-side surges without impairment to performance.
1. Panels: Withstand surges without impairment of performance when subjected to surges of
6,000 volts, 3,000 amps per ANSI/IEEE C62.41 and per IEC 61000-4-5 surge requirements.
2. Other power handling devices: Withstand surges without impairment of performance when
subjected to surges of 6,000 volts, 200 amps per ANSI/IEEE C62.41.
E. Utilize air gap off to disconnect the load from line supply.
F. Power failure memory and dimmer/relay recovery:

1. When power is interrupted and subsequently returned, within 3 seconds lights will automatically
return to same levels (dimmed setting, full on, or off) prior to power interruption.
G. Dimmers:
1. Provide real-time cycle-by-cycle compensation for incoming line voltage variations including
changes in RMS voltage (plus or minus 2 percent change in RMS voltage/cycle), frequency
shifts (plus or minus 2 Hz change in frequency/second), dynamic harmonics, and line noise.
2. Systems not providing cycle-by-cycle compensation to include external power conditioning
equipment as part of dimming system.
3. Each dimmer to incorporate electronic "soft-start" default at initial turn-on that smoothly ramps
lights up to the appropriate levels within 0.5 seconds.
4. Control all light sources in smooth and continuous manor. Dimmers with visible steps are not
acceptable.
5. Each dimmer to be assigned a load type that will provide a proper dimming curve for the
specific light source.
6. Possess ability to have load types assigned per circuit, configured in field.
7. Minimum and maximum light levels user adjustable on circuit-by-circuit basis.
8. Line Voltage Dimmers; Meet following load-specific requirements:
a. Magnetic Low Voltage (MLV) transformer:
1) Contain circuitry designed to control and provide a symmetrical AC waveform to input
of magnetic low voltage transformers per UL 1472, Section 5.11.
2) Dimmers using unipolar load current devices (such as FETs or SCRs) to include DC
current protection in the event of a single device failure.
b. Electronic Low Voltage (ELV) transformer:
1) Dimmer to operate electronic low voltage transformers via reverse phase control.
Alternately, forward phase control dimming may be used if dimming equipment
manufacturer has recommended specific ELV transformers being provided.
c. Neon and cold cathode transformers:
1) Magnetic transformers: UL listed for use with normal (low) power factor magnetic
transformers.Electronic transformers: Must be supported by the ballast equipment
manufacturer for control of specific ballasts being provided.
9. Low Voltage Dimming Modules; Meet following requirements:
a. Coordination between low voltage dimming module and line voltage relay: Capable of
being electronically linked to single zone.
b. Single low voltage dimming module; capable of controlling following light sources:
1) 0-10V analog voltage signal.
a) Provide Class 2 isolated 0-10V output signal conforming to IEC 60929.
b) Sink current via IEC 60929.
c) Source current.
2) 10-0V reverse analog voltage signal.
3) DSI digital communication.
__________________________________________________________________________________________
6/10/10
260943.13 - 5
4) DALI broadcast communication IEC 60929:
a) Logarithmic intensity values in compliance with IEC 60929.
b) Linear intensity values for use with LED color intensity control.
5) PWM IEC 60929.
H. Non-dim circuits to meet the following requirements:

1. Rated life of relay at full load: Minimum 1,000,000 cycles.
2. Load switched in manner that prevents arcing at mechanical contacts when power is applied to
and removed from load circuits.
3. Fully rated output continuous duty for inductive, capacitive, and resistive loads.
2.3 POWER PANELS
A. Mechanical:
1. Listed to UL 508 as industrial control equipment.
2. Delivered and installed as a UL listed factory assembled panel.
3. Field wiring accessible from front of panel without need to remove dimmer assemblies or other
components.
4. Panels passively cooled via free-convection, unaided by fans or other means.
5. Ship panels with each dimmer in mechanical bypass position by means of jumper bar inserted
between input and load terminals. Jumpers to carry full rated load current and be reusable at
any time. Mechanical bypass device to allow for switching operation of connected load with
dimmer removed by means of circuit breaker.
B. Electrical:
1. Panels contain branch circuit protection for each input circuit unless the panel is a dedicated
feed-through type panel or otherwise indicated on the drawings.
2. Branch circuit breakers; meet following performance requirements:
a. Listed to UL 489 as molded case circuit breaker for use on lighting circuits.
b. Contain visual trip indicator; rated at [10,000 AIC, 120 V Dimming/Switching], [14,000 AIC,
277 V Dimming], [18,000 AIC, 277 V Switching]. Field verify with client at MSC.
c. Thermal-magnetic construction for overload, short-circuit, and over-temperature protection.
Use of breakers without thermal protection requires dimmers/relays to have integral
thermal protection to prevent failures when overloaded or ambient temperature is above
rating of panel.
d. Accept tag-out/lock-out devices to secure circuit breakers in off position when servicing
loads.
e. Replaceable without moving or replacing dimmer/relay assemblies or other components in
panel.UL listed as switch duty (SWD) so that loads can be switched on and off by
breakers.
3. Minimum UL listed Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) of [25,000A] [45,000A] [65,000A]. Field
verify.
C. Architectural Lighting Control Panel:

1. Dimmers designed and tested to specifically control incandescent/tungsten, magnetic low
voltage, electronic low voltage, neon/cold cathode, fluorescent dimming ballasts, and non-dim
loads.
2. Utilize universal 16A continuous-use UL listed dimmer.
3. Utilize multiple load type low voltage dimming module.
4. Limit current rise time to minimum 350 µsec as measured from 10-90 percent of load current
waveform and minimum 525 µsec as measured from 0-100 percent of load current waveform at
50 percent rated dimmer capacity at a 90 degree conduction angle. Current rise to be minimum
__________________________________________________________________________________________
6/10/10
260943.13 - 6
400 µsec as measured from 10-90 percent of load current waveform and minimum 600 µsec as
measured from 0-100 percent of load current waveform at 100 percent rated dimmer capacity at
a 90 degree conduction angle.
5. Load faults only affect the given circuit.
D. Light Duty Commercial Lighting Control Panel:

1. Surface mounted
2. Utilize multiple load type 16A feed continuous-use UL listed dimming/switching modules.
3. For switching only circuits, utilize 1,000,000 cycle relay.
4. Utilize multiple load type low voltage dimming module.
E. Switching Panels:
1. Surface mounted.
2. Rated life of relay: Minimum 1,000,000 cycles.
3. Load switched in manner that prevents arcing at mechanical contacts when power is applied to
and removed from load circuits.
4. Fully rated output continuous duty for inductive, capacitive, and resistive loads.
F. Panel Processor:
1. Provide following capabilities:
a. Operate circuits directly from panel processor for system diagnostics and provide feedback
of system operation.
b. Electronically assign each circuit to any zone in lighting control system.
c. Determine normal/emergency function of panel and set emergency lighting levels.
2. Where indicated on Drawings, panels to provide two control links. Each circuit to be capable of
transferring control based on independent programming between architectural control system
and theatrical controls utilizing the USITT DMX-512 1990 or ESTA DMX-512A protocol.
3. React to changes from control within 20 milliseconds.
G. Diagnostics and Service:

1. Replacing dimmer/relay does not require re-programming of system or processor.
2. Dimmers/relays: Include diagnostic LEDs to verify proper operation and assist in system
troubleshooting.
3. Dimming/relay panels: Include tiered control scheme for dealing with component failure that
minimizes loss of control for occupant.
a. If lighting control system fails, lights to remain at current level. Panel processor provides
local control of lights until system is repaired.
b. If panel processor fails, lights to remain at current level. Circuit breakers can be used to
turn lights off or to full light output, allowing non-dim control of lights until panel processor is
repaired.
c. If dimmer fails, factory-installed mechanical bypass jumpers to allow each dimmer to be
mechanically bypassed. Mechanical bypass device to allow for switching operation of
connected load with dimmer removed by means of circuit breaker.
2.4 FLUORESCENT ELECTRONIC DIMMING BALLASTS
A. General
1. Ten-year operational life while operating with a case temperature range of 10 degrees C (50
degrees F) to 75 degrees C (167 degrees F) and 90 percent non-condensing relative humidity.
2. Designed and tested to withstand electrostatic discharges up to 15,000 V without impairmentper
IEC 801-2.
3. Electrolytic capacitors to operate at least 20 degrees C below the capacitor’s maximum
__________________________________________________________________________________________
6/10/10
260943.13 - 7
temperature rating when the ballast is under fully-loaded conditions and case temperature is 75
degrees C (167 degrees F).
4. Programmed Rapid Start Type.
5. Maximum inrush current of 7 amperes for 120V ballasts and 3 amperes for 277V ballasts.
6. Current crest factor (CCF) less than 1.7.
7. Meet ANSI C82.11 High frequency ballast standard.
8. Will not interfere with infrared devices operating at frequencies between 38 kHz and 42 kHz.
9. Withstand up to a 6,000 volt surge without impairment of performance as defined by ANSI
C62.41 Category A.
10. Manufactured in a facility that employ ESD reduction practices in compliance with ANSI/ESD
S20.20.
11. Inaudible in a 27 dBA ambient.
12. No visible change in light output with a variation of plus/minus 10 percent line voltage input.
13. Total Harmonic Distortion less than [10 percent] [20 percent] and meet ANSI C82.11 maximum
allowable THD requirements
14. Actively prevent overheating in T5-HO linear fluorescent lamp applications.
15. Ballasts to track evenly across:
a. Multiple lamp lengths.
b. All light levels.
B. 3-Wire Control
1. Continuous dimming from 100 percent to 10 percent relative light output.
2. Provide integral fault protection to prevent ballast failure in the event of a mis-wire.
C. Digital Control
1. Continuous dimming from 100 percent to 10 percent relative light output.
2. Monitor and report lamp and ballast status.
3. Lights automatically return to the setting prior to power interruption.
4. Each ballast responds independently to:
a. Up to 32 occupant sensors.
b. Up to 64 personal control inputs.
c. 2 daylight sensors.
5. Unique internal reference number visibly displayed on ballast cover.
6. Averages 2 independent daylight harvesting inputs internally.
7. Responds to digital load shed command.
a. Automatically scales light output proportional to load shed command.
1) Example: If light output is at 30 percent and a load shed command of 10 percent is
received, the ballast automatically sets the maximum light output at 90 percent and
lowers current light output by 3 percent to 27 percent.
8. Digital Electronic Dimming Ballasts
a. Connect without interface to:
1) Occupant sensor (motion detector).
2) Daylight sensor.
3) Personal control input (keypad or infrared receiver).
b. Provide a 20VDC source to power connected sensors.
c. Generate digital communication commands to distribute ballast and sensor data on the
digital bus.
2.5 LIGHTING CONTROL MODULE
__________________________________________________________________________________________
6/10/10
260943.13 - 8
A. Switching Lighting Control Module:
1. Mechanical:
a. Listed to UL 508 (United States) as industrial control equipment.
b. Delivered and installed as a UL listed factory assembled panel.
c. Panels passively cooled via free-convection, unaided by fans or other means.
2. Surface mounted
3. Minimum UL listed Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) of 25,000A.
4. Switching:
a. Rated life of relay: Minimum 1,000,000 cycles.
b. Load switched in manner that prevents arcing at mechanical contacts when power is
applied to and removed from load circuits.
c. Fully rated output continuous duty for inductive, capacitive, and resistive loads.
d. Module to integrate up to 4 individually controlled zones, each with a capacity of up to 16
amps, of high in-rush lighting load (magnetic fluorescent ballast, electronic fluorescent
ballast, HID, incandescent, magnetic low-voltage, electronic low-voltage, neon/cold
cathode and motor loads).
5. Connection without interface to wired:
a. Occupancy sensors
b. Daylight sensors
c. IR receivers for personal control
6. Connects to Lighting Management Panel via RS485.
7. LED status indicators confirm communication with occupancy sensors, daylight sensors, and IR
receivers.
8. Thermal protection reports to Light Management System if module overheats.
9. Contact Closure Input
a. Directly accept contact closure input from a dry contact closure or solid-state output without
interface to:
1) Activate scenes
2) Enable or disable time clock
10. Emergency Contact Closure Input
a. Turn all zones to full output during emergency state via direct contact closure input from UL
924 Listed Emergency Lighting Interface, security system or fire alarm system
b. Allow configurable zone response during emergency state.
c. Disable control operation until emergency signal is cleared.
B. 0-10V Lighting Control Module:

1. Meet the following requirements:
a. Coordination between low voltage dimming module and line voltage relay: Capable of
being electronically linked to single zone.
b. Single low voltage dimming module; capable of controlling following light sources:
1) 0-10V analog voltage signal.
a) Provide Class 2 isolated 0-10V output signal conforming to IEC 60929.
b) Sink current via IEC 60929.
2. Mechanical:
a. Listed to UL 508 (United States) as industrial control equipment. CSA (Canada) certified,
or NOM (Mexico) approved as applicable.
b. Delivered and installed as a [UL] [CSA] listed factory assembled panel.
3. Surface mounted
4. Minimum UL listed Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) of 25,000A.
__________________________________________________________________________________________
6/10/10
260943.13 - 9
5. Switching:
a. Rated life of relay: Minimum 1,000,000 cycles.
b. Load switched in manner that prevents arcing at mechanical contacts when power is
applied to and removed from load circuits.
c. Fully rated output continuous duty for inductive, capacitive, and resistive loads.
d. Module to integrate up to 4 individually controlled zones, each with a capacity of up to 16
amps, of high in-rush lighting load (magnetic fluorescent ballast, electronic fluorescent
ballast, HID, incandescent, magnetic low-voltage, electronic low-voltage, neon/cold
cathode and motor loads).
6. Connection without interface to wired:
b. Daylight sensors
receivers.
interface to:
1) Activate scenes
2) Enable or disable time clock
b. Allow configurable zone response during emergency state.
c. Disable control operation until emergency signal is cleared.
C. Digital Fixture Lighting Control Module

1. Mechanical:
a. Listed to UL 508 (United States) as industrial control equipment. CSA (Canada) certified,
or NOM (Mexico) approved as applicable.
b. Delivered and installed as a [UL] [CSA] listed factory assembled panel.
2. Supports one or two independent links of up to 64 ballasts per link.
3. Connect without interface to wired:
b. Daylight sensors
receivers.
interface to:
1) Activate afterhours mode
2) Provide basic load shed functionality
__________________________________________________________________________________________
6/10/10
260943.13 - 10
b. Disable control operation until emergency signal is cleared.
9. Programming Connection:
a. Provide Ethernet input for wired connection to wireless router.
b. Provide ability for programming from an iPod touch or IPhone via wireless router.
2.6 POWER INTERFACES
A. Electrical:
1. Phase independent of control input.
2. Dimmer to meet limited short circuit test as defined in UL 508.
B. Diagnostics and Service: Replacing power interface does not require re-programming of system or
processor.
2.7 POWER MODULES
A. Preset lighting control with zone override:

1. Intensity for each zone indicated by means of one illuminated bar graph per zone.
2. User-programmable zone and scene names.
3. Astronomical time clock and programmer interface
a. Provide access to:
1) Scene selections.
2) Fade zone to a level.
3) Fine-tuning of preset levels with scene raise/lower.
4) Lock out scenes and zones.
5) Fine-tuning of light levels with individual zone raise/lower.
6) Terminal block for wired infrared signal input.
7) Enable/disable wall station.
4. Light intensity with real time energy savings by digital display.
5. Fade time indicated by digital display for current scene while fading.
6. Integral wide angle infrared receiver.
7. For temporary local overrides, individual raise/lower buttons to allow zones to be adjusted
without altering scene values stored in memory.
8. Direct low-voltage control of digital ballasts (field verify 120V, 220/240V, and/or 277V lighting) :
a. Electronically link a digital fluorescent lighting ballast to a zone for both dimming and turn
on/off
b. Electronically assign daylight sensors to digital ballasts and line voltage dimmers for
proportional daylight harvesting
c. Single integral controller with Class 1 or Class 2 isolated digital output signal conforming to
IEC 60929; capable of direct (no-interface) control.]
B. Preset shade control with zone override:

1. Preset expandable shade control: Provide up to 3 columns of shade control.
2. For temporary local overrides, individual raise/lower buttons to allow zones to be adjusted
without altering scene values stored in memory.
2.8 DIGITAL ELECTRONIC DIMMING BALLAST AND SWITCHING MODULES
A. General
1. Continuous 3-Wire signal dimming to 3-Wire electronic dimming ballast.
__________________________________________________________________________________________
6/10/10
260943.13 - 11
2. Connect without interface to:
a. Occupant sensor (motion detector).
b. Daylight sensor.
c. Personal control input (wall station or infrared receiver).
3. Generate digital communication commands to distribute ballast and sensor data on the digital
bus.
4. If power is interrupted and subsequently returned, lights automatically return to the setting prior
to power interruption.
5. Each ballast responds independently to:
a. Up to 32 occupant sensors.
b. Up to 64 personal control inputs.
c. 2 daylight sensors.
6. Unique internal reference number visibly displayed on module cover.
7. Averages 2 independent daylight harvesting inputs internally.
8. Responds to digital load shed command
a. Sets high end trim.
b. Automatically scales light output proportional to load shed command.
1) Example: If light output is at 30 percent and a load shed command of 10 percent is
received, the ballast automatically sets the maximum light output at 90 percent and
lowers current light output by 3 percent to 27 percent.
9. Electrical: Dimmer to meet limited short circuit test as defined in UL 20.
10. Provide integral fault protection to prevent ballast module failure in the event of a mis-wire.
B. 2 Amp 3-Wire Ballast Module (if required)

1. Ballast module to integrate up to 2 amps of 3-wire electronic dimming ballast into a Digital
Network Lighting control system as a single zone.
C. 16 Amp 3-Wire Ballast Module (if required)

1. Ballast module to integrate up to 16 amps of 3-wire electronic dimming ballast into a Digital
Network Lighting control system as a single zone.]
D. 16 Amp Switching Ballast Module

1. Module to integrate up to 16 amps of high in-rush lighting load (magnetic fluorescent ballast,
electronic fluorescent ballast, HID, incandescent, magnetic low-voltage, electronic low-voltage,
neon/cold cathode and motor loads) into a Digital Network Lighting control system as a single
zone.]
2.9 LIGHTING MANAGEMENT PANEL
A. Provide Lighting Management Panel in a pre-assembled NEMA listed enclosure with terminal blocks
listed for field wiring.
B. Enables Light Management software to control and monitor digital electronic dimming ballasts and
modules, Power Panels, preset controls, and window treatments.
1. Lighting Management Panel utilizes Ethernet connectivity to Digital Network Lighting Control
Manager.
a. Dedicated Network Environment is used to connect Digital Electronic Control Manager with
Lighting Management Panels.
C. Integrate control station devices, power panels, shades, preset lighting controls, and external inputs
into single customizable, multiple failsafe lighting control system, operable manually, automatically or
through computer control.
__________________________________________________________________________________________
6/10/10
260943.13 - 12
D. Astronomical time clock.
E. Solar clock to track the position of the sun to control the shades to limit penetration of direct sunlight.
F. Maintains a backup of the programming in a non-volatile memory capable of lasting more than ten
years without power.
G. BACnet Integration License for Lights

1. Provide ability to communicate by means of BACnet IP communication to Digital Network
Lighting Control system from a user-supplied 10BASE-T or 100BASE-T Ethernet network.
2. Each Lighting Management Panel processor requires license for BACnet integration.
3. Basic BACnet integration license for lights
a. The BACnet integrator can command:
1) Area light output
2) Area enable or disable afterhours mode
3) Area load shed level
4) Area load shed enable/disable
b. The BACnet integrator can monitor:
1) Area on/off status
2) Area occupancy status
3) Area fault
4) Area load shed status
5) Area instantaneous energy usage]
H. BACnet Integration License for Shades

1. Provide ability to communicate by means of BACnet IP communication to Digital Network
Lighting Control system from a user-supplied 10BASE-T or 100BASE-T Ethernet network.
2. Each Lighting Management Panel processor requires license for BACnet integration.
3. Basic BACnet integration license for shades
a. The BACnet integrator can activate area shade group presets.
b. The BACnet integrator can monitor area shade group presets.
4. Shade assignment and grouping will be self discoverable with 3rd party building management
software.
2.10 LIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM COMPUTER
A. Server
1. Used for 24 hour per day, 7 day per week programming, monitoring, control, graphics, and data
logging of digital network lighting controls.
2. Used to handle client machine request in multi-computer systems.
3. Computer to be provided by the lighting control system manufacturer.
4. Computer software preinstalled and tested prior to shipping.
2.11 LIGHTING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM SOFTWARE
A. Provide system software license and hardware that is designed, tested, manufactured, and
warranted by a single manufacturer.
B. Configuration Setup
1. Used to make system programming and configuration changes
2. Windows based, capable of running on either central server or a remote client over TCP/IP
connection
__________________________________________________________________________________________
6/10/10
260943.13 - 13
3. Allow [manufacturer][user] to:
a. Capture system design.
1) Geographical Layout
2) Load Schedule Zoning
3) Shade Grouping
4) Equipment Schedule
5) Equipment assignment to lighting management panels
6) Daylighting design
b. Define the configuration for the following in each area:
1) Lighting Scenes
2) Shade Group Presets
3) Control Station Devices
4) Interface and Integration Equipment
5) Occupancy/After Hours
6) Partitioning
7) Daylighting
8) Emergency Lighting
9) Nitelights
c. Start-up
1) Addressing
2) Daylighting
C. Control and Monitor

1. Basic System View
a. The Light Management Computer Software system navigation and status reporting is
performed using a tree view of the building.
2. Optional Graphical Floor plan View
a. The Light Management Computer Software system navigation and status reporting is
performed using customized CAD based drawings of your building. Pan and Zoom feature
allows for easy navigation. Basic system view is always available.
3. Control of Lights & Shades
a. Area lights can be monitored for on/off status.
b. All lights in an area can be turned on/off or sent to a specific level.
c. For areas that have been zoned, these areas may be sent to a predefined lighting scene,
and individual zones may be controlled.
d. Area lighting scenes can be modified in real-time, changing the levels zones go to when a
scene is activated.
e. Area shades can be monitored for current preset or position.
f. Area shades can be opened/closed, sent to a preset, or sent to a specific position.
4. Occupancy
a. Area occupancy can be monitored.
b. Area occupancy can be disabled to override occupancy control or in case of occupancy
sensor problems.
c. Area occupancy settings including level lights turn on to when area is occupied and level
lights turn off to when area is unoccupied can be changed in real-time.
5. Daylighting
a. Daylighting can be enabled/disabled. This can be used to override the control currently
taking place in the space.
b. Daylight target levels can be changed for each daylit area. This is particularly useful when
new departments move into a space.
__________________________________________________________________________________________
6/10/10
260943.13 - 14
6. Load Shedding
a. Load shedding allows the building manager to monitor whole building lighting power usage
and apply a load shed reduction to selected areas, thereby reducing a building’s power
usage.
7. Scheduling
a. Schedule time of day and astronomic time clock events to automate functions for lights and
shades.
8. Reporting allow the building manager to gather real-time and historical information about the
system as follows:
a. Energy Reports – Show a comparison of cumulative energy used over a period of time for
one or more areas.
b. Power Reports – Show power usage trend over a period of time for one or more areas.
c. Activity Report – Shows what activity has taken place over a period of time for one or more
areas. Activity includes occupant activities (i.e. areas going occupied/unoccupied, wall
controls being pressed), building manager operation (controlling/changing areas using the
control & monitor tool), and device failures (keypads, ballasts, etc. not responding).
d. Lamp Failure Report – Shows which areas are currently reporting lamp failures.
9. Diagnostics
a. Diagnostics allows the building manager to check on the status of all equipment in the
lighting control system. Devices will be listed with a reporting status of OK, missing, or
unknown.
10. Administration
a. Users – Allows new user accounts to be created and existing user accounts to be edited.
b. Publish Graphical Floor plan – Allows admin user to publish new graphical floor plan files,
allowing users to monitor the status of lights, occupancy of areas, and day lighting status.
c. Back-up Project Database – Allows admin user to backup the project database. The
project database holds all the configuration information for the system, including keypad
programming, area scenes, day lighting, occupancy programming, emergency levels, night
lights, and time clock. The Control and Monitor tool can be used to adjust some of these
settings, and thus it is important to back-up the project database prior to changing settings
in the Design and Setup tool.
11. Publish Project Database – Allows the admin user to send a new project database to the server
and download the new configuration to the system. The project database holds all the
configuration information for the system, including keypad programming, area scenes, day
lighting, occupancy programming, emergency levels, night lights, and time clock.
D. Energy Savings display software

1. Provide software from a single manufacturer that can collect and display energy savings from all
of the lighting components in the lighting control system.]
E. Open Loop Solar Adaptive Algorithm

1. Primary Goals of the shade control system are:
a. Optimize daylight
b. Provide manual override capability for occupants via wall mounted keypad or simple
remote control
c. Maximize occupants connectivity with outdoors by optimizing view
d. Provide diffuse daylight and minimize direct sunlight in the space to reduce solar heat gain
and maximize occupants’ comfort in the space
e. Reduce glare
f. Shades along same façade will, start, stop and track in unison to maintain a consistent
exterior aesthetic
2. Hardware
__________________________________________________________________________________________
6/10/10
260943.13 - 15
a. Independent operation of solar tracking program through non-windows based operating
system provided in one or more light management panels.
3. Control Software
a. Control software shall incorporate a solar tracking software that:
1) Calculates the sun’s position in the sky relative to the building and then calculates
when shade movement is necessary by façade.
2) Calculates the position of the shade to limit direct sunlight penetration to a
predetermined limit
b. Control software shall be controlled using the following inputs for start up:
1) Building location
2) Façade orientation
3) Window Dimensions
4) Solar depth of penetration
5) Number of shade movements per day
c. Control software shall require minimal long term maintenance and service. System will not
require user to make daily changes to programming or overall system functionality, unless
desired by the owner
4. User Interface
a. PC Graphic User Interface
1) User Interface will provide access to all adjustable parameters of solar depth of
penetration and number of shade movements per day
b. Manual Override
1) Temporary override of the control program shall be capable through optional manual
keypads.
2) Keypads shall be capable of providing manual control of shades in a particular area.]
2.12 LOW-VOLTAGE WALL STATIONS
A. System Wall Stations

1. Allows controls of any devices part of the Digital Network Lighting Control System.
2. Product: Preset Lighting Controls with Zone Override.
3. Electronics:
a. Use RS485 wiring for low voltage communication.
4. Functionality:
a. Upon button press, LEDs to immediately illuminate.
b. LEDs to reflect the true system status. LEDs to remain illuminated if the button press was
properly processed or the LEDs turn off if the button press was not processed.
c. Allow for easy reprogramming without replacing unit.
d. Replacement of units does not require reprogramming.
5. Color:
a. Match NEMA WD1, Section 2.] [Custom color to be selected.
b. Color variation in same product family: Maximum ΔE=1, CIE L*a*b color units.
c. Visible parts: Exhibit ultraviolet color stability when tested with multiple actinic light sources
as defined in ASTM D4674. Provide proof of testing upon request.
6. Provide faceplates with concealed mounting hardware.
7. Engrave wall stations in English with appropriate button, zone, and scene engraving
descriptions.
8. Silk-screened borders, logos, and graduations to use graphic process that chemically bonds
graphics to faceplate, resistant to removal by scratching and cleaning.
9. Software Configuration:
__________________________________________________________________________________________
6/10/10
260943.13 - 16
a. Customizable control station device button functionality:
1) Buttons can be programmed to perform single defined action.
2) Buttons can be programmed to perform defined action on press and defined action on
release.
10. Control station device LEDs to support logic that defines when it is illuminated:
a. Scene logic (logic is true when all zones are at defined levels).
b. Room logic (logic is true when at least one zone is on).
c. Pathway (logic is true when at least one zone is on).
d. Last scene (logic is true when spaces are in defined scenes).
B. Digital Ballast Wall Stations

1. General:
a. Class 2 (low voltage).
b. Integral IR receiver for personal control.
c. Immediate local LED response upon button activation to indicate that a system command
has been requested.
d. Wall stations can be replaced without reprogramming.
e. Color:
f. Match NEMA WD1, Section 2 White.
g. Color variation in same product family: Maximum ΔE=1, CIE L*a*b color units.
h. Visible parts: Exhibit ultraviolet color stability when tested with multiple actinic light sources
2. One Button Control
a. Toggle on/off and master raise/lower control for group of fixtures.
3. Four Button Control
a. Recall 4 Scenes plus all on or all off for one group of fixtures.
b. Master raise/lower control entire group of fixtures.
2.13 LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL INTERFACES
A. Contact Closure Interface:

1. The contact closure input device will accept both momentary and maintained contact closures.
2. The contact closure output device can be configured for maintained or pulsed outputs.
B. Contact Closure Input Interface:

1. The contact closure input device will accept both momentary and maintained contact closures.
C. RS232 and Ethernet Interface:

1. Provide ability to communicate via Ethernet or RS232 to audiovisual equipment, touch screens,
etc.
2. Provide control of:
a. Lights scene selections.
b. Shade Group Presets.
c. Fine-tuning of shade preset or light scenes levels with raise/lower.
d. Simulate system wall station button presses and releases.
3. Provide status monitoring of:
a. Light scene-status.
b. Shade Group status.
c. Wall station button presses and releases.
d. Wall station LEDs.
__________________________________________________________________________________________
6/10/10
260943.13 - 17
D. DMX Interface
1. Provide ability to:
a. Map a single zone intensity to a single DMX512 channel
b. Map a single zone intensity to 3 DMX512 channels for RGB/CMY color-control
E. Sensor Module
1. Provide wired inputs for:
b. Daylight sensors
d. Digital Ballast Wall Stations
2.14 SENSORS
A. Ceiling and Wall Mount Occupancy/Vacancy Sensors

1. Sensing mechanism - field verify with MSC Client:
a. Infrared: Utilize multiple segmented lens, with internal grooves to eliminate dust and
residue build-up.
b. Ultrasonic: Utilize an operating frequency of 32 kHz or 40 kHz that shall be crystal
controlled to operate within plus or minus 0.005 percent tolerance.
c. Dual technology:
1) Utilize multiple segmented lens, with internal grooves to eliminate dust and residue
build-up.
2) Utilize an operating frequency of 32 kHz or 40 kHz that shall be crystal controlled to
operate within plus or minus 0.005 percent tolerance.
2. Connect directly to digital electronic dimming ballast and modules without the need of a power
pack or other interface
3. Sensors shall turn off or reduce lighting automatically after reasonable time delay when a room
or area is vacated by the last person to occupy the space
4. Sensor shall accommodate all conditions of space utilization and all irregular work hours and
habits.
5. Sensors shall be UL/CUL/NOM listed (as appropriate)
6. Sensors shall be fully adaptive and adjust their sensitivity and timing to ensure optimal lighting
control for any use of the space
7. Sensors shall have field adjustable controls for time delay and sensitivity to override any
adaptive features.
8. Power failure memory:
a. Controls incorporate non-volatile memory. Should power be interrupted and subsequently
restored, settings and learned parameters saved in protected memory shall not be lost.
9. Provide all necessary mounting hardware and instructions.
10. Sensors shall be Class 2 devices.
11. Indicate viewing directions on mounting bracket for all Ceiling mount sensors.
12. Provide customizable mask to block off unwanted viewing areas for all ceiling mounted sensors
using infrared technology.
13. Provide swivel mount base for all wall mount sensors.
14. Provide an internal additional isolated relay with Normally Open, Normally Closed and Common
outputs for use with HVAC control, Data Logging and other control options.
B. Sensor Power Packs

1. For ease of mounting, installation and future service, power pack(s) shall be able to mount
through a 1/2" knock-out in a standard electrical enclosure and be an integrated, self-contained
__________________________________________________________________________________________
6/10/10
260943.13 - 18
unit consisting internally of an isolated load switching control relay and a transformer to provide
low-voltage power. Transformer shall provide power to a minimum of three (3) sensors.
2. Power pack shall be plenum rated
3. Control wiring between sensors and control units shall be Class 2, 18-24 AWG, stranded U.L.
Classified, PVC insulated or TEFLON jacketed cable suitable for use in plenums, where
applicable
C. Infrared Receivers
1. Use Class 2 wiring for low voltage communication
2. Can be replaced without reprogramming
3. 360 degree reception of wireless infrared remote controls
4. Immediate local LED response upon reception of hand held transmitter communication
5. Constructed with plastic meeting UL94 HB
6. Mountable on lighting fixtures or recessed acoustical ceiling tiles
7. Constructed via sonic welding
8. Color:
a. Match NEMA WD1, Section 2 White
b. Color variation in same product family: Maximum ΔE=1, CIE L*a*b color units
c. Visible parts: Exhibit ultraviolet color stability when tested with multiple actinic light sources
D. Interior Daylight Sensors

1. Wired daylight Sensor
a. Use Class 2 wiring for low voltage communication
b. Can be replaced without reprogramming
c. Open-loop basis for daylight sensor control scheme
d. Stable output over temperature from 0 degrees to 40 degrees C
e. Partially shielded for accurate detection of available daylight to prevent fixture lighting and
horizontal light component from skewing sensor detection
f. Provide linear response from 0 to 500 foot-candles
g. Integral IR receiver for personal control
h. Constructed with plastic meeting UL94 HB
i. Mountable on lighting fixtures or recessed acoustical ceiling tiles
j. Constructed via sonic welding
k. Color:
1) Match NEMA WD1, Section 2 White
2) Color variation in same product family: Maximum ΔE=1, CIE L*a*b color units
3) Visible parts: Exhibit ultraviolet color stability when tested with multiple actinic light
sources as defined in ASTM D4674. Provide proof of testing upon request.
E. Exterior Daylight Sensors

1. Calibrated with independent turn-on and turn-off thresholds; minimum 2 foot-candles difference
between the turn-on and turn-off thresholds.
2. Enclosed in weatherproof housing with shading and lens protection visor.
F. Infrared Partition Sensor

1. Provide contact closure based on status of the partition wall (open/close).
2.15 ACCESSORIES
A. Emergency Lighting Interface
__________________________________________________________________________________________
6/10/10
260943.13 - 19
1. Provides total system listing to UL924 when used with Digital Network Lighting Control system.
2. Senses all three phases of building power.
3. Provides an output to power panels or Digital Ballast Interfaces if power on any phase fails and
sends all lights controlled by these devices to [an emergency light level setting] [100 percent
intensity]. Lights to return to their previous intensities when normal power is restored.
4. Accepts a contact closure input from a fire alarm control panel.
B. Infrared Transmitters:
1. Provide wireless remote control.
2. Designed for use in conjunction with compatible infrared receiver and lighting control;
compatibility dependent on that receiver, not transmitter.
3. Operate up to 15 meters (50 feet) within line-of-sight to that receiver.
4. “Learnable” by other variable frequency remote controls.
2.16 ROLLER SHADES
A. General:
1. Ultra-quiet, precision-controlled electronic drive unit housed inside roller tube, controlling shade
movement.
2. Audible noise: Maximum 44 dBA measured 3 feet from electronic drive unit. No audible clicks
when motor starts or stops.
3. Operate independently, without use of external group controllers.
4. Control shade speed for tracking within plus or minus 0.0625 inch throughout entire travel.
5. Include 10 year power failure memory for preset stops, open and close limits, shade grouping
and subgrouping, and system configuration.
6. Systems with multiple electronic drive units electronically synchronized to start, stop, and move
in unison.
B. Grouping:
1. Keypads and contact closure inputs can control any electronic drive unit without separate group
controller.
2. System may contain multiple electronic drive units.
3. Keypads and interfaces able to operate any group or subgroup of electronic drive units within a
subsystem.
C. System Controls:
1. Shades controlled by built-in shade columns on lighting control or by keypad.
2. System devices, including shades and lighting controls, connected through common
communication link.
D. System Performance:
1. One-touch control of shades by means of keypad, lighting control, or infrared remote.
2. Capable of stopping within accuracy of 0.125 inch at any point between open and close limits.
3. Store over 250 programmable stop points, including open, close, and any other position.
4. Presets set by 5-second button push and hold from keypad, lighting control, or handheld remote
control.
5. Presets recalled by keypad, contact closure input, infrared receiver, Light Management System
Software, or other lighting control system interface.
6. Open and close limits programmable from electronic drive unit, lighting control, wall-mounted
keypad, or handheld remote control.
E. Power Supplies:
__________________________________________________________________________________________
6/10/10
260943.13 - 20
1. Electronic drive units powered with 24 VDC from approved power supply; power supply via NEC
Class 2 power source.
2. Provide power panel including 10 individual outputs.
2.17 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform full-function testing on all completed assemblies at end of line. Statistical sampling is not
acceptable.
B. Perform full-function testing on 100 percent of all ballasts at the factory.
C. Audit burn-in at 40 degrees C (104 degrees F) ambient temperature of dimming assemblies and
panels at full load for two hours.
D. Perform burn-in at 40 degrees C (104 degrees F) ambient temperature on 100 percent of all ballasts
at the factory.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions.
B. Provide complete installation of system in accordance with Contract Documents.
C. Provide dedicated network between Digital Network Lighting Control Manager computer and Lighting
Management Panels.
D. Provide equipment at locations and in quantities indicated on Drawings. Provide any additional
equipment required to provide control intent.
E. Define each dimmer's/relay’s load type, assign each load to a zone, and set control functions.
F. Mount exterior daylight sensors to point due north with constant view of daylight.
G. Ensure that daylight sensor placement minimizes sensors view of electric light sources; ceiling
mounted and fixture-mounted daylight sensors shall not have direct view of luminaries.
H. Season lamps at full intensity according to lamp manufacturer’s recommendation.
I. Lead lengths to lamp sockets not to exceed three feet (.9m) for T4 4-pin compact lamps and T5
BIAX and seven feet (2.1 m) for T5, T5-HO, T8 U-bend, and T8 linear fluorescent lamps.
J. Rapid starts sockets must meet IEC 60400
3.2 SERVICE AND SUPPORT
A. Startup and Programming

1. Provide factory certified field service engineer to make minimum of three site visits to ensure
proper system installation and operation under following parameters
a. Qualifications for factory certified field service engineer:
1) Minimum experience of 2 years training in the electrical/electronic field.
2) Certified by the equipment manufacturer on the system installed.
b. Make first visit prior to installation of wiring. Review:
__________________________________________________________________________________________
6/10/10
260943.13 - 21
1) Low voltage wiring requirements.
2) Separation of power and low voltage/data wiring.
3) Wire labeling.
4) Lighting Management Panel locations and installations.
5) Control locations.
6) Computer jack locations.
7) Load circuit wiring.
8) Network wiring requirements.
9) Connections to other equipment.
10) Installer responsibilities.
11) Power Panel locations.
c. Make second visit upon completion of installation of Network Lighting Control System:
1) Verify connection of power wiring and load circuits.
2) Verify connection and location of controls.
3) Energize Lighting Management Panels and download system data program.
4) Address devices.
5) Verify proper connection of panel links (low voltage/data) and address panel.
6) Download system panel data to dimming/switching panels
7) Check dimming panel load types and currents and supervise removal of by-pass
jumpers.
8) Verify system operation control by control.
9) Verify proper operation of manufacturers interfacing equipment.
10) Verify proper operation of manufacturers supplied PC and installed programs.
11) Configure initial groupings of ballast for wall controls, daylight sensors and occupant
sensors.
12) Initial calibration of sensors.
13) Obtain sign-off on system functions.
d. Make third visit to demonstrate and educate Owner’s representative on system capabilities,
operation and maintenance.
2. Startup
a. Lighting configuration
1) Naming and association of areas and lighting zones.
b. After Hours Start-up
1) Provide factory certified Field Service Engineer to perform manufacturer’s start-up
procedures outside normal working hours (Monday through Friday, 7a.m. to 5 p.m.)]
B. Training of customer representatives for Light management computer software

1. Configuration Software used to make system programming and configuration changes
2. Control and Monitor
3. Energy Savings Display Software
C. Tech Support
1. Provide factory direct technical support hotline 24 hours per day, 7 days per week.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer Services
1. Aim and Focus Visit
a. Facility Representative to coordinate on-site meeting with Lighting Control System
Manufacturer and Lighting Design Consultant to make required lighting adjustments to the
__________________________________________________________________________________________
6/10/10
260943.13 - 22
system for conformance with the Lighting Design Consultant’s original design intent.
3.4 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. Training Visit
1. Lighting Control System Manufacturer to provide 4 days additional on-site system training to site
personnel.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate proper operation and maintenance of window shade system to Owner.
3.6 MAINTENANCE
A. Capable of providing on-site service support within 24 hours anywhere in continental United States
and within 72 hours worldwide except where special visas are required.
B. Offer renewable service contract on yearly basis, to include parts, factory labor, and annual training
visits. Make service contracts available up to ten years after date of system startup.
END OF SECTION
__________________________________________________________________________________________
6/10/10
260943.13 - 23
SECTION 22 00 00
PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE

05/10
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the

extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
AIR-CONDITIONING, HEATING AND REFRIGERATION INSTITUTE (AHRI)
AHRI 1010 (2002) Self-Contained, Mechanically

Refrigerated Drinking-Water Coolers
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING

ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)
ASHRAE 90.1 - IP (2007; Supplement 2008; Errata 2009;

Errata 2009; INT 1-3 2009) Energy Standard
for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential
Buildings
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SANITARY ENGINEERING (ASSE)
ASSE 1010 (2004) Performance Requirements for Water

Hammer Arresters
ASSE 1018 (2001) Performance Requirements for Trap

Seal Primer Valves - Potable, Water
Supplied
ASSE 1037 (1990) Performance Requirements for

Pressurized Flushing Devices
(Flushometers) for Plumbing Fixtures
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)
AWWA 10084 (2005) Standard Methods for the

Examination of Water and Wastewater
AWWA B300 (2004) Hypochlorites
AWWA B301 (2004) Liquid Chlorine
AWWA C203 (2008) Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and

Linings for Steel Water Pipelines - Enamel
and Tape - Hot-Applied
AWWA C606 (2006) Grooved and Shouldered Joints
AWWA C651 (2005; Errata 2005) Standard for

Disinfecting Water Mains
Page 1
AWWA C652 (2002) Disinfection of Water-Storage
Facilities
AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)
AWS A5.8/A5.8M (2004; Errata 2004) Specification for

Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding
AWS B2.2 (1991) Standard for Brazing Procedure and

Performance Qualification
ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)
ASME A112.14.1 (2003; R 2008) Backwater Valves
ASME A112.19.2 (2003; R 2008) Standard for Vitreous China

Plumbing Fixtures and Hydraulic
Requirements for Water Closets and Urinals
ASME A112.36.2M (1991; R 2008) Cleanouts
ASME A112.6.1M (1997; R 2008) Floor Affixed Supports for

Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public
Use
ASME B1.20.1 (1983; R 2006) Pipe Threads, General

Purpose (Inch)
ASME B16.12 (2009) Cast Iron Threaded Drainage Fittings
ASME B16.15 (2006) Cast Bronze Alloy Threaded Fittings

Classes 125 and 250
ASME B16.18 (2001; R 2005) Cast Copper Alloy Solder

Joint Pressure Fittings
ASME B16.21 (2005) Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe

Flanges
ASME B16.22 (2001; R 2005) Standard for Wrought Copper

and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure
Fittings
ASME B16.23 (2002; R 2006) Cast Copper Alloy Solder

Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV
ASME B16.24 (2006) Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges and

Flanged Fittings: Classes 150, 300, 600,
900, 1500, and 2500
ASME B16.29 (2007) Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper

Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV
ASME B16.3 (2006) Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings,

Classes 150 and 300
ASME B16.34 (2009) Valves - Flanged, Threaded and
Page 2
Welding End
ASME B16.39 (2009) Standard for Malleable Iron

Threaded Pipe Unions; Classes 150, 250,
and 300
ASME B16.4 (2006) Standard for Gray Iron Threaded

Fittings; Classes 125 and 250
ASME B16.5 (2009) Standard for Pipe Flanges and

Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 Through NPS 24
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A 536 (1984; R 2009) Standard Specification for

Ductile Iron Castings
ASTM A 733 (2003; R 2009e1) Standard Specification

for Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel and
Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe Nipples
ASTM A 74 (2009) Standard Specification for Cast

Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings
ASTM A 888 (2009) Standard Specification for Hubless

Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for
Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent
Piping Applications
ASTM B 306 (2009) Standard Specification for Copper

Drainage Tube (DWV)
ASTM B 32 (2008) Standard Specification for Solder

Metal
ASTM B 370 (2009) Standard Specification for Copper

Sheet and Strip for Building Construction
ASTM B 42 (2002e1) Standard Specification for

Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes
ASTM B 75 (2002) Standard Specification for Seamless

Copper Tube
ASTM B 828 (2002) Standard Practice for Making

Capillary Joints by Soldering of Copper
and Copper Alloy Tube and Fittings
ASTM B 88 (2009) Standard Specification for Seamless

Copper Water Tube
ASTM C 1053 (2000; R 2005) Standard Specification for

Borosilicate Glass Pipe and Fittings for
Drain, Waste, and Vent (DWV) Applications
ASTM C 564 (2009) Standard Specification for Rubber

Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and
Page 3
Fittings
ASTM C 920 (2008) Standard Specification for

Elastomeric Joint Sealants
ASTM D 1785 (2006) Standard Specification for

Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC), Plastic Pipe,
Schedules 40, 80, and 120
ASTM D 2235 (2004) Standard Specification for Solvent

Cement for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene
(ABS) Plastic Pipe and Fittings

Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated
Pipe (SDR Series)

Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe, Schedules
40 and 80, Based on Outside Diameter
ASTM D 2464 (2006) Standard Specification for Threaded

Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe
Fittings, Schedule 80


ASTM D 2564 (2004e1) Standard Specification for

Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
(PVC) Plastic Piping Systems

Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS)
Schedule 40, Plastic Drain, Waste, and
Vent Pipe and Fittings

Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain,
Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D 2672 (1996a; R 2009) Joints for IPS PVC Pipe

Using Solvent Cement

Socket-Type Polyethylene Fittings for
Outside Diameter-Controlled Polyethylene
Pipe and Tubing
ASTM D 2737 (2003) Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Tubing
ASTM D 2846/D 2846M (2009b) Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
Page 4
(CPVC) Plastic Hot- and Cold-Water
Distribution Systems
ASTM D 2855 (1996; R 2002) Standard Practice for

Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with
Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and
Fittings
ASTM D 3122 (1995; R 2009) Solvent Cements for

Styrene-Rubber (SR) Plastic Pipe and
Fittings
ASTM D 3138 (2004) Solvent Cements for Transition

Joints Between
Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) and
Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Non-Pressure
Piping Components
ASTM D 3139 (1998; R 2005) Joints for Plastic Pressure

Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals
ASTM D 3212 (2007) Standard Specification for Joints

for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using
Flexible Elastomeric Seals
ASTM F 1760 (2001; R 2005e1) Coextruded Poly(Vinyl

Chloride) (PVC) Non-Pressure Plastic Pipe
Having Reprocessed-Recycled Content
ASTM F 2389 2007e1) Standard Specification for

Pressure-rated Polypropylene (PP) Piping
Systems
ASTM F 409 (2002; R 2008) Thermoplastic Accessible

and Replaceable Plastic Tube and Tubular
Fittings
ASTM F 437 (2009) Standard Specification for Threaded

Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)
Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80
ASTM F 438 (2009) Standard Specification for

Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl
Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings,
Schedule 40

Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80
ASTM F 441/F 441M (2009) Standard Specification for

Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80
ASTM F 442/F 442M (2009) Standard Specification for

Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR)
Page 5
Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining
Plastic Pipe
ASTM F 493 (2004) Solvent Cements for Chlorinated

Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe
and Fittings
ASTM F 628 (2008) Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene

(ABS) Schedule 40 Plastic Drain, Waste,
and Vent Pipe with a Cellular Core
ASTM F 877 (2007) Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX)

Plastic Hot- and Cold- Water Distribution
Systems
ASTM F 891 (2009) Coextruded Poly (Vinyl Chloride)

(PVC) Plastic Pipe with a Cellular Core
CAST IRON SOIL PIPE INSTITUTE (CISPI)
CISPI 301 (2004) Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and

Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain,
Waste, and Vent Piping Applications
CISPI 310 (2004) Coupling for Use in Connection with

Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings
for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and
Vent Piping Applications
COPPER DEVELOPMENT ASSOCIATION (CDA)
CDA A4015 (1994; R 1995) Copper Tube Handbook
INTERNATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF PLUMBING AND MECHANICAL OFFICIALS

(IAPMO)
IAPMO PS 117 (2005) Press Type Or Plain End Rub

Gasketed W/ Nail CU & CU Alloy Fittings
for Install On CU Tubing
MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS

INDUSTRY (MSS)
MSS SP-110 (1996) Ball Valves Threaded,

Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and
Flared Ends
MSS SP-25 (2008) Standard Marking System for Valves,

Fittings, Flanges and Unions
MSS SP-44 (2006) Steel Pipeline Flanges
MSS SP-58 (2009) Pipe Hangers and Supports -

Materials, Design and Manufacture,
Selection, Application, and Installation
Page 6
MSS SP-67 (2002a) Butterfly Valves
MSS SP-69 (2003) Pipe Hangers and Supports -
MSS SP-83 (2006) Class 3000 Steel Pipe Unions Socket

Welding and Threaded
MSS SP-85 (2002) Cast Iron Globe & Angle Valves,

Flanged and Threaded Ends
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 90A (2009; Errata 09-1) Standard for the

Installation of Air Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems
NSF INTERNATIONAL (NSF)
NSF/ANSI 14 (2008e) Plastics Piping System Components

and Related Materials
NSF/ANSI 61 (2009) Drinking Water System Components -

Health Effects
PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS ASSOCIATION (PPFA)
PPFA-01 (2004) Firestopping: Plastic Pipe in Fire

Resistive Construction
PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE INSTITUTE (PDI)
PDI WH 201 (2006) Water Hammer Arresters Standard
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)
EPA SM 9223 (2004) Enzyme Substrate Coliform Test
Energy Star (1992; R 2006) Energy Star Energy

Efficiency Labeling System
PL 93-523 (1974; A 1999) Safe Drinking Water Act
U.S. GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC)
LEED (2002; R 2005) Leadership in Energy and

Environmental Design(tm) Green Building
Rating System for New Construction
(LEED-NC)
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;

submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
approval. When used, a designation following the "G" designation
identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government.
The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
Page 7
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Plumbing System
Detail drawings consisting of schedules, performance charts,

instructions, diagrams, and other information to illustrate the
requirements and operations of systems that are not covered by the
Plumbing Code.. Detail drawings for the complete plumbing system
including piping layouts and locations of connections; dimensions
for roughing-in, foundation, and support points; schematic
diagrams and wiring diagrams or connection and interconnection
diagrams. Detail drawings shall indicate clearances required for
maintenance and operation. Where piping and equipment are to be
supported other than as indicated, details shall include loadings
and proposed support methods. Mechanical drawing plans,
elevations, views, and details, shall be drawn to scale.
SD-03 Product Data
Fixtures; (LEED)
List of installed fixtures with manufacturer, model, and flow

rate.
Flush valve water closets
Flush valve urinals
Countertop lavatories
Welding
A copy of qualified procedures and a list of names and

identification symbols of qualified welders and welding operators.
Plumbing System
Diagrams, instructions, and other sheets proposed for posting.

Manufacturer's recommendations for the installation of bell and
spigot and hubless joints for cast iron soil pipe.
SD-06 Test Reports
Tests, Flushing and Disinfection
Test reports in booklet form showing all field tests performed

to adjust each component and all field tests performed to prove
compliance with the specified performance criteria, completion and
testing of the installed system. Each test report shall indicate
the final position of controls.
Page 8
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Plumbing System
Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND

MAINTENANCE DATA.
1.3 STANDARD PRODUCTS
Specified materials and equipment shall be standard products of a

manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products.
Specified equipment shall essentially duplicate equipment that has
performed satisfactorily at least two years prior to bid opening. Standard
products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2
years prior to bid opening. The 2-year use shall include applications of
equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size.
The product shall have been for sale on the commercial market through
advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2 year
period.
1.3.1 Alternative Qualifications
Products having less than a two-year field service record will be

acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not
less than 6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturer's factory or laboratory
tests, can be shown.
1.3.2 Service Support
The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations. Submit a

certified list of qualified permanent service organizations for support of
the equipment which includes their addresses and qualifications. These
service organizations shall be reasonably convenient to the equipment
installation and able to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a
regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.
1.3.3 Manufacturer's Nameplate
Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's

name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a
conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be
acceptable.
1.3.4 Modification of References
In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory

provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been
substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in
these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction", or words of
similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer.
1.3.4.1 Definitions
For the International Code Council (ICC) Codes referenced in the contract
documents, advisory provisions shall be considered mandatory, the word
"should" shall be interpreted as "shall." Reference to the "code official"
shall be interpreted to mean the "Contracting Officer." For Navy owned
Page 9
property, references to the "owner" shall be interpreted to mean the
"Contracting Officer." For leased facilities, references to the "owner"
shall be interpreted to mean the "lessor." References to the "permit
holder" shall be interpreted to mean the "Contractor."
1.3.4.2 Administrative Interpretations
For ICC Codes referenced in the contract documents, the provisions of

Chapter 1, "Administrator," do not apply. These administrative
requirements are covered by the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulations
(FAR) included in this contract and by the authority granted to the Officer
in Charge of Construction to administer the construction of this project.
References in the ICC Codes to sections of Chapter 1, shall be applied
appropriately by the Contracting Officer as authorized by his
administrative cognizance and the FAR.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Handle, store, and protect equipment and materials to prevent damage before
and during installation in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations, and as approved by the Contracting Officer. Replace
damaged or defective items.
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
1.5.1 Welding
Piping shall be welded in accordance with qualified procedures using

performance-qualified welders and welding operators. Procedures and
welders shall be qualified in accordance with ASME BPVC SEC IX. Welding
procedures qualified by others, and welders and welding operators qualified
by another employer, may be accepted as permitted by ASME B31.1. The
Contracting Officer shall be notified 24 hours in advance of tests, and the
tests shall be performed at the work site if practicable. Welders or
welding operators shall apply their assigned symbols near each weld they
make as a permanent record. Structural members shall be welded in
accordance with Section 05 05 23 WELDING.
1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
Unless otherwise required herein, plumbing work shall be in accordance with

ICC IPC.
1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
The Contractor shall become familiar with details of the work, verify
dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any
discrepancy before performing any work.
1.8 INSTRUCTION TO GOVERNMENT PERSONNEL
When specified in other sections, furnish the services of competent

instructors to give full instruction to the designated Government personnel
in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance, including pertinent safety
requirements, of the specified equipment or system. Instructors shall be
thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation and shall be trained
Page 10
in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance work.
Instruction shall be given during the first regular work week after the
equipment or system has been accepted and turned over to the Government for
regular operation. The number of man-days (8 hours per day) of instruction
furnished shall be as specified in the individual section. When more than
4 man-days of instruction are specified, use approximately half of the time
for classroom instruction. Use other time for instruction with the
equipment or system.
When significant changes or modifications in the equipment or system are

made under the terms of the contract, provide additional instruction to
acquaint the operating personnel with the changes or modifications.
1.9 ACCESSIBILITY OF EQUIPMENT
Install all work so that parts requiring periodic inspection, operation,

maintenance, and repair are readily accessible. Install concealed valves,
expansion joints, and equipment requiring access, in locations freely
accessible through access doors.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Materials
Materials for various services shall be in accordance with TABLES I and

II. PVC pipe shall contain a minimum of 25 percent recycled content, with
a minimum of 15 percent post-consumer recycled content. HDPE pipe shall
contain a minimum of 100 percent post-consumer recycled content. Cement
pipe shall contain recycled content as specified in [Section 03 31 00.00 20
CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE.Steel pipe shall contain a minimum of 30
percent recycled content, with a minimum of 16 percent post-consumer
recycled content. Pipe schedules shall be selected based on service
requirements. Pipe fittings shall be compatible with the applicable pipe
materials. Plastic pipe, fittings, and solvent cement shall meet
NSF/ANSI 14 and shall be NSF listed for the service intended. Plastic
pipe, fittings, and solvent cement used for potable hot and cold water
service shall bear the NSF seal "NSF-PW." Polypropylene pipe and fittings
shall conform to dimensional requirements of Schedule 40, Iron Pipe size
and shall comply with NSF/ANSI 14, NSF/ANSI 61 and ASTM F 2389.
Polypropylene piping that will be exposed to UV light shall be provided
with a Factory applied UV resistant coating.. Pipe threads (except dry
seal) shall conform to ASME B1.20.1. Grooved pipe couplings and fittings
shall be from the same manufacturer. Material or equipment containing lead
shall not be used in any potable water system. In line devices such as
water meters, building valves, check valves, meter stops, valves, fittings
and back flow preventers shall comply with PL 93-523 and NSF/ANSI 61,
Section 8. End point devices such as drinking water fountains, lavatory
faucets, supply stops and end point control valves used to dispense water
for drinking must meet the requirements of NSF/ANSI 61, Section 9. Hubless
cast-iron soil pipe shall not be installed underground, under concrete
floor slabs, or in crawl spaces below kitchen floors. Plastic pipe shall
not be installed in air plenums. Plastic pipe shall not be installed in a
pressure piping system in buildings greater than three stories including
any basement levels.
2.1.1 Pipe Joint Materials
Page 11
Grooved pipe and hubless cast-iron soil pipe shall not be used under
ground. Solder containing lead shall not be used with copper pipe. Cast
iron soil pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark
of the Cast Iron Soil Institute. Joints and gasket materials shall conform
to the following:
a. Coupling for Cast-Iron Pipe: for hub and spigot type ASTM A 74,
AWWA C606. For hubless type: CISPI 310
b. Coupling for Steel Pipe: AWWA C606.
c. Couplings for Grooved Pipe: Ductile Iron ASTM A 536 (Grade 65-45-12),
Copper ASTM A 536.
d. Flange Gaskets: Gaskets shall be made of non-asbestos material in

accordance with ASME B16.21. Gaskets shall be flat, 1/16 inch thick,
and contain Aramid fibers bonded with Styrene Butadiene Rubber (SBR) or
Nitro Butadiene Rubber (NBR). Gaskets shall be the full face or self
centering flat ring type. Gaskets used for hydrocarbon service shall
be bonded with NBR.
e. Brazing Material: Brazing material shall conform to AWS A5.8/A5.8M,

BCuP-5.
f. Brazing Flux: Flux shall be in paste or liquid form appropriate for

use with brazing material. Flux shall be as follows: lead-free; have
a 100 percent flushable residue; contain slightly acidic reagents;
contain potassium borides; and contain fluorides.
g. Solder Material: Solder metal shall conform to ASTM B 32.
h. Solder Flux: Flux shall be liquid form, non-corrosive, and conform to

ASTM B 813, Standard Test 1.
i. PTFE Tape: PTFE Tape, for use with Threaded Metal or Plastic Pipe.
j. Rubber Gaskets for Cast-Iron Soil-Pipe and Fittings (hub and spigot
type and hubless type): ASTM C 564.
k. Rubber Gaskets for Grooved Pipe: ASTM D 2000, maximum temperature 230
degrees F.
l. Flexible Elastomeric Seals: ASTM D 3139, ASTM D 3212 or ASTM F 477.
m. Bolts and Nuts for Grooved Pipe Couplings: Heat-treated carbon steel,
ASTM A 183.
n. Solvent Cement for Transition Joints between ABS and PVC Nonpressure
Piping Components: ASTM D 3138.
o. Plastic Solvent Cement for ABS Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 2235.
p. Plastic Solvent Cement for PVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 2564 and
ASTM D 2855.
Page 12
q. Plastic Solvent Cement for CPVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM F 493.
r. Flanged fittings including flanges, bolts, nuts, bolt patterns, etc.,

shall be in accordance with ASME B16.5 class 150 and shall have the
manufacturer's trademark affixed in accordance with MSS SP-25. Flange
material shall conform to ASTM A 105/A 105M. Blind flange material
shall conform to ASTM A 516/A 516M cold service and ASTM A 515/A 515M
for hot service. Bolts shall be high strength or intermediate strength
with material conforming to ASTM A 193/A 193M.
s. Plastic Solvent Cement for Styrene Rubber Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 3122.
t. Press fittings for Copper Pipe and Tube: Copper press fittings shall
conform to the material and sizing requirements of ASME B16.18 or
ASME B16.22 and performance criteria of IAPMO PS 117. Sealing elements
for copper press fittings shall be EPDM, FKM or HNBR. Sealing elements
shall be factory installed or an alternative supplied fitting
manufacturer. Sealing element shall be selected based on
manufacturer's approved application guidelines.
u. Copper tubing shall conform to ASTM B 88, Type K, L or M.
v. Heat-fusion joints for polypropylene piping: ASTM F 2389.
2.1.2 Miscellaneous Materials
Miscellaneous materials shall conform to the following:
a. Water Hammer Arrester: PDI WH 201. Water hammer arrester shall be

diaphragm or piston type.
b. Copper, Sheet and Strip for Building Construction: ASTM B 370.
c. Asphalt Roof Cement: ASTM D 2822.
d. Hose Clamps: SAE J1508.
e. Supports for Off-The-Floor Plumbing Fixtures: ASME A112.6.1M.
f. Metallic Cleanouts: ASME A112.36.2M.
g. Plumbing Fixture Setting Compound: A preformed flexible ring seal

molded from hydrocarbon wax material. The seal material shall be
nonvolatile nonasphaltic and contain germicide and provide watertight,
gastight, odorproof and verminproof properties.
h. Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipelines:

AWWA C203.
i. Hypochlorites: AWWA B300.
j. Liquid Chlorine: AWWA B301.
k. Gauges - Pressure and Vacuum Indicating Dial Type - Elastic Element:

ASME B40.100.
2.1.3 Pipe Insulation Material
Page 13
Insulation shall be as specified in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.
2.2 PIPE HANGERS, INSERTS, AND SUPPORTS
Pipe hangers, inserts, and supports shall conform to MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69.
2.3 VALVES
Valves shall be provided on supplies to equipment and fixtures. Valves

2-1/2 inches and smaller shall be bronze with threaded bodies for pipe and
solder-type connections for tubing. Valves 3 inches and larger shall have
flanged iron bodies and bronze trim. Pressure ratings shall be based upon
the application. Grooved end valves may be provided if the manufacturer
certifies that the valves meet the performance requirements of applicable
MSS standard. Valves shall conform to the following standards:
Description Standard
Butterfly Valves MSS SP-67
Cast-Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and

Threaded Ends MSS SP-70
Cast-Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and

Threaded Ends MSS SP-71
Ball Valves with Flanged Butt-Welding Ends

for General Service MSS SP-72
Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding,

Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends MSS SP-110
Cast-Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and MSS SP-78

Threaded Ends
Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle, and Check Valves MSS SP-80
Steel Valves, Socket Welding and Threaded Ends ASME B16.34
Cast-Iron Globe and Angle Valves, Flanged and MSS SP-85

Threaded Ends
Backwater Valves ASME A112.14.1
Vacuum Relief Valves CSA/AM Z21.22
Trap Seal Primer Valves ASSE 1018
Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves CSA/AM Z21.22

for Hot Water Supply Systems
Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves ASME CSD-1

for Automatically Fired Hot
Water Boilers Safety Code No., Part CW,
Article
Page 14
2.3.1 Thermostatic Mixing Valves
Provide thermostatic mixing valve for lavatory faucets. Mixing valves,

thermostatic type, pressure-balanced or combination thermostatic and
pressure-balanced shall be line size and shall be constructed with rough or
finish bodies either with or without plating. Each valve shall be
constructed to control the mixing of hot and cold water and to deliver
water at a desired temperature regardless of pressure or input temperature
changes. The control element shall be of an approved type. The body shall
be of heavy cast bronze, and interior parts shall be brass, bronze,
corrosion-resisting steel or copper. The valve shall be equipped with
necessary stops, check valves, unions, and sediment strainers on the
inlets. Mixing valves shall maintain water temperature within 5 degrees F
of any setting.
2.4 FIXTURES
Fixtures shall be water conservation type, in accordance with ICC IPC.

Fixtures for use by the physically handicapped shall be in accordance with
ICC/ANSI A117.1. Vitreous China, nonabsorbent, hard-burned, and vitrified
throughout the body shall be provided. Porcelain enameled ware shall have
specially selected, clear white, acid-resisting enamel coating evenly
applied on surfaces. No fixture will be accepted that shows cracks,
crazes, blisters, thin spots, or other flaws. Fixtures shall be equipped
with appurtenances such as traps, faucets, stop valves, and drain
fittings. Each fixture and piece of equipment requiring connections to the
drainage system, except grease interceptors, shall be equipped with a
trap. Brass expansion or toggle bolts capped with acorn nuts shall be
provided for supports, and polished chromium-plated pipe, valves, and
fittings shall be provided where exposed to view. Fixtures with the supply
discharge below the rim shall be equipped with backflow preventers.
Internal parts of flush and/or flushometer valves, shower mixing valves,
shower head face plates, pop-up stoppers of lavatory waste drains, and
pop-up stoppers and overflow tees and shoes of bathtub waste drains may
contain acetal resin, fluorocarbon, nylon, acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene
(ABS) or other plastic material, if the material has provided satisfactory
service under actual commercial or industrial operating conditions for not
less than 2 years. Plastic in contact with hot water shall be suitable for
180 degrees F water temperature.
2.4.1 Automatic Controls
Provide automatic, sensor operated faucets and flush valves to comply with
ASSE 1037 and UL 1951 for lavatory faucets. Flushing and faucet systems
shall consist of solenoid-activated valves with light beam sensors.
2.4.2 Flush Valve Water Closets
ASME A112.19.2, white vitreous china, siphon jet, elongated bowl, wall
mounted, wall outlet. Top of toilet seat height above floor shall be 17 to
water closets. Provide wax bowl ring including plastic sleeve. Provide
white solid plastic elongated open-front seat with no cover.
Water flushing volume of the water closet and flush valve combination shall
not exceed1.6 gallons per flush.
Provide large diameter flush valve including angle control-stop valve,
vacuum breaker, tail pieces, slip nuts, and wall plates; exposed to view
components shall be chromium-plated or polished stainless steel. Flush
valves shall be nonhold-open type. Mount flush valves not less than 11
Page 15
inches above the fixture. Mounted height of flush valve shall not
interfere with the hand rail in ADA stalls.(See plumbing drawings for
detail information).
2.4.3 Flush Valve Urinals
ASME A112.19.2, white vitreous china, ,wall-mounted, wall outlet, siphon

jet, integral trap, and extended side shields. Provide urinal with the rim
24 inches above the floor. Water flushing volume of the urinal and flush
valve combination shall not exceed 0.5 gallons per flush. Provide
ASME A112.6.1M concealed chair carriers with vertical steel pipe supports.
Provide large diameter flush valve including angle control-stop valve,
vacuum breaker, tail pieces, slip nuts, and wall plates; exposed to view
components shall be chromium-plated or polished stainless steel. Flush
valves shall be nonhold-open type. Mount flush valves not less than 11
inches above the fixture.(See plumbing drawings for detail information).
2.4.4 Countertop Lavatories
ASME A112.19.2, white vitreous china,self-rimming, minimum dimensions of 16

1/2" inches wide by 13 inches front to rear, with supply openings for use
with top mounted centerset faucets. (See plumbing drawings for detail
information).
2.5 TRAPS
Unless otherwise specified, traps shall be plastic per ASTM F 409 Traps
shall be with a cleanout. Provide traps with removable access panels for
easy clean-out at sinks and lavatories. Tubes shall be copper alloy with
walls not less than 0.032 inch thick within commercial tolerances, except
on the outside of bends where the thickness may be reduced slightly in
manufacture by usual commercial methods. Inlets shall have rubber washer
and copper alloy nuts for slip joints above the discharge level. Swivel
joints shall be below the discharge level and shall be of metal-to-metal or
metal-to-plastic type as required for the application. Nuts shall have
flats for wrench grip. Outlets shall have internal pipe thread, except
that when required for the application, the outlets shall have sockets for
solder-joint connections. The depth of the water seal shall be not less
than 2 inches. The interior diameter shall be not more than 1/8 inch over
or under the nominal size, and interior surfaces shall be reasonably smooth
throughout. A copper alloy "P" trap assembly consisting of an adjustable
"P" trap and threaded trap wall nipple with cast brass wall flange shall be
provided for lavatories. The assembly shall be a standard manufactured
unit and may have a rubber-gasketed swivel joint.
2.5.1 Drinking-Water Coolers (TWO STATION WALL MOUNTED WATER COOLER)
AHRI 1010 with more than a single thickness of metal between the potable
water and the refrigerant in the heat exchanger, wall-hung, bubbler style,
air-cooled condensing unit, 8.00 gph minimum capacity, stainless steel
splash receptor and basin, and stainless steel cabinet. Bubblers shall be
controlled by push levers or push bars, front mounted or side mounted near
the front edge of the cabinet. Bubbler spouts shall be mounted at maximum
of 36 inches above floor and at front of unit basin. Spouts shall direct
water flow at least 4 inches above unit basin and trajectory parallel or
nearly parallel to the front of unit. Provide filters for chlorine in
supply piping to faucets. Provide ASME A112.6.1M concealed steel pipe chair
Page 16
carriers.
Provide for wheelchair model 27 inch minimum knee clearance from front
bottom of unit to floor and 36 inch maximum spout height above floor.
2.6 [Enter Appropriate Subpart Title Here]2.5.2 Bathtub and Shower Faucets
and Drain Fittings
Provide single control pressure equalizing bathtub and shower faucets with
body mounted from behind the wall with threaded connections. Provide ball
joint self-cleaning shower heads. Provide shower heads which deliver a
maximum of 2.5 GPM at 80 PSI per Energy Star requirements. Provide tubing
mounted from behind the wall between bathtub faucets and shower heads and
bathtub diverter spouts. Provide separate globe valves or angle valves
with union connections in each supply to faucet. Provide trip-lever pop-up
drain fittings for above-the-floor drain installations. The top of drain
pop-ups, drain outlets, tub overflow outlet, and; control handle for pop-up
drain shall be chromium-plated or polished stainless steel. Linkage
between drain pop-up and pop-up control handle at bathtub overflow outlet
shall be copper alloy or stainless steel. Provide 1.5 inch copper alloy
adjustable tubing with slip nuts and gaskets between bathtub overflow and
drain outlet; chromium-plated finish is not required. Provide bathtub and
shower valve with ball type control handle.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING ITEMS
2.6.1 Escutcheon Plates
Provide one piece or split hinge metal plates for piping entering floors,
walls, and ceilings in exposed spaces. Provide chromium-plated on copper
alloy plates or polished stainless steel finish in finished spaces.
Provide paint finish on plates in unfinished spaces.
2.6.2 Pipe Sleeves
Provide where piping passes entirely through walls, ceilings, roofs, and
floors. Sleeves are not required where supply drain, waste, and vent (DWV)
piping passes through concrete floor slabs located on grade, except where
penetrating a membrane waterproof floor.
2.6.2.1 Sleeves in Masonry and Concrete
Provide steel pipe sleeves or schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe sleeves.

Sleeves are not required where drain, waste, and vent (DWV) piping passes
through concrete floor slabs located on grade. Core drilling of masonry
and concrete may be provided in lieu of pipe sleeves when cavities in the
core-drilled hole are completely grouted smooth.
2.6.2.2 Sleeves Not in Masonry and Concrete
Provide 26 gage galvanized steel sheet or PVC plastic pipe sleeves.
2.6.3 Pipe Hangers (Supports)
Provide MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69, Type 1 with adjustable type steel support
rods, except as specified or indicated otherwise. Attach to steel joists
with Type 19 or 23 clamps and retaining straps. Attach to Steel W or S
Page 17
beams with Type 21, 28, 29, or 30 clamps. Attach to steel angles and
vertical web steel channels with Type 20 clamp with beam clamp channel
adapter. Attach to horizontal web steel channel and wood with drilled hole
on centerline and double nut and washer. Attach to concrete with Type 18
insert or drilled expansion anchor. Provide Type 40 insulation protection
shield for insulated piping.
2.6.4 Nameplates
Provide 0.125 inch thick melamine laminated plastic nameplates, black matte
finish with white center core, for equipment, gages, thermometers, and
valves; valves in supplies to faucets will not require nameplates.
Accurately align lettering and engrave minimum of 0.25 inch high normal
block lettering into the white core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be
1.0 by 2.5 inches. Key nameplates to a chart and schedule for each system.
Frame charts and schedules under glass and place where directed near each
system. Furnish two copies of each chart and schedule.
2.6.5 Labels
Provide labels for sensor operators at flush valves and faucets. Include
the following information on each label:
a. Identification of the sensor and its operation with written

description.
b. Range of the sensor.
c. Battery replacement schedule.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Piping located in air plenums shall conform to NFPA 90A requirements.

Piping located in shafts that constitute air ducts or that enclose air
ducts shall be noncombustible in accordance with NFPA 90A. Installation of
plastic pipe where in compliance with NFPA may be installed in accordance
with PPFA-01. The plumbing system shall be installed complete with
necessary fixtures, fittings, traps, valves, and accessories. Water and
drainage piping shall be extended 5 feet outside the building, unless
otherwise indicated. A ball valve and drain shall be installed on the
water service line inside the building approximately 6 inches above the
floor from point of entry. Piping shall be connected to the exterior
service lines or capped or plugged if the exterior service is not in
place. Sewer and water pipes shall be laid in separate trenches, except
when otherwise shown. Exterior underground utilities shall be at least 12
inches below the average local frost depth or as indicated on the
drawings. If trenches are closed or the pipes are otherwise covered before
being connected to the service lines, the location of the end of each
plumbing utility shall be marked with a stake or other acceptable means.
Valves shall be installed with control no lower than the valve body.
3.1.1 Water Pipe, Fittings, and Connections
3.1.1.1 Utilities
Page 18
The piping shall be extended to fixtures, outlets, and equipment. The
hot-water and cold-water piping system shall be arranged and installed to
permit draining. The supply line to each item of equipment or fixture,
except faucets, flush valves, or other control valves which are supplied
with integral stops, shall be equipped with a shutoff valve to enable
isolation of the item for repair and maintenance without interfering with
operation of other equipment or fixtures. Supply piping to fixtures,
faucets, hydrants, shower heads, and flushing devices shall be anchored to
prevent movement.
3.1.1.2 Cutting and Repairing
The work shall be carefully laid out in advance, and unnecessary cutting of
construction shall be avoided. Damage to building, piping, wiring, or
equipment as a result of cutting shall be repaired by mechanics skilled in
the trade involved.
3.1.1.3 Protection of Fixtures, Materials, and Equipment
Pipe openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during installation.

Fixtures and equipment shall be tightly covered and protected against dirt,
water, chemicals, and mechanical injury. Upon completion of the work, the
fixtures, materials, and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned, adjusted,
and operated. Safety guards shall be provided for exposed rotating
equipment.
3.1.1.4 Mains, Branches, and Runouts
Piping shall be installed as indicated. Pipe shall be accurately cut and

worked into place without springing or forcing. Structural portions of the
building shall not be weakened. Aboveground piping shall run parallel with
the lines of the building, unless otherwise indicated. Branch pipes from
service lines may be taken from top, bottom, or side of main, using
crossover fittings required by structural or installation conditions.
Supply pipes, valves, and fittings shall be kept a sufficient distance from
other work and other services to permit not less than 1/2 inch between
finished covering on the different services. Bare and insulated water
lines shall not bear directly against building structural elements so as to
transmit sound to the structure or to prevent flexible movement of the
lines. Water pipe shall not be buried in or under floors unless
specifically indicated or approved. Changes in pipe sizes shall be made
with reducing fittings. Use of bushings will not be permitted except for
use in situations in which standard factory fabricated components are
furnished to accommodate specific accepted installation practice. Change
in direction shall be made with fittings, except that bending of pipe 4
inches and smaller will be permitted, provided a pipe bender is used and
wide sweep bends are formed. The center-line radius of bends shall be not
less than six diameters of the pipe. Bent pipe showing kinks, wrinkles,
flattening, or other malformations will not be acceptable.
3.1.1.5 Pipe Drains
Pipe drains indicated shall consist of 3/4 inch hose bibb with renewable
seat and [gate] [full port ball] [ball] valve ahead of hose bibb. At other
low points, 3/4 inch brass plugs or caps shall be provided. Disconnection
of the supply piping at the fixture is an acceptable drain.
Page 19
3.1.1.6 Commercial-Type Water Hammer Arresters
Commercial-type water hammer arresters shall be provided on hot- and

cold-water supplies and shall be located as generally indicated, with
precise location and sizing to be in accordance with PDI WH 201. Water
hammer arresters, where concealed, shall be accessible by means of access
doors or removable panels. Commercial-type water hammer arresters shall
conform to ASSE 1010. Vertical capped pipe columns will not be permitted.
3.1.2 Joints
Installation of pipe and fittings shall be made in accordance with the

manufacturer's recommendations. Mitering of joints for elbows and notching
of straight runs of pipe for tees will not be permitted. Joints shall be
made up with fittings of compatible material and made for the specific
purpose intended.
3.1.2.1 Threaded
Threaded joints shall have American Standard taper pipe threads conforming
to ASME B1.20.1. Only male pipe threads shall be coated with graphite or
with an approved graphite compound, or with an inert filler and oil, or
shall have a polytetrafluoroethylene tape applied.
3.1.2.2 Mechanical Couplings
Mechanical couplings may be used in conjunction with grooved pipe for

aboveground, ferrous or non-ferrous, domestic hot and cold water systems,
in lieu of unions, brazed, soldered, welded, flanged, or threaded joints.
Mechanical couplings are permitted in accessible locations including behind

access plates. Flexible grooved joints will not be permitted, except as
vibration isolators adjacent to mechanical equipment. Rigid grooved joints
shall incorporate an angle bolt pad design which maintains metal-to-metal
contact with equal amount of pad offset of housings upon installation to
ensure positive rigid clamping of the pipe.
Designs which can only clamp on the bottom of the groove or which utilize
gripping teeth or jaws, or which use misaligned housing bolt holes, or
which require a torque wrench or torque specifications will not be
permitted.
Rigid grooved pipe couplings shall be for use with grooved end pipes,
fittings, valves and strainers. Rigid couplings shall be designed for not
less than 125 psi service and appropriate for static head plus the pumping
head, and shall provide a watertight joint.
Grooved fittings and couplings, and grooving tools shall be provided from
the same manufacturer. Segmentally welded elbows shall not be used.
Grooves shall be prepared in accordance with the coupling manufacturer's
latest published standards. Grooving shall be performed by qualified
grooving operators having demonstrated proper grooving procedures in
accordance with the tool manufacturer's recommendations.
The Contracting Officer shall be notified 24 hours in advance of test to

demonstrate operator's capability, and the test shall be performed at the
Page 20
work site, if practical, or at a site agreed upon. The operator shall
demonstrate the ability to properly adjust the grooving tool, groove the
pipe, and to verify the groove dimensions in accordance with the coupling
manufacturer's specifications.
3.1.2.3 Unions and Flanges
Unions, flanges and mechanical couplings shall not be concealed in walls,

ceilings, or partitions. Unions shall be used on pipe sizes 2-1/2 inches
and smaller; flanges shall be used on pipe sizes 3 inches and larger.
3.1.2.4 Grooved Mechanical Joints
Grooves shall be prepared according to the coupling manufacturer's

instructions. Grooved fittings, couplings, and grooving tools shall be
products of the same manufacturer. Pipe and groove dimensions shall comply
with the tolerances specified by the coupling manufacturer. The diameter
of grooves made in the field shall be measured using a "go/no-go" gauge,
vernier or dial caliper, narrow-land micrometer, or other method
specifically approved by the coupling manufacturer for the intended
application. Groove width and dimension of groove from end of pipe shall
be measured and recorded for each change in grooving tool setup to verify
compliance with coupling manufacturer's tolerances. Grooved joints shall
not be used in concealed locations.
3.1.2.5 Cast Iron Soil, Waste and Vent Pipe
Bell and spigot compression and hubless gasketed clamp joints for soil,
waste and vent piping shall be installed per the manufacturer's
recommendations.
3.1.2.6 Copper Tube and Pipe
a. Brazed. Brazed joints shall be made in conformance with AWS B2.2,

MSS SP-73, and CDA A4015 with flux and are acceptable for all pipe
sizes. Copper to copper joints shall include the use of
copper-phosphorus or copper-phosphorus-silver brazing metal without
flux. Brazing of dissimilar metals (copper to bronze or brass) shall
include the use of flux with either a copper-phosphorus,
copper-phosphorus-silver or a silver brazing filler metal.
b. Soldered. Soldered joints shall be made with flux and are only
acceptable for piping 2 inches and smaller. Soldered joints shall
conform to ASME B31.5 and CDA A4015. Soldered joints shall not be used
in compressed air piping between the air compressor and the receiver.
c. Copper Tube Extracted Joint. Mechanically extracted joints shall be

made in accordance with ICC IPC.
d. Press connection. Copper press connections shall be made in strict

accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions for
manufactured rated size. The joints shall be pressed using the tool(s)
approved by the manufacturer of that joint. Minimum distance between
fittings shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements.
3.1.2.7 Plastic Pipe
Page 21
Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) pipe shall have joints made with
solvent cement. PVC and CPVC pipe shall have joints made with solvent
cement elastomeric, threading, (threading of Schedule 80 Pipe is allowed
only where required for disconnection and inspection; threading of Schedule
40 Pipe is not allowed), or mated flanged.
3.1.2.8 Corrosive Waste Plastic Pipe
Joints for polyolefin pipe and fittings shall be made by mechanical joint
or electrical fusion coil method in accordance with ASTM D 2657 and
ASTM F 1290. Joints for filament-wound reinforced thermosetting resin pipe
shall be made in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Unions or
flanges shall be used where required for disconnection and inspection.
3.1.2.9 Polypropylene Pipe
Joints for polypropylene pipe and fittings shall be made by heat fusion
welding socket-type or butt-fusion type fittings and shall comply with
ASTM F 2389.
3.1.3 Corrosion Protection for Buried Pipe and Fittings
Ductile iron, cast iron, and steel pipe, fittings, and joints shall have a
protective coating. Additionally, ductile iron, cast iron, and steel
pressure pipe shall have a cathodic protection system and joint bonding.
The cathodic protection system, protective coating system, and joint
bonding for cathodically protected pipe shall be in accordance with
[Section 26 42 14.00 10 CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM (SACRIFICIAL ANODE)]
[and] [Section 26 42 17.00 10 CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM (IMPRESSED
CURRENT)][Section 26 42 13.00 20 CATHODIC PROTECTION BY GALVANIC ANODES]
[and] [Section 26 42 19.00 20 CATHODIC PROTECTION BY IMPRESSED CURRENT]
[Section 26 42 14.00 10 CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM (SACRIFICIAL
ANODE)][Section 26 42 19.00 20 CATHODIC PROTECTION BY IMPRESSED CURRENT].
Coatings shall be selected, applied, and inspected in accordance with
NACE SP0169 and as otherwise specified. The pipe shall be cleaned and the
coating system applied prior to pipe tightness testing. Joints and
fittings shall be cleaned and the coating system applied after pipe
tightness testing. For tape coating systems, the tape shall conform to
AWWA C203 and shall be applied with a 50 percent overlap. Primer utilized
with tape type coating systems shall be as recommended by the tape
manufacturer.
3.1.4 Pipe Sleeves and Flashing
Pipe sleeves shall be furnished and set in their proper and permanent
location.
3.1.4.1 Sleeve Requirements
Unless indicated otherwise, provide pipe sleeves meeting the following

requirements:
Secure sleeves in position and location during construction. Provide

sleeves of sufficient length to pass through entire thickness of walls,
ceilings, roofs, and floors.
A modular mechanical type sealing assembly may be installed in lieu of a
Page 22
waterproofing clamping flange and caulking and sealing of annular space
between pipe and sleeve. The seals shall consist of interlocking synthetic
rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the pipe
and sleeve using galvanized steel bolts, nuts, and pressure plates. The
links shall be loosely assembled with bolts to form a continuous rubber
belt around the pipe with a pressure plate under each bolt head and each
nut. After the seal assembly is properly positioned in the sleeve,
tightening of the bolt shall cause the rubber sealing elements to expand
and provide a watertight seal between the pipe and the sleeve. Each seal
assembly shall be sized as recommended by the manufacturer to fit the pipe
and sleeve involved.
Sleeves shall not be installed in structural members, except where

indicated or approved. Rectangular and square openings shall be as
detailed. Each sleeve shall extend through its respective floor, or roof,
and shall be cut flush with each surface, except for special circumstances.
Pipe sleeves passing through floors in wet areas such as mechanical
equipment rooms, lavatories, kitchens, and other plumbing fixture areas
shall extend a minimum of 4 inches above the finished floor.
Unless otherwise indicated, sleeves shall be of a size to provide a

minimum of [ 1/4 inch ][ one inch ] clearance between bare pipe or
insulation and inside of sleeve or between insulation and inside of
sleeve. Sleeves in bearing walls and concrete slab on grade floors shall
be steel pipe or cast-iron pipe. Sleeves in nonbearing walls or ceilings
may be steel pipe, cast-iron pipe, galvanized sheet metal with lock-type
longitudinal seam, or plastic.
Except as otherwise specified, the annular space between pipe and sleeve,
or between jacket over insulation and sleeve, shall be sealed as indicated
with sealants conforming to ASTM C 920 and with a primer, backstop material
and surface preparation as specified in Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS.
The annular space between pipe and sleeve, between bare insulation and
sleeve or between jacket over insulation and sleeve shall not be sealed for
interior walls which are not designated as fire rated.
Sleeves through below-grade walls in contact with earth shall be recessed

1/2 inch from wall surfaces on both sides. Annular space between pipe and
sleeve shall be filled with backing material and sealants in the joint
between the pipe and [concrete] [masonry] wall as specified above. Sealant
selected for the earth side of the wall shall be compatible with
dampproofing/waterproofing materials that are to be applied over the joint
sealant. Pipe sleeves in fire-rated walls shall conform to the
requirements in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.
3.1.4.2 Flashing Requirements
Pipes passing through roof shall be installed through a 16 ounce copper

flashing, each within an integral skirt or flange. Flashing shall be
suitably formed, and the skirt or flange shall extend not less than 8 inches
from the pipe and shall be set over the roof or floor membrane in a solid
coating of bituminous cement. The flashing shall extend up the pipe a
minimum of 10 inches. For cleanouts, the flashing shall be turned down
into the hub and caulked after placing the ferrule. Pipes passing through
pitched roofs shall be flashed, using lead or copper flashing, with an
adjustable integral flange of adequate size to extend not less than 8 inches
from the pipe in all directions and lapped into the roofing to provide a
watertight seal. The annular space between the flashing and the bare pipe
Page 23
or between the flashing and the metal-jacket-covered insulation shall be
sealed as indicated. Flashing for dry vents shall be turned down into the
pipe to form a waterproof joint. Pipes, up to and including 10 inches in
diameter, passing through roof or floor waterproofing membrane may be
installed through a cast-iron sleeve with caulking recess, anchor lugs,
flashing-clamp device, and pressure ring with brass bolts. Flashing shield
shall be fitted into the sleeve clamping device. Pipes passing through
wall waterproofing membrane shall be sleeved as described above. A
waterproofing clamping flange shall be installed.
3.1.4.3 Waterproofing
Waterproofing at floor-mounted water closets shall be accomplished by

forming a flashing guard from soft-tempered sheet copper. The center of
the sheet shall be perforated and turned down approximately 1-1/2 inches to
fit between the outside diameter of the drainpipe and the inside diameter
of the cast-iron or steel pipe sleeve. The turned-down portion of the
flashing guard shall be embedded in sealant to a depth of approximately
1-1/2 inches; then the sealant shall be finished off flush to floor level
between the flashing guard and drainpipe. The flashing guard of sheet
copper shall extend not less than 8 inches from the drainpipe and shall be
lapped between the floor membrane in a solid coating of bituminous cement.
If cast-iron water closet floor flanges are used, the space between the
pipe sleeve and drainpipe shall be sealed with sealant and the flashing
guard shall be upturned approximately 1-1/2 inches to fit the outside
diameter of the drainpipe and the inside diameter of the water closet floor
flange. The upturned portion of the sheet fitted into the floor flange
shall be sealed.
3.1.4.4 Optional Counterflashing
Instead of turning the flashing down into a dry vent pipe, or caulking and
sealing the annular space between the pipe and flashing or
metal-jacket-covered insulation and flashing, counterflashing may be
accomplished by utilizing the following:
a. A standard roof coupling for threaded pipe up to 6 inches in diameter.
b. A tack-welded or banded-metal rain shield around the pipe.
3.1.4.5 Pipe Penetrations of Slab on Grade Floors
Where pipes, fixture drains, floor drains, cleanouts or similar items

penetrate slab on grade floors, except at penetrations of floors with
waterproofing membrane as specified in paragraphs Flashing Requirements and
Waterproofing, a groove 1/4 to 1/2 inch wide by 1/4 to 3/8 inch deep shall
be formed around the pipe, fitting or drain. The groove shall be filled
with a sealant as specified in Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS.
3.1.4.6 Pipe Penetrations
Provide sealants for all pipe penetrations. All pipe penetrations shall be
sealed to prevent infiltration of air, insects, and vermin.
3.1.5 Fire Seal
Where pipes pass through fire walls, fire-partitions, fire-rated pipe chase
Page 24
walls or floors above grade, a fire seal shall be provided as specified in
Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.
3.1.6 Supports
3.1.6.1 General
Hangers used to support piping 2 inches and larger shall be fabricated to

permit adequate adjustment after erection while still supporting the load.
Pipe guides and anchors shall be installed to keep pipes in accurate
alignment, to direct the expansion movement, and to prevent buckling,
swaying, and undue strain. Piping subjected to vertical movement when
operating temperatures exceed ambient temperatures shall be supported by
variable spring hangers and supports or by constant support hangers. In
the support of multiple pipe runs on a common base member, a clip or clamp
shall be used where each pipe crosses the base support member. Spacing of
the base support members shall not exceed the hanger and support spacing
required for an individual pipe in the multiple pipe run. Threaded
sections of rods shall not be formed or bent.
3.1.6.2 Pipe Hangers, Inserts, and Supports
Installation of pipe hangers, inserts and supports shall conform to

MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69, except as modified herein.
a. Types 5, 12, and 26 shall not be used.
b. Type 3 shall not be used on insulated pipe.
c. Type 18 inserts shall be secured to concrete forms before concrete is

placed. Continuous inserts which allow more adjustment may be used if
they otherwise meet the requirements for type 18 inserts.
d. Type 19 and 23 C-clamps shall be torqued per MSS SP-69 and shall have
both locknuts and retaining devices furnished by the manufacturer.
Field-fabricated C-clamp bodies or retaining devices are not acceptable.
e. Type 20 attachments used on angles and channels shall be furnished with

an added malleable-iron heel plate or adapter.
f. Type 24 may be used only on trapeze hanger systems or on fabricated

frames.
g. Type 39 saddles shall be used on insulated pipe 4 inches and larger

when the temperature of the medium is 60 degrees F or higher. Type 39
saddles shall be welded to the pipe.
h. Type 40 shields shall:
(1) Be used on insulated pipe less than 4 inches.
(2) Be used on insulated pipe 4 inches and larger when the temperature
of the medium is 60 degrees F or less.
(3) Have a high density insert for all pipe sizes. High density
inserts shall have a density of 8 pcf or greater.
Page 25
i. Horizontal pipe supports shall be spaced as specified in MSS SP-69
and a support shall be installed not over 1 foot from the pipe fitting
joint at each change in direction of the piping. Pipe supports shall
be spaced not over 5 feet apart at valves. Operating temperatures in
determining hanger spacing for PVC or CPVC pipe shall be 120 degrees F
for PVC and 180 degrees F for CPVC. Horizontal pipe runs shall include
allowances for expansion and contraction.
j. Vertical pipe shall be supported at each floor, except at

slab-on-grade, at intervals of not more than 15 feet nor more than 8
feet from end of risers, and at vent terminations. Vertical pipe
risers shall include allowances for expansion and contraction.
k. Type 35 guides using steel, reinforced polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE)

or graphite slides shall be provided to allow longitudinal pipe
movement. Slide materials shall be suitable for the system operating
temperatures, atmospheric conditions, and bearing loads encountered.
Lateral restraints shall be provided as needed. Where steel slides do
not require provisions for lateral restraint the following may be used:
(1) On pipe 4 inches and larger when the temperature of the medium is
60 degrees F or higher, a Type 39 saddle, welded to the pipe, may
freely rest on a steel plate.
(2) On pipe less than 4 inches a Type 40 shield, attached to the pipe
or insulation, may freely rest on a steel plate.
(3) On pipe 4 inches and larger carrying medium less that 60 degrees F
a Type 40 shield, attached to the pipe or insulation, may freely
rest on a steel plate.
l. Pipe hangers on horizontal insulated pipe shall be the size of the

outside diameter of the insulation. The insulation shall be continuous
through the hanger on all pipe sizes and applications.
m. Where there are high system temperatures and welding to piping is not
desirable, the type 35 guide shall include a pipe cradle, welded to the
guide structure and strapped securely to the pipe. The pipe shall be
separated from the slide material by at least 4 inches or by an amount
adequate for the insulation, whichever is greater.
n. Hangers and supports for plastic pipe shall not compress, distort, cut
or abrade the piping, and shall allow free movement of pipe except
where otherwise required in the control of expansion/contraction.
3.1.6.3 Structural Attachments
Attachment to building structure concrete and masonry shall be by cast-in

concrete inserts, built-in anchors, or masonry anchor devices. Inserts and
anchors shall be applied with a safety factor not less than 5. Supports
shall not be attached to metal decking. Supports shall not be attached to
the underside of concrete filled floor or concrete roof decks unless
approved by the Contracting Officer. Masonry anchors for overhead
applications shall be constructed of ferrous materials only.
3.1.7 Welded Installation
Page 26
Plumbing pipe weldments shall be as indicated. Changes in direction of
piping shall be made with welding fittings only; mitering or notching pipe
to form elbows and tees or other similar type construction will not be
permitted. Branch connection may be made with either welding tees or
forged branch outlet fittings. Branch outlet fittings shall be forged,
flared for improvement of flow where attached to the run, and reinforced
against external strains. Beveling, alignment, heat treatment, and
inspection of weld shall conform to ASME B31.1. Weld defects shall be
removed and repairs made to the weld, or the weld joints shall be entirely
removed and rewelded. After filler metal has been removed from its
original package, it shall be protected or stored so that its
characteristics or welding properties are not affected. Electrodes that
have been wetted or that have lost any of their coating shall not be used.
3.1.8 Pipe Cleanouts
Pipe cleanouts shall be the same size as the pipe except that cleanout
plugs larger than 4 inches will not be required. A cleanout installed in
connection with cast-iron soil pipe shall consist of a long-sweep 1/4 bend
or one or two 1/8 bends extended to the place shown. An extra-heavy
cast-brass or cast-iron ferrule with countersunk cast-brass head screw plug
shall be caulked into the hub of the fitting and shall be flush with the
floor. Cleanouts in connection with other pipe, where indicated, shall be
T-pattern, 90-degree branch drainage fittings with cast-brass screw plugs,
except plastic plugs shall be installed in plastic pipe. Plugs shall be
the same size as the pipe up to and including 4 inches. Cleanout tee
branches with screw plug shall be installed at the foot of soil and waste
stacks, at the foot of interior downspouts, on each connection to building
storm drain where interior downspouts are indicated, and on each building
drain outside the building. Cleanout tee branches may be omitted on stacks
in single story buildings with slab-on-grade construction or where less than
18 inches of crawl space is provided under the floor. Cleanouts on pipe
concealed in partitions shall be provided with chromium plated bronze,
nickel bronze, nickel brass or stainless steel flush type access cover
plates. Round access covers shall be provided and secured to plugs with
securing screw. Square access covers may be provided with matching frames,
anchoring lugs and cover screws. Cleanouts in finished walls shall have
access covers and frames installed flush with the finished wall. Cleanouts
installed in finished floors subject to foot traffic shall be provided with
a chrome-plated cast brass, nickel brass, or nickel bronze cover secured to
the plug or cover frame and set flush with the finished floor. Heads of
fastening screws shall not project above the cover surface. Where
cleanouts are provided with adjustable heads, the heads shall be [cast
iron] [or] [plastic].
3.2 FIXTURES AND FIXTURE TRIMMINGS
Polished chromium-plated pipe, valves, and fittings shall be provided where

exposed to view. Angle stops, straight stops, stops integral with the
faucets, or concealed type of lock-shield, and loose-key pattern stops for
supplies with threaded, sweat or solvent weld inlets shall be furnished and
installed with fixtures. Where connections between copper tubing and
faucets are made by rubber compression fittings, a beading tool shall be
used to mechanically deform the tubing above the compression fitting.
Exposed traps and supply pipes for fixtures and equipment shall be
connected to the rough piping systems at the wall, unless otherwise
specified under the item. Floor and wall escutcheons shall be as
Page 27
specified. Drain lines and hot water lines of fixtures for handicapped
personnel shall be insulated and do not require polished chrome finish.
Plumbing fixtures and accessories shall be installed within the space shown.
3.2.1 Fixture Connections
Where space limitations prohibit standard fittings in conjunction with the

cast-iron floor flange, special short-radius fittings shall be provided.
Connections between earthenware fixtures and flanges on soil pipe shall be
made gastight and watertight with a closet-setting compound or neoprene
gasket and seal. Use of natural rubber gaskets or putty will not be
permitted. Fixtures with outlet flanges shall be set the proper distance
from floor or wall to make a first-class joint with the closet-setting
compound or gasket and fixture used.
3.2.2 Flushometer Valves
Flushometer valves shall be secured to prevent movement by anchoring the

long finished top spud connecting tube to wall adjacent to valve with
approved metal bracket. Flushometer valves for water closets shall be
installed 39 inches above the floor, except at water closets intended for
use by the physically handicapped where flushometer valves shall be mounted
at approximately 30 inches above the floor and arranged to avoid
interference with grab bars. In addition, for water closets intended for
handicap use, the flush valve handle shall be installed on the wide side of
the enclosure. Bumpers for water closet seats shall be installed on the
flushometer spud.
3.2.3 Fixture Supports
Fixture supports for off-the-floor lavatories, urinals, water closets, and

other fixtures of similar size, design, and use, shall be of the
chair-carrier type. The carrier shall provide the necessary means of
mounting the fixture, with a foot or feet to anchor the assembly to the
floor slab. Adjustability shall be provided to locate the fixture at the
desired height and in proper relation to the wall. Support plates, in lieu
of chair carrier, shall be fastened to the wall structure only where it is
not possible to anchor a floor-mounted chair carrier to the floor slab.
3.2.3.1 Support for Solid Masonry Construction
Chair carrier shall be anchored to the floor slab. Where a floor-anchored

chair carrier cannot be used, a suitable wall plate shall be imbedded in
the masonry wall.
3.2.3.2 Support for Concrete-Masonry Wall Construction
Chair carrier shall be anchored to floor slab. Where a floor-anchored

chair carrier cannot be used, a suitable wall plate shall be fastened to
the concrete wall using through bolts and a back-up plate.
3.2.3.3 Support for Wood Stud Construction
Where floor is a concrete slab, a floor-anchored chair carrier shall be

used. Where entire construction is wood, wood crosspieces shall be
installed. Fixture hanger plates, supports, brackets, or mounting lugs
shall be fastened with not less than No. 10 wood screws, 1/4 inch thick
Page 28
minimum steel hanger, or toggle bolts with nut. The wood crosspieces shall
extend the full width of the fixture and shall be securely supported.
3.2.3.4 Wall-Mounted Water Closet Gaskets
Where wall-mounted water closets are provided, reinforced wax, treated

felt, or neoprene gaskets shall be provided. The type of gasket furnished
shall be as recommended by the chair-carrier manufacturer.
3.2.4 Access Panels
Access panels shall be provided for concealed valves and controls, or any
item requiring inspection or maintenance. Access panels shall be of
sufficient size and located so that the concealed items may be serviced,
maintained, or replaced. Access panels shall be as specified in[ Section
05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS.
3.2.5 Sight Drains
Sight drains shall be installed so that the indirect waste will terminate 2
inches above the flood rim of the funnel to provide an acceptable air gap.
3.2.6 Traps
Each trap shall be placed as near the fixture as possible, and no fixture
shall be double-trapped. Traps installed on cast-iron soil pipe shall be
cast iron. Traps installed on steel pipe or copper tubing shall be
recess-drainage pattern, or brass-tube type. Traps installed on plastic
pipe may be plastic conforming to ASTM D 3311. Traps for acid-resisting
waste shall be of the same material as the pipe.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS
3.3.1 Identification Tags
Identification tags made of brass, engraved laminated plastic, or engraved

anodized aluminum, indicating service and valve number shall be installed
on valves, except those valves installed on supplies at plumbing fixtures.
Tags shall be 1-3/8 inch minimum diameter, and marking shall be stamped or
engraved. Indentations shall be black, for reading clarity. Tags shall be
attached to valves with No. 12 AWG, copper wire, chrome-plated beaded
chain, or plastic straps designed for that purpose.
3.4 TESTS, FLUSHING AND DISINFECTION
3.4.1 Plumbing System
The following tests shall be performed on the plumbing system in accordance

with ICC IPC, except that the drainage and vent system final test shall
include the smoke test. The Contractor has the option to perform a
peppermint test in lieu of the smoke test. If a peppermint test is chosen,
the Contractor must submit a testing procedure to the Contracting Officer
for approval.
a. Drainage and Vent Systems Test. The final test shall include a smoke
test.
Page 29
b. Building Sewers Tests.
c. Water Supply Systems Tests.
3.4.2 Defective Work
If inspection or test shows defects, such defective work or material shall

be replaced or repaired as necessary and inspection and tests shall be
repeated. Repairs to piping shall be made with new materials. Caulking of
screwed joints or holes will not be acceptable.
3.4.3 System Flushing
3.4.3.1 During Flushing
Before operational tests or disinfection, potable water piping system shall

be flushed with [hot] potable water. Sufficient water shall be used to
produce a water velocity that is capable of entraining and removing debris
in all portions of the piping system. This requires simultaneous operation
of all fixtures on a common branch or main in order to produce a flushing
velocity of approximately 4 fps through all portions of the piping system.
In the event that this is impossible due to size of system, the Contracting
Officer (or the designated representative) shall specify the number of
fixtures to be operated during flushing. Contractor shall provide adequate
personnel to monitor the flushing operation and to ensure that drain lines
are unobstructed in order to prevent flooding of the facility. Contractor
shall be responsible for any flood damage resulting from flushing of the
system. Flushing shall be continued until entrained dirt and other foreign
materials have been removed and until discharge water shows no
discoloration. All faucets and drinking water fountains, to include any
device considered as an end point device by NSF/ANSI 61, Section 9, shall
be flushed a minimum of 0.25 gallons per 24 hour period, ten times over a
14 day period.
3.4.3.2 After Flushing
System shall be drained at low points. Strainer screens shall be removed,

cleaned, and replaced. After flushing and cleaning, systems shall be
prepared for testing by immediately filling water piping with clean, fresh
potable water. Any stoppage, discoloration, or other damage to the finish,
furnishings, or parts of the building due to the Contractor's failure to
properly clean the piping system shall be repaired by the Contractor. When
the system flushing is complete, the hot-water system shall be adjusted for
uniform circulation. Flushing devices and automatic control systems shall
be adjusted for proper operation according to manufacturer's instructions.
Comply with ASHRAE 90.1 - IP for minimum efficiency requirements. Unless
more stringent local requirements exist, lead levels shall not exceed
limits established by 40 CFR 50.12 Part 141.80(c)(1). The water supply to
the building shall be tested separately to ensure that any lead
contamination found during potable water system testing is due to work
being performed inside the building.
3.4.4 Operational Test
Upon completion of flushing and prior to disinfection procedures, the

Contractor shall subject the plumbing system to operating tests to
demonstrate satisfactory installation, connections, adjustments, and
functional and operational efficiency. Such operating tests shall cover a
Page 30
period of not less than 8 hours for each system and shall include the
following information in a report with conclusion as to the adequacy of the
system:
a. Time, date, and duration of test.
b. Water pressures at the most remote and the highest fixtures.
c. Operation of each fixture and fixture trim.
d. Operation of each valve, and faucet.
e. Operation of each vacuum breaker and backflow preventer.
3.4.5 Disinfection
After all system components are provided and operational tests are
complete, the entire domestic hot- and cold-water distribution system shall
be disinfected. Before introducing disinfecting chlorination material,
entire system shall be flushed with potable water until any entrained dirt
and other foreign materials have been removed.
Water chlorination procedure shall be in accordance with AWWA C651 and

AWWA C652 as modified and supplemented by this specification. The
chlorinating material shall be hypochlorites or liquid chlorine. The
chlorinating material shall be fed into the water piping system at a
constant rate at a concentration of at least 50 parts per
million (ppm). Feed a properly adjusted hypochlorite solution injected
into the system with a hypochlorinator, or inject liquid chlorine into
the system through a solution-feed chlorinator and booster pump until
the entire system is completely filled.
Test the chlorine residual level in the water at 6 hour intervals for a
continuous period of 24 hours. If at the end of a 6 hour interval, the
chlorine residual has dropped to less than 25 ppm, flush the piping
including tanks with potable water, and repeat the above chlorination
procedures. During the chlorination period, each valve and faucet
shall be opened and closed several times.
After the second 24 hour period, verify that no less than 25 ppm
chlorine residual remains in the treated system. The 24 hour
chlorination procedure must be repeated until no less than 25 ppm
chlorine residual remains in the treated system.
Upon the specified verification, the system including tanks shall then be
flushed with potable water until the residual chlorine level is reduced
to less than one part per million. During the flushing period, each
valve and faucet shall be opened and closed several times.
Take addition samples of water in disinfected containers, for bacterial

examination, at locations specified by the Contracting Officer
Test these samples for total coliform organisms (coliform bacteria,
fecal coliform, streptococcal, and other bacteria) in accordance with [
EPA SM 9223] [AWWA 10084]. The testing method used shall be EPA
approved for drinking water systems and shall comply with applicable
local and state requirements.
Page 31
Disinfection shall be repeated until bacterial tests indicate the
absence of coliform organisms (zero mean coliform density per 100
milliliters) in the samples for at least 2 full days. The system will
not be accepted until satisfactory bacteriological results have been
obtained.
3.5 WASTE MANAGEMENT
Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated

containers. Return solvent and oil soaked rags for contaminant recovery
and laundering or for proper disposal. Close and seal tightly partly used
sealant and adhesive containers and store in protected, well-ventilated,
fire-safe area at moderate temperature. Place used sealant and adhesive
tubes and containers in areas designated for hazardous waste. Separate
copper and ferrous pipe waste in accordance with the Waste Management Plan
and place in designated areas for reuse.
3.6 POSTED INSTRUCTIONS
Framed instructions under glass or in laminated plastic, including wiring

and control diagrams showing the complete layout of the entire system,
shall be posted where directed. Condensed operating instructions
explaining preventive maintenance procedures, methods of checking the
system for normal safe operation, and procedures for safely starting and
stopping the system shall be prepared in typed form, framed as specified
above for the wiring and control diagrams and posted beside the diagrams.
The framed instructions shall be posted before acceptance testing of the
systems.
3.7 TABLES
TABLE I
PIPE AND FITTING MATERIALS FOR
DRAINAGE, WASTE, AND VENT PIPING SYSTEMS
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
SERVICE
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Item # Pipe and Fitting Materials A B C D E F
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 Cast iron soil pipe and fittings, hub X X X X X

and spigot, ASTM A 74 with
compression gaskets. Pipe and
fittings shall be marked with the
CISPI trademark.
2 Cast iron soil pipe and fittings hubless, X X X X

CISPI 301 and ASTM A 888. Pipe and
fittings shall be marked with
the CISPI trademark.
3 Cast iron drainage fittings, threaded, X X X

ASME B16.12 for use with Item 10
4 Cast iron screwed fittings (threaded) X X
Page 32
TABLE I
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
SERVICE
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
5 Grooved pipe couplings, ferrous and X X X X

non-ferrous pipe ASTM A 536
and ASTM A 47/A 47M
6 Ductile iron grooved joint fittings X X X X

for ferrous pipe ASTM A 536 and
ASTM A 47/A 47M for use with Item 5
7 Bronze sand casting grooved joint X X X X

pressure fittings for non-ferrous pipe
ASTM B 584, for use with Item 5
8 Wrought copper grooved joint pressure X X

pressure fittings for non-ferrous pipe
ASTM B 75 C12200,
ASTM B 152/B 152M, C11000,
ASME B16.22
9 Malleable-iron threaded fittings, X X

galvanized ASME B16.3
for use with Item 10
10 Steel pipe, seamless galvanized, X X X

ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type S, Grade B
11 Seamless red brass pipe, ASTM B 43 X X
12 Bronzed flanged fittings, X X

ASME B16.24 for use
with Items 11 and 14
13 Cast copper alloy solder joint X X

pressure fittings, ASME B16.18
14 Seamless copper pipe, ASTM B 42 X
15 Cast bronze threaded fittings, X X

ASME B16.15
16 Copper drainage tube, (DWV), X* X X* X X

ASTM B 306
17 Wrought copper and wrought X X X X X

alloy solder-joint drainage
Page 33
TABLE I
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
SERVICE
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
fittings. ASME B16.29
18 Cast copper alloy solder joint X X X X X

drainage fittings, DWV,
ASME B16.23
19 Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) X X X X X X
plastic drain, waste, and vent pipe
and fittings ASTM D 2661,
ASTM F 628
20 Polyvinyl Chloride plastic drain, X X X X X X

waste and vent pipe and fittings,
ASTM D 2665,
ASTM F 891, (Sch 40)
ASTM F 1760
21 Process glass pipe and fittings, X

ASTM C 1053
22 High-silicon content cast iron pipe X X X

and fittings (hub and spigot, and
mechanical joint), ASTM A 518/A 518M
23 Polypropylene (PP) waste pipe and X

fittings, ASTM D 4101
24 Filament-wound reinforced thermosetting X

resin (RTRP) pipe, ASTM D 2996
SERVICE:
A - Underground Building Soil, Waste and Storm Drain

B - Aboveground Soil, Waste, Drain In Buildings
C - Underground Vent
D - Aboveground Vent
E - Interior Rainwater Conductors Aboveground
F - Corrosive Waste And Vent Above And Belowground
* - Hard Temper
TABLE II
PIPE AND FITTING MATERIALS FOR PRESSURE PIPING SYSTEMS
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
SERVICE
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Item No. Pipe and Fitting Materials A B C D
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Page 34
TABLE II
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
SERVICE
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 Malleable-iron threaded fittings, X X X X
a. Galvanized, ASME B16.3
for use with Item 4a
b. Same as "a" but not galvanized X

for use with Item 4b
2 Grooved pipe couplings, ferrous pipe X X X

ASTM A 536 and ASTM A 47/A 47M,
non-ferrous pipe, ASTM A 536
and ASTM A 47/A 47M,
3 Ductile iron grooved joint fittings X X X

for ferrous pipe ASTM A 536
and ASTM A 47/A 47M, for use
with Item 2
4 Steel pipe: X X X X
a. Seamless, galvanized,
ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type S, Grade B
b. Seamless, black, X
ASTM A 53/A 53M,
Type S, Grade B
5 Seamless red brass pipe, X X X

ASTM B 43
6 Bronze flanged fittings, X X X

ASME B16.24 for use with
Items 5 and 7
7 Seamless copper pipe, ASTM B 42 X X X
8 Seamless copper water tube, X** X** X** X***

ASTM B 88, ASTM B 88M
9 Cast bronze threaded fittings, X X X

ASME B16.15 for use
with Items 5 and 7
10 Wrought copper and bronze solder-joint X X X X

pressure fittings,
ASME B16.22 for
use with Items 5, 7 and 8
11 Cast copper alloy solder-joint X X X X

pressure fittings,
ASME B16.18
Page 35
TABLE II
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
SERVICE
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
for use with Item 8
12 Bronze and sand castings grooved X X X

joint pressure fittings for non-
ferrous pipe ASTM B 584,
for use with Item 2
13 Polyethylene (PE) plastic pipe, X X

Schedules 40 and 80, based on
outside diameter ASTM D 2447
14 Polyethylene (PE) plastic pipe X X

(SDR-PR), based on controlled
outside diameter, ASTM D 3035
15 Polyethylene (PE) plastic pipe X X

(SIDR-PR), based on controlled
inside diameter, ASTM D 2239
16 Butt fusion polyethylene (PE) plastic X X

pipe fittings, ASTM D 3261
for use with Items 14, 15, and 16
17 Socket-type polyethylene fittings X X

for outside diameter-controlled
polyethylene pipe, ASTM D 2683
18 Polyethylene (PE) plastic tubing, X X

ASTM D 2737
19 Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride X X X

(CPVC) plastic hot and cold
water distribution system,
ASTM D 2846/D 2846M

(CPVC) plastic pipe, Schedule 40
and 80, ASTM F 441/F 441M

(CPVC) plastic pipe (SDR-PR)
ASTM F 442/F 442M
22 Threaded chlorinated polyvinyl chloride X X X

(chloride CPVC) plastic pipe fittings,
Schedule 80, ASTM F 437,
for use with Items 20, and 21
Page 36
TABLE II
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
SERVICE
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
23 Socket-type chlorinated polyvinyl X X X
chloride (CPVC) plastic pipe
fittings, Schedule 40, ASTM F 438
24 Socket-type chlorinated polyvinyl X X X

chloride (CPVC) plastic pipe fittings
Schedule 80, ASTM F 439
25 Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pipe, X X

Schedules 40, 80, and 120,
ASTM D 1785
26 Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pressure-rated X X

pipe (SDR Series), ASTM D 2241
27 Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pipe X X

fittings, Schedule 40, ASTM D 2466
28 Socket-type polyvinyl chloride (PVC) X X

plastic pipe fittings, schedule 80,
ASTM D 2467 for use with Items 26 and 27
29 Threaded polyvinyl chloride (PVC) X X

plastic pipe fittings, schedule 80,
ASTM D 2464
30 Joints for IPS PVC pipe using solvent X X

cement, ASTM D 2672
31 Polypropylene (PP) plastic pipe and X X X

fittings; ASTM F 2389
32 Steel pipeline flanges, MSS SP-44 X X
33 Fittings: brass or bronze; X X

ASME B16.15, and ASME B16.18
ASTM B 828
34 Carbon steel pipe unions, X X X

socket-welding and threaded,
MSS SP-83
35 Malleable-iron threaded pipe X X

unions ASME B16.39
36 Nipples, pipe threaded ASTM A 733 X X X
Page 37
TABLE II
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
SERVICE
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
37 Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) X X X
Plastic Pipe ASTM F 877
38 Press Fittings X X
A - Cold Water Service Aboveground

B - Hot and Cold Water Distribution 180 degrees F Maximum
Aboveground
C - Compressed Air Lubricated
D - Cold Water Service Belowground
Indicated types are minimum wall thicknesses.
** - Type L - Hard
*** - Type K - Hard temper with brazed joints only or type K-soft temper
without joints in or under floors
**** - In or under slab floors only brazed joints
-- End of Section --
Page 38
LY
ON
CE
REN
FE
RE
R
FO
T
EP
NC
CO
Y
AR
IN
LIM
RE
-P
N
S IG
DE
L
NA
FI
T
NO
NO
T
FI
NA
L
DE
SI
GN
-P
RE
LI
MI
NA
RY
CO
NC
EP
T
FO
R
RE
FE
RE
NC
E
ON
LY
LY
ON
CE
REN
FE
RE
R
FO
T
EP
NC
CO
Y
AR
IN
LIM
RE
-P
N
SIG
DE
L
NA
FI
T
NO
LY
ON
CE
REN
FE
RE
R
FO
T
EP
NC
CO
Y
AR
IN
LIM
RE
-P
N
S IG
DE
L
NA
FI
T
NO
MSC LOGO - ETCHED ON GLAZING PANELS WHERE NOTED ON DWGS
EcoFlex™ Modular Systems
Sustainable Performance with Ergonomic Benefits
THERMOSET CO-POLYMER
FIBERGLASS
THERMOSET LAMINATE
ECOFLEX THERMOSET CUSHION
REINFORCED WOVEN SYNTHETIC
EcoFlex is the premiere cushion back carpet tile for performance and comfort. It’s advanced composite
structure creates the most stable modular platform while offering superior resiliency and delivering maximum
comfort underfoot. The result - a modular system that is ergonomically effective and environmentally friendly.
ADVANCED ERGONOMICS SUSTAINABILITY SUPERIOR PERFORMANCE

• Unsurpassed comfort underfoot – • Contains 12% Post Industrial and 3% Post • Unsurpassed dimensional stability –
reduces leg fatigue and reduces falls Consumer Recycled content based on total no growing or shrinking
• Superior acoustical and sound product Weight* • Superior appearance retention – no
absorbing properties • Contains no plasticizers, no PVC edge ravel, zippering or delamination,
• Excellent cushion resiliency • Recyclable through Mohawk’s high tuft bind
• Superior thermal insulation benefits ReCover program • Advanced Thermoset polyurethane

over hard-back tile • Meets USGBC LEED criteria for recycled content compound gives long term strength
and stability
• Withstands the toughest rolling and • CRI Green Label Plus certified
foot traffic
• Moisture barrier meets the require-
* Use of ColorStand Solution Dyed Nylon increases the
recycled content ments of the “British Spill and 10,000
Impact Penetration” Test (not at seams)
EcoFlex™ Warranty Highlights*
The Mohawk Group’s EcoFlex Modular Carpet Tiles form the industry’s most stable, ergonomically efficient and advanced
composite ever introduced. Lifetime warranties* protect your investment against all performance failures that are critical
to modular effectiveness. EcoFlex also contains both post-consumer and post-industrial recycled content, making it
environmentally friendly.
ITEMS UNDER WARRANTY
WEAR
Carpet maintains at least 90% of surface weight ............................................................................................................. L I F E T I M E
STATIC PROTECTION
Carpet will not give static discharge above 3.5 KV .......................................................................................................... L I F E T I M E
EDGE RAVEL
No carpet ends will come out at lengthwise seam .......................................................................................................... L I F E T I M E
ZIPPERING
Carpet will not zipper or develop continuous yarn run ................................................................................................... L I F E T I M E
DELAMINATION
Carpet will not delaminate (separate from the backing) ................................................................................................ L I F E T I M E
IMPERVIOUS TO LIQUIDS
Carpet will not lose usable properties from normal activity ......................................................................................... L I F E T I M E
Liquid barrier (Non-seam areas) .............................................................................................................................................. L I F E T I M E
DIMENSIONAL STABILITY
Carpet will not shrink or grow ................................................................................................................................................... L I F E T I M E
Carpet will not be affected by atmosphere, temperature or humidity (cupping, doming, dishing) .................... L I F E T I M E
Cushion resiliency ......................................................................................................................................................................... L I F E T I M E
Tuft bind control ............................................................................................................................................................................. L I F E T I M E
LIMITATIONS
The Mohawk Group EcoFlex Warranty does not cover damage caused by abnormal use or damage not rising
out of a defect in the carpet. This includes burns, tears, pulls, cuts, installation on stairs or damage caused by
improper maintenance or damage in transit.
Excludes edge ravel to access floor outlets or trench header ducts.

Excludes dye lot variation or change in color due to improper maintenance.
Excludes conditions resulting from other than ordinary wear.
Lifetime of Carpet is defined by The Mohawk Group to be the lifetime of the original purchaser for a particular installation.
* See The Mohawk Group official warranty documents for further details.
Our sustainable technologies help keep carpet on the floor longer. And when its time to
Carpet Recycling Program recycle your old carpet, call our toll free hot line 877-3RE-CYCL and we’ll handle the rest.
Printed on recycled paper made from 100% recycled fiber including 100% post-consumer fiber, and meets the Environmental Defense definition of TCF (Totally Chlorine Free).
500 TO WN PA R K L AN E , S UI T E 40 0 • K E NN E S AW, G EO R G I A 3 0 1 4 4 • 8 0 0 - 5 5 4 - 6 6 3 7 • WW W. MO H AWKG R O U P. C O M ECFLX SLT0001118

Destiny Alliance Consulting, LLC
A Service Disabled Veteran Owned Small Business (SDVOSB)
Verified by the Department of Veterans Affairs Center for Veterans Enterprise (CVE)
GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION
Federal Supply Service Authorized Federal Supply Schedule Price List

On‐line access to contract ordering information, terms and conditions, up‐to‐date pricing, and the option to create an
electronic delivery order is available through GSA Advantage, a menu‐driven database system. The INTERNET address for GSA
Advantage is http://www.gsaadvantage.gov/. For more information on ordering from Federal Supply Schedule click on the FSS
Schedules button at http://www.fss.gsa.gov.
FSC Group 72, Part 1, Section A DUNS#: 08‐699‐7271
Contract Number: GS‐27F‐0036V Tax ID: 26‐0770573
Contract Period –Contract Ends August 27, 2014 Cage Code: 4WL20

CONTRACTOR CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION
Destiny Alliance Consulting, LLC Saylor Marketing, Inc.
1052 Eliot Street 801 Wincrest Place
Oceanside, CA 92057‐2651 Great Falls, VA 22066‐2736
Phone: (703) 757‐7605 Fax: (703) 757‐7606 Phone: (703) 757‐7605 Fax: (703) 757‐7606
Toll Free: (800) 272‐9567 Toll Free: (800) 272‐9567
Email: clifsaylor@dac1st.com Email: clifsaylor@cox.net
Business Size: SDVOSB

INFORMATION FOR ORDERING ACTIVITIES 9a. Government VISA & MasterCard Accepted
1a. Awarded SINS: 9b. Government VISA & MasterCard Discount
31‐301 Broadloom 0% ‐ Net 30 days
31‐303 Carpet Tile 10. Foreign Items: None
31‐601 Broadloom and Carpet Tile with recycled content 11. Time of Delivery:
31‐602 Floor recycling program SIN 31‐301 Broadloom ‐ 40 days or sooner
31‐603 Cleaning chemicals SIN 31‐303 Carpet Tile ‐ 40 days or sooner
31‐604 Installation Services SIN 31‐601 Carpet Tile ‐ 40 days or sooner
1b. Lowest Price each SIN: Express Shipment available – by request
31‐301 Pixel $ 14.50 12. FOB Point:
31‐303 All carpet tile products $ 26.63 All SIN(s) Destination, CONUS or Stateside Port
31‐601 Odessa $ 28.04 13. Order Address:
31‐603 4” Vinyl Base $ 1.95 Destiny Alliance Consulting, LLC
31‐603 6007 Odor Gone $ 11.82 801 Wincrest Place
31‐603 Hot water extraction $ 0.10 Great Falls, VA 22066‐2736
31‐604 Installation carpet tile $ 6.57 Phone: (703) 757‐7605
2. Maximum Order Limitation: Fax: (703) 757 757‐7606
SIN(s) 31‐301, 31‐303, 31‐601 14. Payment Address:
Carpet (12’), Carpet Tile 24”x24” $500,000 Destiny Alliance Consulting, LLC
SIN(s) 31‐602 801 Wincrest Place
Flooring recycling program $150,000 Great Falls, VA 22066‐2736
SIN(s) 31‐603, 31‐604 Phone: (703) 757‐7605
Installation services (carpet) $150,000 Fax: (703) 757 757‐7606
Installation services (resilient) $150,000 15. Warranty:
Cleaning chemicals $150,000 SIN(s) 31‐301, 31‐303, 31‐601 the Warranty Provisions
Cleaning services (CARP) $150,000 under 552.246‐17 applies for two years along with
3. Minimum Order: $500 the commercial warranty. After two years only the
4. Geographic Coverage: commercial warranties as shown in the catalogs remain.
All SINs – Continental United States SIN(s) 31‐603 & 31‐604 Installation Warranty – One Year
5. Point of Production 16. Export Packing Charge: Not Applicable
716 Bill Myles Drive 17. Credit Card Terms same as basic contract
Saraland AL 26571 18. Maintenance:
6. Prices shown are Government Net Discount Deducted Frequent vacuuming; periodic hot water extraction.
Including reduction in IFF to 0.75% effective 1/1/2004 Call (703) 757‐7605 for more specifics.
7. Quantity Discounts: 19. Installation:
SIN(s) 31‐301, 31‐303, 31‐601 ‐3.5% over 5,000 sy Instructions included in each roll/carton of carpet.
8. Prompt Payment:
1% 20 days, net 30 days
Carpet Installation Services
GS‐27F‐0036V
Scope of Work
Prices shown herein are for installation in an open empty space on a “clean floor”. A “clean floor” is in a
condition to accept carpet/carpet tile with no additional preparation other than sweeping it clean. Any
other work, e.g. furniture removal, flash patching, cove molding, removal of existing carpet, disposal off‐
site, recycling, etc., will be quoted on a case by case basis after a site inspection. When installation is
required in conjunction with carpet purchased under this contract, the carpet will be invoiced separately
and before the installation. Prices quoted are for work to be performed during normal working hours,
Monday through Friday, holidays excluded. Where noted in the pricing, minimum charges for
installation will apply. All work will be performed by either mill certified or FCIB certified installers. All
work performed and materials used to install carpet will be guaranteed for a minimum of one year.

48 Contiguous States,
CARPET INSTALLATION SERVICES
& District of Columbia
SIN 31‐604 – direct glue down w/o attached cushion 6.82 per square yard
SIN 31‐604 – direct glue down with attached cushion 7.27 per square yard
SIN 31‐604 – double stick or double glue down 8.74 per square yard
SIN 31‐604 – stretch‐in over separate cushion 7.07 per square yard
SIN 31‐604 – carpet tiles full spread 6.57 per square yard
SIN 31‐604 – Furniture Lift (see note below) 10.10 per square yard
SIN 31‐603 – Furnish and Install 4” Vinyl Base 1.95 per linear foot
SIN 31‐603 – Furnish and Install 4” Carpet Base 2.47 per linear foot
SIN 31‐604 – Removal, disposal and floor prep 4.25 per square yard
Removal, Disposal and Floor Prep
Appropriate removal and disposal of existing flooring (recycling recommended) and floor preparation. Note:
Pricing is to include basic removal, disposal and floor preparation; services above $500 and work necessary to
address potentially complex environmental problems, such as asbestos abatement, mold and mildew, or extensive
floor preparation shall be negotiated with the government on a case‐by‐case basis.

Furniture Lifting for Carpet Replacement (SIN 31‐604)
Using appropriate “lifting” equipment and trained technicians, allows installation of new carpet tile, with modular
and systems furniture in place and with minimal disruption to occupied work area. All furniture systems shall be
lifted by equipment which has been structurally engineered for that particular furniture system. No crowbars or
modified car jacks are to be used. No phones or electronic equipment shall be unplugged. After each installation
session, work area must be returned to normal working order with all furniture in original location. Since work is
being performed in an occupied work area, “low VOC” or “no VOC” adhesives are to be used. The GSA carpet
contractor will be required to provide, upon request from government customers, an onsite demonstration of the
equipment and lifting method to be used, and any additional information on which to base procurement decisions.
Vinyl Installation Services
GS‐27F‐0036V
Scope of Work

VINYL INSTALLATION SERVICES
SIN 31‐604 – direct glue down of vinyl composition or solid vinyl tile 1.95 per square foot
SIN 31‐604 – direct glue down of rubber tile 10.50 per square foot
SIN 31‐604 – direct glue down of static dissipative tile 7.75 per square foot
SIN 31‐604 – direct glue down by perimeter adhesive method
31.50 per square foot
(residential sheet vinyl)
SIN 31‐604 – heat welding seams on vinyl sheet flooring 5.50 per linear foot
SIN 31‐604 – flash coving vinyl sheet flooring at walls 12.50 per linear foot
SIN 31‐604 – furnish and Install 4” Vinyl Base 1.95 per linear foot
SIN 31‐604 – install cove base (carpet type) 1.85 per linear foot
SIN 31‐604 – install risers 41.50 per linear foot
SIN 31‐604 – install stringers 8.50 per linear foot
SIN 31‐604 – install stair nosing 41.50 per linear foot
SIN 31‐604 – Removal, disposal and floor prep 0.50 per square foot
Appropriate removal and disposal of existing flooring (recycling recommended) and floor preparation.
Note: Pricing is to include basic removal, disposal and floor preparation; services above $500 and work
necessary to address potentially complex environmental problems, such as asbestos abatement, mold
and mildew, or extensive floor preparation shall be negotiated with the government on a case‐by‐case
basis.


On‐line access to contract ordering information, terms and conditions, up‐to‐date pricing, and the option to create an
electronic delivery order is available through GSA Advantage, a menu‐driven database system. The INTERNET address for GSA
Advantage is http://www.gsaadvantage.gov/. For more information on ordering from Federal Supply Schedule click on the FSS
Schedules button at http://www.fss.gsa.gov.
Contract Number: GS‐27F‐0036V Tax ID: 26‐0770573
Contract Period –Contract Ends August 27, 2014 Cage Code: 4WL20

Destiny Alliance Consulting, LLC Saylor Marketing, Inc.
1052 Eliot Street 801 Wincrest Place
Oceanside, CA 92057‐2651 Great Falls, VA 22066‐2736
Email: clifsaylor@dac1st.com Email: clifsaylor@cox.net
Business Size: SDVOSB

INFORMATION FOR ORDERING ACTIVITIES 9a. Government VISA & MasterCard Accepted
1a. Awarded SINS: 9b. Government VISA & MasterCard Discount
31‐301 Broadloom 0% ‐ Net 30 days
31‐303 Carpet Tile 10. Foreign Items: None
31‐601 Broadloom and Carpet Tile with recycled content 11. Time of Delivery:
31‐602 Floor recycling program SIN 31‐301 Broadloom ‐ 40 days or sooner
31‐603 Cleaning chemicals SIN 31‐303 Carpet Tile ‐ 40 days or sooner
31‐604 Installation Services SIN 31‐601 Carpet Tile ‐ 40 days or sooner
1b. Lowest Price each SIN: Express Shipment available – by request
31‐301 Pixel $ 14.50 12. FOB Point:
31‐303 All carpet tile products $ 26.63 All SIN(s) Destination, CONUS or Stateside Port
31‐601 Odessa $ 28.04 13. Order Address:
31‐603 4” Vinyl Base $ 1.95 Destiny Alliance Consulting, LLC
31‐603 6007 Odor Gone $ 11.82 801 Wincrest Place
31‐603 Hot water extraction $ 0.10 Great Falls, VA 22066‐2736
31‐604 Installation carpet tile $ 6.57 Phone: (703) 757‐7605
2. Maximum Order Limitation: Fax: (703) 757 757‐7606
SIN(s) 31‐301, 31‐303, 31‐601 14. Payment Address:
Carpet (12’), Carpet Tile 24”x24” $500,000 Destiny Alliance Consulting, LLC
SIN(s) 31‐602 801 Wincrest Place
Flooring recycling program $150,000 Great Falls, VA 22066‐2736
SIN(s) 31‐603, 31‐604 Phone: (703) 757‐7605
Installation services (carpet) $150,000 Fax: (703) 757 757‐7606
Installation services (resilient) $150,000 15. Warranty:
Cleaning chemicals $150,000 SIN(s) 31‐301, 31‐303, 31‐601 the Warranty Provisions
Cleaning services (CARP) $150,000 under 552.246‐17 applies for two years along with
3. Minimum Order: $500 the commercial warranty. After two years only the
4. Geographic Coverage: commercial warranties as shown in the catalogs remain.
All SINs – Continental United States SIN(s) 31‐603 & 31‐604 Installation Warranty – One Year
5. Point of Production 16. Export Packing Charge: Not Applicable
716 Bill Myles Drive 17. Credit Card Terms same as basic contract
Saraland AL 26571 18. Maintenance:
6. Prices shown are Government Net Discount Deducted Frequent vacuuming; periodic hot water extraction.
Including reduction in IFF to 0.75% effective 1/1/2004 Call (703) 757‐7605 for more specifics.
7. Quantity Discounts: 19. Installation:
SIN(s) 31‐301, 31‐303, 31‐601 ‐3.5% over 5,000 sy Instructions included in each roll/carton of carpet.
8. Prompt Payment:
1% 20 days, net 30 days
Carpet Installation Services
GS‐27F‐0036V
Scope of Work

CARPET INSTALLATION SERVICES
SIN 31‐604 – direct glue down w/o attached cushion 6.82 per square yard
SIN 31‐604 – direct glue down with attached cushion 7.27 per square yard
SIN 31‐604 – double stick or double glue down 8.74 per square yard
SIN 31‐604 – stretch‐in over separate cushion 7.07 per square yard
SIN 31‐604 – carpet tiles full spread 6.57 per square yard
SIN 31‐604 – Furniture Lift (see note below) 10.10 per square yard
SIN 31‐604 – Removal, disposal and floor prep 4.25 per square yard
Appropriate removal and disposal of existing flooring (recycling recommended) and floor preparation. Note:
Pricing is to include basic removal, disposal and floor preparation; services above $500 and work necessary to
address potentially complex environmental problems, such as asbestos abatement, mold and mildew, or extensive
floor preparation shall be negotiated with the government on a case‐by‐case basis.

equipment and lifting method to be used, and any additional information on which to base procurement decisions.
GS‐27F‐0036V
Scope of Work

basis.

January 6, 2009 LEED THE WAY
C&A TILE & SIX-FOOT LEED PRODUCT CHART
Products can help contribute to a possible 9 points for LEED NC/CI and 15 points for LEED EB
Powerbond® Powerbond®
Possible ER3® RS Flex-Aire™ Closed Cell Condensed
LEED Modular Ethos Conserv RS cushion ER3® Cushion RS Ethos™ Cushion Vinyl Vinyl
Credit Pts. Tile modular tile modular tile tile RS Cushion Cushion
Construction Waste Management
MR credits 2.1 & 2.2 for NC & CI 1-2 Vinyl-backed Carpet is 100% recyclable back into carpet in C&A’s closed loop recycling process.
MR credits 1.1 & 1.2 for EB
Total Recycle Content*
MR credits 4.1 & 4.2 for NC & CI 1-2 44-59% 26 – 41% 0% 15 - 26% 39-52% 36-52% 0% 0%
MR credits 2.1-2.5 for EB
Overall Post Consumer
(depending on style) 10% 0% 0% 0% 10% 10% 0% 0%
Overall Pre-consumer
(depending on style) 34-49% 26 – 41% 0% 15 - 26% 29-42% 26-42% 0% 0%
Regional Materials
Product Manufacture 1-2 36% 25% 2% 7% 40% 10% 10% 9%
MR credits 5.1 & 5.2 for NC & CI Dalton, GA Dalton, GA Dalton, GA Dalton, GA Dalton, GA Dalton, GA Dalton, GA Dalton, GA
Sustainable Cleaning Products
MR credits 4.1-4.3 for EB 1-3 Tandus can recommend green cleaning products
IEQ: Carpet
IEQ credits 4.3 for NC & CI 1 Meets CRI Green Label Plus
IEQ: Adhesive
IEQ credits 4.1 for NC & CI 1 Product available with pre-applied RS adhesive. Meets Green Label Plus & SCAQMD Rule#1168
IEQ: Entryway Systems
IEQ credit 10.1 for EB 1 Tandus can provide entryway systems
IEQ: Cleaning Equipment / Policy
IEQ credit 10.3 & 10.6 for EB 1-2 Tandus can recommend procedures and equipment.
ID: Certified Products
ID Credit 1 C&A recycled content products are certified to the NSF 140 Sustainable Carpet Assessment Standard.
THIRD PARTY
CERTIFICATIONS
Recycled Content Certified by Certified by Certified by SCS
SCS SCS
NSF 140 Standard Platinum Gold Platinum
California Gold Standard California California California
Platinum Gold Platinum
Possible Point Total 15
MONTEREY C&A CROSSLEY

Carpet Resources, Inc.
Tandus Flooring, Inc. – C&A, Monterey, Crossley
Carpet Tile, Broadloom Carpet & Installation Services


On‐line access to contract ordering information, terms and conditions, up‐to‐date pricing, and the option to create an electronic delivery order is
available through GSA Advantage, a menu‐driven database system. The INTERNET address for GSA Advantage is http://www.gsaadvantage.gov/.
For more information on ordering from Federal Supply Schedule click on the FSS Schedules button at http://www.fss.gsa.gov.

Contract Number: GS‐27F‐0504H Tax ID: 54‐1827791
Contract Period – October 1, 1997 through August 29, 2013 Cage Code: 1BJJ5

Carpet Resources, Inc. Saylor Marketing, Inc.
801 Wincrest Place 801 Wincrest Place
Great Falls, VA 22066‐2736 Great Falls, VA 22066‐2736
Email: clifsaylor@cox.net Email: clifsaylor@cox.net
Business Size: Woman Owned Small Business

INFORMATION FOR ORDERING ACTIVITIES SIN 31‐303 Carpet Tile ‐ 60 days or sooner
1a. Awarded SINS: SIN 31‐601 Recycled 12’,Tile ‐ 60 days or sooner
31‐301 Broadloom Express Shipment in 5 business days ARO available
31‐303 Carpet Tile 12. FOB Point:
31‐601 Recycled Content All SIN(s) Destination, CONUS or Stateside Port
31‐603 Custom Colors – Broadloom & Carpet Tile 13. Order Address:
Vinyl and Carpet Base Carpet Resources, Inc.
31‐604 Installation Services 801 Wincrest Place
1b. Lowest Price each SIN: Great Falls, VA 22066‐2736
31‐301 Starting Point II $12.63 Phone: (703) 757‐7605
31‐303 Explorer $16.25 Fax: (703) 757 757‐7606
31‐601 Sail Away $16.79 14. Payment Address:
31‐603 4” Vinyl Base $1.95 Carpet Resources, Inc.
31‐604 Installation $6.50 801 Wincrest Place
2. Maximum Order Limitation: Great Falls, VA 22066‐2736
SIN(s) 31‐301, 31‐303, 31‐601 Phone: (703) 757‐7605
Carpet and Carpet Tile ‐ $500,000 Fax: (703) 757 757‐7606
SIN(s) 31‐603, 31‐604 15. Warranty:
Installation ‐ $150,000 Tandus Flooring, Inc. commercial warranty applies.
3. Minimum Order: $500 SIN(s) 31‐603 & 31‐604 Installation Warranty – One
4. Geographic Coverage: Year
All SINs – Continental United States 16. Export Packing Charge: Not Applicable
5. Point of Production 17. Credit Card Terms same as basic contract
311 Smith Industrial Blvd. 18. Maintenance:
Dalton, GA 30721 Frequent vacuuming; periodic hot water extraction.
6. Prices shown are Government Net Discount Call (703) 757‐7605 for more specifics.
Including IFF of 0.75% effective 1/1/2004 19. Installation:
7. Quantity Discounts: Instructions included in each roll/carton of carpet.
SIN(s) 31‐301,31‐303, 31‐601 ‐ None Call (703) 757‐7605 for assistance.
8. Prompt Payment: 20‐23. Not Applicable
Net 30 days 24. Inside Delivery:
9a. Government VISA & MasterCard Accepted Quote ‐ per JOB BASIS.
9b. Government VISA & MasterCard Discount Call (703) 757‐7605 for assistance.
0% ‐ Net 30 days 25. SIN 31‐303 All Carpet Tile backing
10. Foreign Items: None contains recycled content
11. Time of Delivery:
SIN 31‐301 Broadloom ‐ 60 days or sooner
GS‐27F‐0504H
INSTALLATION SERVICES
Scope of Work

48 Contiguous Boston, New York, Chicago, St.
INSTALLATION States, & District Louis, Kansas City, Miami, San
of Columbia Francisco, and Los Angles
SIN 31‐604 ‐ direct glue down w/o attached cushion $ 6.50 $ 7.75
SIN 31‐604 ‐ direct glue down with attached cushion $ 6.50 $ 7.20
SIN 31‐604 ‐ double stick or double glue down $ 7.25 $ 10.55
SIN 31‐604 ‐ stretch‐in over separate cushion $ 7.00 $ 8.75
SIN 31‐604 ‐ carpet tiles full spread $ 6.50 $ 7.50
SIN 31‐604 – Furniture Lift $ 10.10 $ 10.10

48 Contiguous Boston, New York, Chicago, St.
ACCESSORIES States, & District Louis, Kansas City, Miami, San
of Columbia Francisco, and Los Angles
SIN 31‐603 – Furnish and Install 4” Vinyl Base $ 1.95 $ 1.95
SIN 31‐603 – Furnish and Install 4” Carpet Base $ 2.25 $ 2.25
SIN 31‐603 – Furnish and Install 6” Vinyl Base $ 2.57 $ 2.57
SIN 31‐603 – Furnish and Install 6” Carpet Base $ 2.73 $ 2.73

equipment and lifting method to be used, and any additional information on which to base procurement
decisions.
GS‐27F‐0504H

Scope of Work

basis.
USGBC LEED™ Credit Contributions:
C/S Pedisystems® Entrance Flooring
LEED EQ Credit 5, Pollutant Source Control:

Employ permanent entryway systems (grilles,
grates, etc.) to capture and hold dirt, particulate,
etc. from entering the building at all high volume
entryways.
LEED MR Credits 4.1, 4.2 and 6, Recycled

Content and Rapidly Renewable Material:
C/S now offers recycled rubber and rapidly
renewable teak, IPE, bamboo and cork tread
insert options.
LEED EQ Credit 4.2, Low-Emitting Paints

and Coatings:
C/S offers environmentally-friendly (no VOC)
powder coat finishes that cost no more than
standard anodized finishes and are up to twice
as abrasive resistant (testing available).
LEED EQ Credit 4.3, Low-Emitting Carpet:

C/S PediTred® meets the Carpet and Rug
Institute's standard for good indoor quality.
LEED ID Credit:
C/S PediTred architectural
mats have earned In USGBC LEED™ 2.2 EQ Credit 5, the architect/designer is
MBDC Cradle to Cradle: encouraged to specify permanent entryway systems (grilles,
Silver Certification. grates, etc.) to capture dirt and other particulates at all high
volume entryways. The basis of the credit is to stop the dirt
C/S now offers a PVC-free hinge connector
for PediTred products.
before it enters the building and contributes to poor indoor
air quality. Specifying an entrance flooring system will also
reduce the amount of cleaning chemicals used and help
prolong the life of other textile and hard surface finishes
in the building.
C/S sustainable products can be viewed by visiting A C/S Pedisystem mat or grid not only fills this need but
www.buildinggreen.com or www.c-sgroup.com
goes way beyond, environmentally. Listed on the left are
the ways that Pedisystem products can contribute toward
your goal of LEED certification.
Printed on Recycled Paper 6696 Route 405 Highway

with Soy Based Inks Muncy, Pennsylvania 17756
800-233-8493
©Copyright 2008 Construction Specialties, Inc.
G6LB
Installation Instructions
Gridline G6 with LB Frame
1). Site Prep
Use wood forms to prepare a recess in the concrete a minimum of 1-1/4” for
1-1/8”Grille, 3/4” for 5/8”Grille and 1/2” for 3/8”Grille depth to final finished floor
surface.
Recess should be made to overall size of unit, plus a 1/16” on all sides of the recess to
allow for clearance.
Ensure the frames exposed surface will be flush with the finished floor.
After concrete has cured, remove the wood forms.
(See Illustration A) below
2). Assemble Frame

Assemble the level base frame. The ends of the frame pieces have been mitered, pre-
drilled and countersunk to allow for quick assembly.
3). Set Frame

Set the frame assembly around the perimeter of the formed recess.(Illustration A)
Shim the frame as required 24” o.c. to elevate the frame assembly to finished floor height.
Before fastening, double check the finished floors surface height, and ensure that frame
assembly is both plumb and square.
Drill a hole using the 5/32” masonry bit into concrete using the pre-countersunk holes in the
frame.
Install 3/16” masonry anchor. (anchors and bit included in hardware package)
Clean the concrete recess to remove all dirt, oily film, and debris.
Illustration A
4). Grout
Grout the concrete pit surface to bring bottom of recess flush with top of lower frame
leg using a waterproof self-leveling grout.(Illustration B)
Recommended brands:
Quikrete #1585 mixed with #8610 Acrylic Fortifier
For technical assistance, call Quikrete @ 800-282-5828, www.quikrete.com
VinylCrete with Acrylic Fortifier
For technical assistance, call UMACO Inc @ 978-453-8881 www.umaco.com
Pour and level grout using the legs within the frame opening as screed points.
IMPORTANT: THE BED SURFACE MUST BE

SMOOTH AND LEVEL TO ENSURE PROPER GRID
INSTALLATION, ALIGNMENT AND TO PREVENT
TRIPPING HAZARDS.
Illustration B
* Allow the grout material sufficient time to cure properly before inserting the
Gridline within the framed opening.
5.) Gridline Installation
Trial fit the Gridline modules at locations indicated on shop drawings within the
frames, so each module is aligned and evenly spaced between perimeter frames and
adjacent modules. Mark all lock down fastener locations on the pit surface and on the
grid modules then remove all grid modules. Drill all fastener holes at marked
locations. (Note: surface lockdowns – 9/16” hole at 1-5/8” depth or hidden lockdowns-
3/8” hole at 5/8” depth). Install lead anchors. (Note: Use one of the screws to tighten
the lead shield before installing the grids) Attach all hidden lock down clips with cap
screw, flat washer and retaining washers attached to the gridline module at marked
locations. Repeat for all modules. Replace all modules at intended locations.
Use the 1/8” Hex tool (hidden lockdown) or Phillips drive (surface lockdown) to start
each fastener into each expansion anchor. Once all are engaged, snug all fasteners
tight. Starting from the center working out towards the perimeter in a rotating
manner. Repeat for all modules. See illustration C1 for Surface Lockdowns and
Illustration C2 for Hidden Lockdowns.
Illustration C2
Illustration C1
6.) Completion
It is necessary to cover the installation with ¾” plywood until all additional project work is
completed. This will protect the Gridline from potential abuse during the construction
phase. Damage occurring from inadequate protection during this phase may void the
manufacturer’s warranty.
7.) Care and Maintenance Instructions

Manufacturer’s suggested safe rolling load for the Gridline G6 is 500# per wheel. Heavy loads
beyond this weight may damage the units, contributing to their premature failure or creating a
tripping hazard.
Clean the recess as frequently as necessary. This will prevent an excess buildup of dirt under
the grids.
Clean the grids, when cleaning the recess, using a power sprayer to wash and clean each
module. Remove all clogged or caked materials from within all aperture openings.
Replacement of the gridline modules, Replace each module to original position and engage all
fasteners prior to final tightening of each fastener. Cleaning enables Gridline to function as
intended. Call us at (800) 233-8493 (Muncy) or (888) 895-8955 (Canada) and our sales group
will assist you with special needs or conditions, loading considerations and installation related
issues.
3/8" GRIDLINE WITH LEVEL BASE FRAME AND SURFACE LOCK DOWNS NO. REVISION DATE BY
INSERT STYLE: N/A INSERT COLOR: N/A CATALOG NUMBER: G6 PART NUMBER:
DIM 'A' NO. F&F RELEASE DATE BY

GRIDLINE WIDTH
DIM 'B'
GRIDLINE LENGTH
TRAFFIC DIRECTION 1/8"
1/16"
[3.2mm]
[1.6mm] .235"
.145" [5.97mm] 1/16"
1/2"
[3.68mm] [1.4mm]
[12.7mm]
3/8"
[9.5mm]
TRAFFIC DIRECTION
GRIDLINE LENGTH
DIM 'B'
LATEX SCREED
SECTION Y-Y
DIM 'A'
GRIDLINE WIDTH
SURFACE HOLD DOWN

24" [609.6mm] O.C.
(PER MODULE)
1/16"
[1.6mm]
S/S LEVEL BASE

ANGLE FRAME LATEX SCREED
(16S001002)
TYPICAL PLAN VIEW MASONRY LAG FASTENER

(90H066004)
5/16"-18 UNC X 1-3/4" LG.
S/S PHILLIPS FLAT HEAD
24" (609.6mm) O.C. MACHINE SCREW (90H523002)
NOTES:
5/16" DIA. EXPANSION SHIELD
*MAX. SINGLE GRID SIZE NOT TO EXCEED 8'-0" *GRIDS SHALL BE ABLE TO SUPPORT A 500LB ROLLING LOAD.
[2.438M] IN WIDTH (DIM 'A') OR 4'-0" [1.22M] IN
LENGTH (DIM 'B') * SURFACE WIRE SPACING PROVIDES A 57.7% EFFECTIVE OPEN AREA FOR DIRT
(90H090004)
SECTION X-X
AND MOISTURE REMOVAL.
*ALL SURFACE WIRES AND SUPPORT BARS ARE ELECTRONICALLY
RESISTANCE WELDED TO *ADDITIONAL SPECIFICATIONS ARE CONTAINED IN THE LATEST C/S CATALOG OR
ENSURE CORRECT WEIGHT BEARING PROPERTIES. AT C-SGROUP.COM AND ARE CONSIDERED PART OF THIS TRANSMITTAL.
DIM 'A' DIM 'B' PROJECT:

PLEASE VERIFY ALL
QTY MARK # LOCATION MODEL FRAME FINISH REMARKS

WIDTH LENGTH
LOCATION:
CONTRACTOR:
AGENT: SHT:
DRG. BY: DATE: JOB NO.:
CIRRUS ® HRC
Square Lay-in, Tegular
fine texture
CIRRUS Beveled Tegular with SUPRAFINE® 9/16″ Exposed Tee grid; SOUNDSOAK® Acoustical Walls
Detail and Grid Intersections
CIRRUS Beveled CIRRUS Angled CIRRUS CIRRUS

Tegular Tegular Beveled Tegular with Angled Tegular with
SUPRAFINE 9/16″ PRELUDE® 15/16″
Exposed Tee grid Exposed Tee grid
Contact TechLineSM for LEED Information. 1-877-ARMSTRONG
CIRRUS ® HRC LEED Credits
Square Lay-in, Tegular Energy
Waste Recycled Local Renewable Low-Emitting Daylight
Mgmt Content Materials Materials Materials & Views
fine texture ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓+ ✓ ✓ ✓
Total Recycled Content: 83%
Key Selection Attributes Typical Applications
Pre-Consumer: 54%, Post-Consumer: 29%
• Refined visual • Patient and exam rooms – assists in
addressing HIPAA requirements Post consumer recycled content due to recycled ceilings from
• Excellent sound absorption the closed-loop Armstrong Ceiling Recycling Program.
• Offices
• 30-Year Limited System Warranty
• Conference rooms + Credit is location dependent.
against visible sag (excludes Items
533HRC, 535HRC, 539HRC), • Department stores/retail Color
mold/mildew and bacterial growth
White (WH)
M
Performance Selection FOR A
NC
PER
Visual Selection Dots represent highest level of performance. 30
year
EE E
GU
AR AN T
UL Classified
Acoustics Fire Light Sag Anti- VOC Recycling
NRC CAC Resist Reflect Resist Microbial Formaldehyde Program Durable
Grid Edge Item
Face Profile Number Dimensions
CIRRUS
15/16″ Square 574HRC 2′ x 2′ x 3/4″ 0.70 35 Class A 0.86 HumiGuard+ BioBlock+ No-Added Yes Standard
Lay-in ● ● ● ● ● ●
533HRC 2′ x 4′ x 3/4″ 0.70 35 Class A 0.86 Standard Standard
● ● ● ● ●
9/16″ Beveled 589HRC 2′ x 2′ x 3/4″ 0.70 35 Class A 0.86 HumiGuard+ Standard
Tegular ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ●
15/16″ Angled 584HRC 2′ x 2′ x 3/4″ 0.70 35 Class A 0.86 HumiGuard+ Standard
Tegular ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ●
Installations in Healthcare facilities need to meet HIPAA oral privacy requirements
Physical Data
Material No-Added Formaldehyde Weight; Square Feet/Carton
Wet-formed mineral fiber No-Added Formaldehyde – free See product details at armstrong.com/ceilings
Surface Finish of formaldehyde-based resins. 30-Year Performance Guarantee & Warranty Information
Factory-applied latex paint Outperform CHPS Section 01350 See warranty details at armstrong.com/ceilings
requirements. (Independent test
Fire Performance reports available upon request.) Application Considerations
ASTM E84 and CAN/ULC S102 Not recommended for rooms containing MRI equipment
surface burning characteristics. Anti Mold/Mildew & Bacteria
BioBlock® Plus contains an anti- Recommended Suspension System
Flame Spread Index 25 or less.
Smoke Developed Index 50 or less. microbial treatment and provides
Items Suspension System
(UL labeled) guaranteed resistance against
growth of mold/mildew and 533HRC, 535HRC, 15/16″ PRELUDE®
ASTM E1264 Classification 574HRC, 584HRC
Gram-positive and Gram-negative
Type III, Form 1, Pattern E I odor/stain-causing bacteria for 539HRC, 589HRC 9/16″ SUPRAFINE ®
Fire Class A 9/16″ TRIMLOK® Screw-Slot
30 years. 9/16″ SILHOUETTE® Bolt-Slot
Sag Resistance Insulation Value 9/16″ INTERLUDE ®
HumiGuard® Plus – superior R Factor – 1.9 (BTU units) 9/16″ SONATA™
resistance to sagging in high humidity R Factor – 0.33 (Watts units)
conditions up to, but not including,
standing water and outdoor Backloading
applications. Recommendation
Contact TechLine for specific
information
LEED® is a registered trademark of the United States Green Building Council
SM
TechLine / 1 877 ARMSTRONG
1 877 276 7876
armstrong.com/ceilings (search: cirrus)
CS-3859-1008 © AWI Licensing Company, 2008 • Printed in the United States of America
3624 WW Tegular DS_310_New Template 2009 3/22/10 10:02 AM Page 63
WOODWORKS ®
Tegular
Natural Variations ™ , Constants ™ & Bamboo
Inset: WoodWorks Tegular Custom 2' x 4' with Rg 6003

WoodWorks Tegular with Lg 9512 Perforation in Natural Variations Dark Cherry
Perforation in Natural Variations Maple
Key Selection Attributes Ty p i c a l A p p l i c a t i o n s

• Rich, natural veneers • 100% upward access • Healthcare
• FSC-certified options available • Edge banding for superior quality and aesthetics • Office
• California Air Resources Board (CARB) compliant • Available with coordinating trims • Education
• Five perforation options now available to enhance • Composite Class A fire performance • Hospitality and retail
acoustical performance and design aesthetics • Custom veneers, perforations and sizes • Transportation
• Less expensive than custom millwork available
Veneer Selection Due to printing limitations, shade may vary from actual product. P e r f o r a t i o n O p t i o n s ** (Actual 1:6 scale shown)
Natural Variations Constants

(Real Wood Veneers) (Real Wood Veneers)
Unperforated Round Straight – Round Diagonal – Round Straight –

Beech Maple Light Cherry Dark Cherry Maple Cherry Walnut (W1) Rg 6006 (W2) Rd 6006 (W3) Rg 6011 (W4)
(NBE) (NMP) (NLC) (NDC) (CMA) (CCY) (CWA)
Bamboo
(Rapidly Renewable)
Oval Straight Slotted – Lg 9512 (W5) Oval Straight Slotted – Lg 9508 (W6)
* A premium veneer option managed through Architectural
** Perforations Rg 6011, Rd 6006, Lg 9508 and Lg 9512 are available in Natural Variations
Specialties due to the potential for significant color variation
Patina Native * Beech, Maple, Light Cherry, Dark Cherry and Bamboo Patina as standard options. These
panel to panel. Mininum order quantity and extended lead perforations are available in Bamboo Native and Constants finishes as premium options
(BAP) (BAN) time may apply. with extended lead times and minimum order quantities. To view more perforation
information and build swatches in real time, visit armstrong.com/swatchit
In addition to these standard options, there are additional veneers, perforations and sizes
available as premium and custom options. Contact the Armstrong Architectural Specialties
Project Management Team for details at 1 877 ARMSTRONG and select prompts 1-1-4.
3624 WW Tegular DS_310_New Template 2009 3/22/10 10:02 AM Page 64
Recycled
Content: 92% armstrong.com/greengenie
WOODWORKS ®
LEED® Credits LEED for Schools
Energy Waste Recycled Local Renewable Certified Low Emitting Acoustics Low Emitting
Tegular Mgmt Content Materials Materials Wood* or CHPS
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Natural Variations ™ , Constants ™ & Bamboo Location Dependent *Options Available
Colors and Perforations

NV Beech (NBE) NV Dark Cherry (NDC) Constants Walnut (CWA) Unperforated (W1) Rg 6011 (W4)
NV Maple (NMP) Constants Maple (CMA) Bamboo Patina (BAP) Rg 6006 (W2) Lg 9512 (W5)
NV Light Cherry (NLC) Constants Cherry (CCY) Bamboo Native (BAN) Rd 6006 (W3) Lg 9508 (W6)
Visual Selection Performance Selection Dots represent highest level of performance.
Acoustics
NRC CAC
Edge Item Dimensions Fire
Profile Number w Nominal W x L x H Rating
WOODWORKS Tegular Unperforated

9/16" Square Tegular 5404W1_ _ _ 2' x 2' x 3/4" N/A 38 Class A
●
WOODWORKS Tegular Perforated

9/16" Square Tegular 5404W2_ _ _ 2' x 2' x 3/4" 0.40** 28** Class A
5404W3_ _ _ 0.40** 28**
5404W4_ _ _ 0.65** 28**
●
5404W5_ _ _ 0.55** 28**

5404W6_ _ _ 0.40** 28**
w When specifying or ordering, please include the appropriate color suffix (e.g., 5404W1 N D C)
** Maximum NRC achieved with acoustical fiberglass infill (item 8200100). When infill is used, CAC is 28. For additional infill options, refer to the Acoustical Infill data page (CS-4172).
For veneers, sizes and perforation patterns available as special order, call 1 877 ARMSTRONG and select options 1-1-4.
NOTE: 4-carton minimum order quantity on all items.
NOTE: Perforations Rg 6011, Rd 6006, Lg 9508 and Lg 9512 are available in Natural Variations Beech, Maple, Light Cherry, Dark Cherry and Bamboo Patina as standard options. These perforations are
available in Bamboo Native and Constants finishes as premium options with extended lead times and minimum order quantities. To view more perforation information and build swatches in real time,
visit armstrong.com/swatchit
Suspension Systems
9/16" Standard: Interlude ® , Silhouette ® Bolt-Slot, Sonata ® , Suprafine ® , Trimlok ® Screw-Slot
Accessories
Item Number Description Dimensions Color Pcs/Ctn
Nominal W x L x H
5479 BioAcoustic Infill Panel 2' x 2' x 5/8" Beige 12
8200100 Fiberglass Infill Panel 2' x 2' x 1" Black 12

5413W1_ _ _ w 4" WoodWorks Trim with wood substrate 4" x 8' x 3/4" See Colors Above 6
5416W1_ _ _ w 6" WoodWorks Trim with wood substrate 6" x 8' x 3/4" See Colors Above 4
5659W1 _ _ _ w 4" WoodWorks Trim with aluminum substrate 4" x 10' See Colors Above 6
5660W1 _ _ _ w 6" WoodWorks Trim with aluminum substrate 6" x 10' See Colors Above 6
7804BL Angle Molding 7/8" x 12' x 9/16" Black 2

(recommended with trims)
w When specifying or ordering, include the color suffix that coordinates with your WoodWorks ceiling: (e.g., 5413W1 N M P)
Physical Data
Material ASTM E1264 Classification Seismic Installation
Fire retardant particle board with face-cut veneers; Composite – Fire Class A These systems have been engineered, tested, and meet the
FSC-certified options available. See CS-4014 for requirements for applications in Seismic Design Categories
details, or visit armstrong.com/woodworksfsc. Warranty D, E and F
One (1) year limited warranty.
Surface Finish Details: armstrong.com/warranty Weight; Square Feet/Carton
Clear or tinted semigloss coating Panels – 2.75 lbs/SF; 16 SF/ctn
Application Considerations 4" trim – 44 lbs/ctn; 48 LF/ctn
Fire Performance Variation among panels may occur due to the natural 6" trim – 44 lbs/ctn; 32 LF/ctn
ASTM E84 surface burning characteristics. characteristics of the wood and grain.
HPVA Certified with audit program per ASTM E84.
Flame Spread Index 25 or less. Smoke Developed It is very important that WoodWorks panels are climatized
Index 50 or less. prior to installation. Relative humidity between 25% and
55% and temperatures between 50˚F and 86˚F must be
maintained.
TechLineSM / 1 877 ARMSTRONG

1 877 276 7876 LEED® is a registered trademark of the U.S. Green Building Council
armstrong.com/woodworks All other trademarks used herein are the property of AWI Licensing Company and/or its affiliates
CS-3624-310 © 2010 AWI Licensing Company • Printed in the United States of America
4057 WW Canopies_909 10/1/09 3:20 PM Page 1
WOODWORKS ®
Canopies
WoodWorks Canopies 3' x 6' in Natural Variations ™ Light Cherry WoodWorks Canopies in Custom Maple Quartered

• Define spaces with warm natural wood • Class A Fire performance • Healthcare
• Concealed mounting hardware for a clean look • Custom veneer management available to • Office
above and below coordinate with millwork or other interior • Education
• Adjustable to special heights and angles finishes. Custom panel sizes available, • Hospitality and retail
• Veneer edge banding for superior quality contact Architectural Specialties at 1 877
• Exposed structure areas
• 92% recycled content ARMSTRONG, options 1-1-4
Veneer Selection Due to printing limitations, shade may vary from actual product.
Custom Veneers Available (partial list)
Natural Variations Bamboo These are a representation of some custom veneers used on recent projects. Additional custom
(Real Wood Veneers) (Rapidly Renewable) veneers and continuous upturn options are also available on WoodWorks Canopies.
Maple Light Cherry Dark Cherry Patina Native* Custom Custom Custom Anigre Custom Custom
(NMP) (NLC) (NDC) (BAP) (BAN) Red Oak African Mahogany Quartered Cherry Sapele
* A premium veneer option managed through Rift Quartered Figured Quartered Quartered
Architectural Specialties due to the potential
for significant panel-to-panel color variation. Due to the non-standard dimensions, finishes and performance features for WoodWorks Custom
Minimum order quantities and extended systems, please visit our website at armstrong.com/woodworks or call 1 877 ARMSTRONG and
lead times may apply.
select options 1-1-4 to work with the Architectural Specialties project management team.
4057 WW Canopies_909 10/1/09 3:20 PM Page 2
Recycled
Content: 92%
®
WOODWORKS LEED® Credits LEED for Schools
Energy Waste Recycled Local Renewable Certified Low Emitting Acoustics Low Emitting
Canopies Mgmt Content Materials Materials Wood or CHPS
✔ ✔ ✔
Location Dependent
Colors and Perforations

NV Maple (NMP) Bamboo Patina (BAP)
NV Light Cherry (NLC) Bamboo Native (BAN)
NV Dark Cherry (NDC)
Kit Components
• 1 Pre-curved WoodWorks Canopy • Suspension Hardware and 8' cables (4 cables per panel)
Visual Selection
Item Shape Dimensions Fire Rating
Number*
WOODWORKS Canopies – Unperforated
5918W1_ _ _ Hill 72" x 36" x 3/4" Class A
5920W1_ _ _ 96" x 48" x 3/4"
5919W1_ _ _ Valley 72" x 36" x 3/4" Class A

5921W1_ _ _ 96" x 48" x 3/4"
* When specifying or ordering, include the appropriate three-digit color suffix (Ex: 5918W1N D C) with the item number.
Note: For custom item details, contact the Architectural Specialties team at 1 877 ARMSTRONG and select options 1-1-4.
Accessories
Item Description
Number
7006 Escutcheon Kit – Used when hanging canopy below an existing ceiling. 2 kits needed per canopy.
5947 16 ' WoodWorks Canopy Suspension Wire – 3/32" cables (4 wires per bag)
Perspective View: Suspension Hardware: Plan & Elevation Views:
Physical Data
Material Weight WoodWorks Canopies, as with other architectural features
Fire retardant particle board with face-cut veneers 2.5 lbs per SF located in the ceiling plane, may obstruct or skew the existing
or planned fire sprinkler water distribution pattern, or possibly
Panel Arc Application Considerations delay the activation of the fire sprinkler or fire detection
Hill or Valley – 12 ' radius Variation among panels may occur due to the natural system. Designers and installers are advised to consult a fire
characteristics of the wood and grain. protection engineer, NFPA 13, and their local codes for guidance
Surface Finish on the proper installation techniques where fire detection or
Clear or tinted semigloss coating It is very important that WoodWorks panels are climatized suppression systems are present.
prior to installation. Relative humidity between 25% and
Fire Performance 55% and temperatures between 50˚F and 86˚F must be Seismic Installation
ASTM E84 surface burning characteristics. maintained. These systems have been engineered, tested, and meet
HPVA Certified with audit program per ASTM E84. the requirements for applications in Seismic Design
Flame Spread Index 25 or less. Smoke Developed Installation Consideration Categories D, E and F
Index 50 or less. WoodWorks Canopies require two peope to handle
and install a panel safely. See installation instructions on Suspension System
ASTM E1264 Classification website for details. Hardware and 8' cables included in kit
Composite – Fire Class A
Design Considerations
Warranty WoodWorks Canopies are not approved for exterior
One (1) year limited warranty. application. The WoodWorks Canopies cable hanging
Details: armstrong.com/warranty system must not hang from any commercial ceiling
suspension system. The canopy must not be used to
support any other material.

1 877 276 7876 LEED® is a registered trademark of the U.S. Green Building Council
armstrong.com/woodworks All other trademarks used herein are the property of AWI Licensing Company and/or its affiliates
CS-4057-909 © 2009 AWI Licensing Company • Printed in the United States of America
AXIOM®— Knife Edge®
Trim
Key Selection Attributes
• Unique profile provides

a refined alternative to a
traditional blunt 90-degree
vertical trims
• Two profiles available:
AXIOM-Knife Edge for
traditional acoustical
lay-in and tegular panels,
as well as drywall
AXIOM-Knife Edge for
Vector is specifically made
to work with the unique
Vector edge
• Extruded aluminum trim
provides more crisp edge
detailing compared to
conventional roll-formed
steel systems
• Compatible with Armstrong
exposed suspension
systems and Drywall Grid
Systems
• Colors coordinate with
Armstrong ceiling and grid
systems; custom colors
available
• Standard 90˚ factory
bonded corners
• Factory corners available in
configurations between 60˚
and 135˚ upon request
Factory Bonded corners
12"
The narrow Knife Edge profile accentuates the weightless appearance of floating ceiling clouds.
AXIOM-Knife Edge
Factory Bonded Inside Corner
Axiom-Knife Edge for Vector with Vector panel
AXIOM-Knife Edge profile is made from

AXIOM-Knife Edge extruded aluminum and offers precise
Factory Bonded Outside Corner detailing and quality. Axiom-Knife Edge with Tegular panel
Recycled
AXIOM®— Knife Edge® Content:
Trim 50%
Physical Data Details
Material
Trim Channel: Extruded aluminum, alloy 6063
Hanging Clip: Commercial quality aluminum 2-1/2"
T-Bar Connector Clip: Commercial quality aluminum

Splice Plate: Galvanized steel
Surface Finish
6-3/16"
Factory-applied baked polyester paint finish 2-5/16"
Axiom-Knife Edge profile
Cross Tee / Main Beam Interface
Flush fit 1/2"
End detail 5-9/16"

Splice with set screws
Axiom-Knife Edge for Vector profile
Warranty
10-year limited warranty
Visual Selection
ITEM
Axiom-Knife Edge with drywall (Use with
NUMBER DESCRIPTION DIMENSIONS AX-V-TBC and AXDWT)
AXIOM - Knife Edge
AXKE2STR 10' Straight 120 x 6-3/16 x 2-1/2"
AXKE90IC Inside 90˚ Corner 12 x 6-3/16 x 2-1/2"
AXKE90OC Outside 90˚ Corner 12 x 6-3/16 x 2-1/2"
AXIOM - Knife Edge for Vector
AXKEVE2STR 10' Vector - Straight 120 x 5-9/16 x 2-5/16"
AXKEVE90IC Inside 90˚ Corner 12 x 5-9/16 x 2-5/16"
AXKEVE90OC Outside 90˚ Corner 12 x 5-9/16 x 2-5/16" T-Bar Connector Clip (AXTBC) Splice Plate (AX4SPLICEB)
Accessories
AX2HGC Hanging Clip —
AXTBC T-Bar Connector Clip —
AX-V-TBC T-Bar Connector Clip —
AX4SPLICEB Splice Plate —
AXKEALIGN Alignment Clip —
AXDWT 10' Drywall Trim 120 x 1-3/4" Axiom-Knife Edge with
Alignment Clip (AXKEALIGN) AX2HGC for single panel
installation
Color Selection
12"
STANDARD FINISHES ■ VA - Vanilla**

■ WH - White*** ■ ST - Slate**
■ CR - Cream
■ HA - Haze NEW POWDER-COATED
FINISHES AXIOM-Knife Edge
■ CM - Camel Factory Bonded Inside Corner 135º Corner
■ PL - Platinum ■ CB - Carbon
■ BL - Tech Black ■ BC - Burnished Copper
■ SA - Silver Satin ■ CT - Copper Black Texture
■ BB - Bright Brushed* ■ FR - Forged Iron
■ SG - Silver Grey ■ GR - Graphite
■ MY - Gun Metal Grey ■ MC - Mica
■ PW - Pewter** ■ NK - Nickel
■ BZ - Bronze** ■ PR - Pewter Luster
■ SL - Silver** ■ SV - Silver Slate AXIOM-Knife Edge
■ CP - Copper** ■ SR - Steel Luster Factory Bonded Outside Corner 60º Corner
■ WK - Wolf** ■ TC - Textured Carbon
NOTE: Items AXHGC, AX2HGC, AXSPLICE, AX4SPLICEB, AXTBC,
AXPHANG58, AXPHANG118 are available in unpainted only.
** “S” Service items available only as special order
*** Use White for field-painted options.

1 877 276 7876
armstrong.com/axiom
CS-3528-209 Please Recycle © AWI Licensing Company, 2009
PROJECT NAME :
TYPE :
MODEL : LLSR-FR7 LENGTH:
SUBMITTAL APPROVED BY :
DATE :
PRODUCT | LL SERIES Set Field To Current Date
Reset Entire Form

LumiLedge® Sheet Rock Cove System
LLSR-FR7 Prefabricated Performance Cove System
HOW TO SPECIFY | Product Code ADDITONAL PROJECT NOTES:
L LS R -F R7
P R O DUCT CO VE LENG TH
LLSR-FR7 Please specify run length.
Prefabricated cove is packaged

in the following increments:
— 40 ft per carton
— 16 ft per carton
COVE DIMENSIONS MATERIALS
SUPPLIED MATERIALS INCLUDE:

extruded aluminum cove system which improves cove
quality and reduces installation time
die-formed link brackets to ensure horizontal and
vertical alignment
3"
SUPPLIED BY OTHERS:
not included - gypsum board, metal screws, corner
bead for top and bottom corner or other cove
enclosure materials must be supplied by others
7"
screw requirements:
*(cove dimensions represent the use of 5/8 in. gypsum board) 1/2 in. gypsum board - requires 1 in. screw (max.)
5/8 in. gypsum board - requires 1 1/4 in. screw
(max.)
INSTALLATION OVERVIEW
1. mount wall 2. link next extrusion 3. attach support 4. fasten bottom 5. fasten face 6. compound and
extrusion using bracket horizontal vertical gypsum apply corner
no. 8 screws gypsum beads
PATENT NO. 7,658,518
© ELECTRIX, INC. 45 SPRING STREET NEW HAVEN, CT 06519 203.776.5577 203.624.7545 info@electrix.com www.electrix.com
The Most Complete Narrow
Aperture Lighting System EDGE
Architect: Partners by DESIGN incorporated (Chicago, IL),

Project: CDW Business Technology Center (Vernon Hills, IL)
EDGE INDOOR DIRECT, INDIRECT AND BI-DIRECTIONAL LUMINAIRE
EDGE Acrylic Lens (E4A), Denver, CO

EDGE is a narrow aperture linear lighting system designed for ambient, perimeter, and wall wash applications. The complete suite of products fills
interiors with light, but imposes minimal impact on the architecture. Ceilings are left clean from bulky fixtures. Luminaires are now used to enhance
the overall design. The simple linear form visually defines an austere spatial form.
EDGE EDGE is the most complete narrow linear lighting system with the right set of options in lamps, mounting, ceiling trim,
housing styles, shielding media and configurations to confront the demands of today’s architectural environments.
RECESSED IN-WALL DIRECT

E2 E4 EW E2-IW EX2 EX33 EX4
2" wide 4" wide 4" wide 2" wide 2" x 4-3/4" 3" x 3" 4" x 4-3/4"
Parabolic Louver (P)
Snap-In Acrylic Lens (A)
Regress Lens (R)
Asymmetric Distribution (W)
Wall Wash (WW)
Open Uplight (O)
Asymmetric Uplight (WO)

1T5, 1T5, 2T5, 1T5, 1T5, 1T5, 1T5, 1T5, 2T5,
T5/T5HO Lamps 1T5HO 1T5HO, 2T5HO 1T5HO 1T5HO 1T5HO 1T5HO 1T5HO, 2T5HO
1T8, 2T8
T8 Lamps 1T8, 2T8
1T5,
Staggered Lamps (1 lamp) 1T5HO
2', 3', 4', 6', 8' 2', 3', 4', 6', 8' 2', 3', 4', 6', 8' 2', 3', 4', 6', 8' 4', 8' 4', 8', 12' 4', 8'
Individual or Individual or Individual or Individual or Individual or Individual or Individual or
Fixture Lengths Continuous Rows Continuous Rows Continuous Rows Continuous Rows Continuous Rows Continuous Rows Continuous Rows
Grid Ceiling (G1, G9)1

1E4 and EW, individual units and
continuous rows, will fall on-grid.
Screw Slot Ceiling (GS)2
Flanged (FL)
Flangeless (NF)
Aircraft Cable (AC)
Pendant Pipe (PP)
Wall Mount (WA)
Surface (S)
Illuminated Connector (CL)
MR16 Halogen Lamp
3 3 3
PRODUCT I NDE X
DIRECT INDIRECT BI-DIRECTIONAL

EX44 EX2-N EX33-N EX4-N EX44-N EX2B EX4B
4" x 4" 2" x 4-3/4" 3" x 3" 4" x 4-3/4" 4" x 4" 2" x 4-3/4" 4" x 4-3/4"
Parabolic Louver (P)
Snap-In Acrylic Lens (A)
Regress Lens (R)
Asymmetric Distribution (W)
Wall Wash (WW)
Open Uplight (O)
Asymmetric Uplight (WO)

1T5, 2T5, 1T5, 1T5HO 1T5, 1T5HO 1T5, 2T5, 1T5, 2T5, 1T5, 1T5HO 1T5, 2T5,
1T5HO, 2T5HO 1T5HO, 2T5HO 1T5HO, 2T5HO 1T5HO, 2T5HO T5/T5HO Lamps
1T8, 2T8 1T8, 2T8 1T8, 2T8 1T8, 2T8 T8 Lamps

1T5, 1T5,
1T5HO 1T5HO Staggered Lamps (1 lamp)
4', 8', 12' 4', 8' 4', 8', 12' 4', 8' 4', 8', 12' 4', 8' 4', 8'
Individual or Individual or Individual or Individual or Individual or Individual or Individual or
Continuous Rows Continuous Rows Continuous Rows Continuous Rows Continuous Rows Continuous Rows Continuous Rows Fixture Lengths
Grid Ceiling (G1, G9)1
Screw Slot Ceiling (GS)2
Flanged (FL)
Flangeless (NF)
Aircraft Cable (AC)
Pendant Pipe (PP)
Wall Mount (WA)
Surface (S)
Illuminated Connector (CL)
MR16 Halogen Lamp
3Quick Ship available with Parabolic Louver (E4P) , Acrylic Lens (E4A), Wall Wash (EW), 4' Individual unjoinable units, 120 and 277 voltage, G1 and FL mounting, Standard White, Single and Dual Circuit.
www.pinnacle-ltg.com
EDGE EX Parabolic Louver (EX4-P) and EDGE EX Wall Wash (EX4-WW)
Pinnacle Architectural Lighting Headquarters, Denver, CO
EDGE EX is Pinnacle Lighting’s suspended and surface mounted version of
the Edge recessed luminaire. EDGE EX offers multiple lighting distribution
options and up to 4 different shielding selections.
www.pinnacle-ltg.com
EDGE
Edge 4 Parabolic Louver Edge E4 Edge 2 Edge 2 Edge Wall Wash (EW)
(E4P) with MR16 lamp Acrylic Lens (E4A) Regress Lens (E2R) Parabolic Louver (E2P)
Edge EX2 Edge EX4 Indirect Edge EX2 Edge EX4 Edge EX4
Acrylic Lens (EX2-A) (EX4-N) with MR16 Lamp Parabolic Louver (EX2-P) Wall Wash (EX4-WW) Regress Lens (EX4-R)
Edge EX44 Edge EX33 Edge EX33 Edge EX44 Regress Lens Edge EX44 Parabolic
Acrylic Lens (EX44-A) Regress Lens (EX33-R) Indirect (EX33-O) (EX44-R) with MR16 Lamp Louver (EX44-P)
Edge 90 Degree Corner Edge T Intersection Edge Cross Intersection Edge Illuminated Edge IN-line Straight
Connector Row Alignment System
www.pinnacle-ltg.com 12655 East 42nd Avenue, Suite 50 Denver, CO 80239 Phone 303.322.5570 Fax 303.322.5568 February 2008.
PureFXTM is a revolutionary lighting system that
utilizes Ledalite’s MesoOptics® technology to purify
and control light. It offers the perfect blend of
brightness, control and energy efficiency – making
happier people and a healthier environment.
In nature, we are surrounded by a luminous environment.

Brightness is everywhere and on everything we can see or touch.
The purity and beauty of surrounding natural brightness makes
us feel happier and more comfortable.
This leads to a strong desire to create similarly pure, luminous

environments indoors. However, when brightness is introduced to
interior environments, it is imperative that it be controlled. If it is not,
brightness can have a detrimental effect and actually start to cause
visual discomfort.
Before After
A typical recessed parabolic fixture offers PureFX offers a similar level of glare
superior glare control, but it creates a control, but increases brightness levels
darker, cave-like environment with very throughout the space. This leads to softer
harsh shadows and dark walls. shadows and a brighter space that is still
visually comfortable.
1
Dimensions
24 "
4 3/8" 4 3/8"
23 13/16" 23 11/16"
Lamping Options
1 TT5 (40 /55/80W) 2 TT5 (40/55W) 2 T5/T5HO 3 T5/T5HO 2 T8 3 T8
Photometry
180
PureFXTM 2X2
135 135
Exceptional lighting performance and
styling – An ideal product for creating
distinct architectural rhythm. Blends in 90 90

well with many architectural ceiling types.
Ideal for offices, schools, healthcare
facilities, and other public spaces. 45 45
4
Dimensions
48 "
4 3/8" 4 3/8"
11 13/16" 47 11/16"
Lamping Options
1 T5/T5HO 2 T5/T5HO 1 T8 2 T8
Photometry
180
PureFXTM 1X4
135 135
Sleek and sophisticated – Perfect for
creating elongated rhythmic patterns or
install in continuous rows to create clean, 90 90

luminous lines throughout a space. Ideal
for offices, schools, healthcare facilities,
and other public spaces. 45 45
6
Dimensions
4 3/8"
23 13/16"
48 "
4 3/8"
47 11/16"
Lamping Options
1 T5HO 2 T5/T5HO 3 T5/T5HO
2 T8 3 T8
Photometry
180
135 135
90 90
45 45
Dimensions
4 7/16"
5 13/16"
48 "
4 7/16"
47 11/16"
Lamping Options
1 T5/T5HO 1 T8
Photometry
180
135 135
90 90
45 45
8 0
9
Purify I Control I Sustain
Ledalite MesoOptics® technology offers a revolutionary way to

purify and control light – allowing for the creation of vision-friendly
lighting solutions that are exceptionally energy efficient.
MesoOptics is produced in a manner similar to the holograms that appear on most

credit cards. Using this process, tiny microstructures no greater than 5 microns in
size are applied to a substrate such as acrylic, polycarbonate, or glass. It is these
microstructures that create the highly-unique characteristics of lighting control
that MesoOptics provides.
Purify
MesoOptics removes striations and hot spots
from lighting sources, creating smooth gradients
of pure, white light free from color shifts.
Control
MesoOptics can constrain
or disperse lighting for
optimum control and
uniformity. It also allows
for the creation of highly-
controlled beam patterns
and has the ability to redirect
light into desired angles.
Sustain 100% 100%

MesoOptics is a highly efficient material that allows
up to 95% of the light that enters to pass through.
This enables the creation of highly energy-efficient
lighting products that are environmentally
responsible and visually healthy.
60% 95%
Traditional Diffuser MesoOptics
10
Outstanding Lighting Control and Efficiency
MesoOptics® technology allows PureFXTM to have the best possible

combination of lighting control and brightness – with efficiencies that
are almost 20% higher than other recessed lighting products.
TM
Typical Parabolic Typical Recessed Indirect
Glare Glare
Zone Zone
Glare
Zone
The sharp cut-off People and objects A small amount of Batwing lighting A large amount of “Blob-Like” lighting
provides good glare have a direct view controlled brightness distribution creates uncontrolled distribution leads to
control, but creates of the lamp. is introduced to the less brightness brightness in the uncomfortable and
dark walls and walls and ceiling, directly below the glare zone leads distracting veiling
ceilings, leading to creating a brighter, fixture, minimizing to discomfort and reflections.
darker cave-like more pleasant veiling reflections. eye strain.
environments. environment without No direct view of
causing unwanted lamp.
glare.
Efficiency: 61% Efficiency: 81% Efficiency: 62 %
Dramatically Reduced Energy Consumption
1.40
When attempting to
1.22 W/sq.ft. 1.22 W/sq.ft.
achieve a light level of
1.20
50 footcandles, most
2x2 recessed lighting
1.00
systems will require
two 40W TT5 lamps. 0.79 W/sq.ft.
PureFX requires only 0.80
a single 55W TT5 lamp
to meet this lighting 0.60
level - a 35% reduction
in lighting-related 0.40
energy costs.
0.20
0.00
1 TT5 (55W) 2 TT5 (40W) 2 TT5 (40W)
2X2 - PureFX 2X2 - Parabolic Troffer 2X2 - Recessed Indirect

Light level achieved Light level achieved Light level achieved
52.3 footcandles 63.5 footcandles 57.1 footcandles
11
Applications Guide
PureFXTM comes with a range of lamping options to suit a wide variety of lighting and energy efficiency needs.
The chart below illustrates some of the options and their typical results.
Light Levels (average footcandles) Power Density
8X8 Centers 8X10 Centers

PureFX 2X2 PureFX 2X2
37.3 fc 30.2 fc
1 TT5 (40 W) 1 TT5 (40 W)
0.55 W/sq.ft. 0.46 W/sq.ft.
52.3 fc 42.3 fc
1 TT5 (55 W) 1 TT5 (55 W)
0.79 W/sq.ft. 0.66 W/sq.ft.

26.8 fc 21.7 fc
1 T8 (32 W) 1 T8 (32 W)
0.46 W/sq.ft. 0.38 W/sq.ft.
48.8 fc 39.5 fc
1 T5HO (54 W) 1 T5HO (54 W)
0.92 W/sq.ft. 0.77 W/sq.ft.

57.6 fc 46.5 fc
2 T8 (32 W)
0.86 W/sq.ft. 2 T8 (32 W) 0.72 W/sq.ft.
58.1 fc 46.7 fc
1 T5HO (54 W) 1 T5HO (54 W)
0.89 W/sq.ft. 0.74 W/sq.ft.
Maintenance
PureFX is quick and easy

to install and maintain.
You can access both the
lamp and ballast from
below the ceiling so you
never have to worry about
moving or damaging
ceiling tiles. No tools
are required. Push up on the center channel Gently lower the door in a The hinges swing out and away
and then slide to the side where downward direction. The hinge providing easy access
the hinges are located. system allows you to access the to the lamp and ballast
inside without having to get off compartment.
the ladder.
12
Order Guide
Series Size Version Configuration Lamp Type Lamp Wattage Housing

94 - PureFX 22 - 2x2 D1 - Standard T-Grid ST - Standalone B - TT5 1 - 1 Lamp 14 S - Standard (22 ga.)
14 - 1x4 (9/16" or 15/16") SMS - Standalone Master/Satellite* T - T8 2 - 2 Lamp 17 N - New York (20 ga.)
24 - 2x4 D2 - Slot T-Grid (sits flush CR - Continuous Row H - T5HO 3 - 3 Lamp 24 C - Chicago Plenum
64 - 6"x4 with bottom of T-Bar)* CMS - Continuous Row Master/Satellite* F - T5 28 T - Standard w/frame restraint
A1 - Air Return on 32
Standard T-Grid* 40
A2 - Air Return on 54
Slot T-Grid* 55
* NOTE: Option is not available
80
in 1x 4 or 6"x 4 sizes. * NOTE: Two fixtures with a shared ballast.
PureFXTM Specifications assembled together with extruded aluminum heights. Optional drywall kits are available for
profiles in a sturdy frame. The frame is hinged to non-accessible ceilings. Use screws or hanger wire
Housing Construction allow easy access to the inside of the fixture. (supplied by others) to secure fixture to structure.
Die-formed, post-painted, 22 gauge Maintenance can be performed from below the
cold-rolled steel (New York City version is ceiling without the need of tools. No hardware Air Return
20 gauge). Wire entrances are positioned is visible. Air return option available.
on the side of the housing to allow easy
wiring access for the installer. Multiple Finish Wiring
wire entrances are available (top or side) Housing and frame are post-painted, high-quality Flexible cable whips supplied in 9' or 12' lengths
to allow continuous row mounting of powder coat. Available in white only. for standard master/satellite configurations.
fixtures. Optional frame restraint is Weight
available to provide additional support to Ballast
the optical frame. Ballasts are electronic and available in 120V, 2x2 Maximum 23 lbs., 2x4 Maximum 40 lbs.,
277V or 347V. Optional 50/100 or 30/60/100 1x4 Maximum 30 lbs., 6"x4 Maximum 18 lbs.
Optical System step-dimming ballasts can be used to provide Approvals
Optical assembly consists of flat acrylic multi-level switching.
panels and extruded curved acrylic lens. Certified to UL & CSA Standards.
A protected MesoOptics® film layer creates Mounting City of Chicago Approved CCEA
optimal light distribution and high efficiency. Fixture is compatible with most ceiling types such (Housing Option - C).
The optical frame ends are constructed as Flat T-Grid and Slot T-Grid systems. Integrated Designed to comply with NYC code requirements
from die-formed cold-rolled steel bend-out tabs are provided for different T-bar grid (Housing Option - N).
2X2 Lamping Options

24 "
1 TT5 (40 /55/80W) 2 T5/T5HO 2 T8

4 3/8" 4 3/8"
23 13/16" 23 11/16"
2 TT5 (40/55W) 3 T5/T5HO 3 T8
2X4 Lamping Options

48 "
1 T5HO 3 T5/T5HO 3 T8
4 3/8" 4 3/8"
23 13/16" 47 11/16"
2 T5/T5HO 2 T8
1X4 Lamping Options Air Ceiling

48 " Return Integration
1 T5/T5HO 1 T8
4 3/8" 4 3/8"
11 13/16" 47 11/16"
2 T5/T5HO 2 T8
D1 - STANDARD
T-GRID 9/16"
OR 15/16"
A1/A2 -
6"X4 Lamping Options AIR RETURN
48 "
4 7/16" 4 7/16"
D2 - SLOT
1 T5/T5HO 1 T8
T-GRID 9/16"
5 13/16" 47 11/16"
13
Ledalite is a Philips group brand
19750 - 92A Avenue

Langley, British Columbia
Canada V1M 3B2
T 604.888.6811
F 800.665.5332
E info@ledalite.com
www.ledalite.com
© 2008 Philips Group. All rights reserved. These products may
be protected by applicable utility and design patents and patents
pending including, but not limited to: US Patents 6,037,593;
6,007,217; 5,834,765; 5,727,870; 5,624,202; 5,253,036; D496,121;
D556,358; D572,858 and/or Canadian Patents 2,175,554;
2,175,553; 2,238,557 and corresponding foreign patents. Ledalite
will aggressively defend all of its intellectual property. Due to
continuing product improvements, Ledalite reserves the right to
change specifications without notice.
L0153 Rev 3.0

NIMBUS™ SCONCE
12” 12”
3.5” 12” 4” 12”

FIXTURE WEIGHT 5 LBS FIXTURE WEIGHT 5 LBS
NS1-S1SA-12-GW-BNP NS2-S1SA-12-GW-BAL
MATCHING FIXTURES FEATURES
• The Nimbus sconce is an adaptation of a theater fixture • Virgin white acrylic is UV stable and UL-94 HB Flame
designed in the 1920s. Class rated.
• A small acrylic dome or flat lens accents this deco-style • OCL metal finishes are applied by hand and receive a
metal trim ring. protective clear coat lacquer.
• Spun from solid, non-ferrous 0.040” thick brass or 0.064” • 21 standard powder coat paints offered, however all RAL
thick aluminum. colors available.
• Thermally formed acrylic ranges from 3/16” to 1/4” thick, • Contact factory for additional modifications or options.
depending on size.
page 194 page 388
page 128 www.ocl.com

FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION GO TO WWW.OCL.COM AND SEARCH: NIMBUS SCONCE
SERIES HANGING SYSTEM SIZE DIFFUSER FINISH LAMPING (PHOTOMETRIC TEST #) VOLTAGE OPTIONS
S1SA INDOOR ADA 12 GW GLOSS PAL POLISHED ALUMINUM 12” 120 EMR REMOTE MOUNT EMERGENCY
COMPLIANT SCONCE WHITE ACRYLIC
SCONCE
BAL BRUSHED ALUMINUM 1QD13 1@13W QD 277 FUS FUSED
MW MATTE
WHITE ACRYLIC PTD PAINTED – 2QD13 2@13W QD (13787.0) 347 ULD UL DAMP LABEL
SPECIFY CODE
(EX. BKP FOR BLACK
PAINT, SEE PAGE 492
FOR PAINT OPTIONS)
NS1
(FLAT DIFFUSER)
NS2
(DOME DIFFUSER)
SPECIFY CATALOG CODE
____________ – ___________________ – ____ – _____________ – _____________ – _______________ – ____ – ___________________________
PHOTOMETRIC INFORMATION
SAMPLE CODE: NS2–S1SA–12–GW-BAL–2QD13–120–ULD
AVAILABLE AT WWW.OCL.COM
• Fixture mounts to a standard 4” J-box (supplied by others). • For photometric data, please visit www.ocl.com.
• Bodine® emergency ballast available, standard with remote mounted test • For lamp and base information, see pages 496-505 in the reference section.
switch and indicator light.
• For specific mounting instructions, please contact factory.
• Integral HPF electronic fluorescent ballast with Class A sound rating
• Five year product warranty.
(3-5 year ballast warranty depending on ballast specification).
• Fixture is ADA compliant.
Phone: 314.863.1895 | Fax: 314.863.3278 | www.ocl.com page 129

Submitted by One Source Associates Catalog Number: Type:
Job Name: D6LED4-6D9LED350K8MFC-WT
NAVFAC Bldg 157 & 210
Notes:
P10-68755
DATE: TYPE:
6" LED Downlight
D6LED4
FIRM NAME:
PROJECT:
120V, 277V
High Output
Ceiling Cutout: 61/4"

Maximum Ceiling Thickness 11/4"
For conversion to millimeters,
multiply inches by 25.4
Not to Scale
14 3⁄8"
APPLICATIONS: LED LIGHT ENGINE:
Architektu-r D6LED Series is a 6” High output LED light engine equipped with (10) high
specification grade LED downlight that brightness white LEDs (2700K, 3500K, 4000K, or 5000K)
combines superior brightness control with on a metal clad circuit board. Secured to an integral die
energy savings and low maintenance costs. cast aluminum heat sink for excellent thermal management.
7 1⁄4"
Suitable for a variety of commercial, retail, System designed for optimal life and lumen maintenance
and institutional applications with ambient (70% average lumen maintenance at 50,000 hours).
temperature up to 35°C (95°F)* during Optics: Vacuum metalized injection molded optical reflector
operation.*HDM option suitable for 35°C 1 1⁄4"
features (10) parabolic LED modules with Prescolite’s patent
with no through wiring or 25°C with through pending American Matte™ finish to produce uniform
wiring. Optional optical lens provide choice 5 3⁄4"
illumination. Also available in spot, medium, or wide 7"
of spot, medium, or wide distribution to distribution to best fit higher ceiling applications.
allow for higher ceiling applications.
Reflector/light engine assembly attaches with a single
HOUSING: tamper resistant screw (tool provided) for added security
One-piece 18 gauge non-corrosive steel and ensures ceiling appearance free of sagging throughout
platform. Pre-wired J-box with snap-on cover life of the product.
for easy access. Snap-in connection from
driver compartment allows easy installation LED DRIVER:
of light engine/trim assembly without tools Energy efficient solid state constant current electronic driver
above or below the ceiling and can be with 50,000 hour minimum anticipated life. Meets UL Class
upgraded to accommodate technology 2, inherent short-circuit protection, self limited, overload
improvements. Approved for 8 (4 in/4 protected. Flicker-free dimming options available to 1%.
out) No. 12 AWG conductors rated for 16 1⁄4"
90°C through wiring. Thermally activated CERTIFICATIONS: 11 3⁄4"
insulation detector. CSA certified to US and Canadian safety standards.
Suitable for damp locations. Wet locations consult
REFLECTOR:
technical support. Approved for through wiring. Non-IC
High purity spun aluminum self-flanged
reflector with iridescence suppressed Alzak rated.
anodized finish. Provides 45° cutoff for ENERGY STAR® qualified for 120V standard (no
a glare-free ceiling appearance. Slots in dimming) operation with 80+ CRI in 3500K, 4000K,
reflector for added heat dissipation and and 5000K only.
optimal LED life. Cable attachment for
WARRANTY:
added safety and ease of installation. 14 3⁄8"
3 year warranty.
CATALOG NUMBER: EXAMPLE: D6LED4-6D9LED435K8SP18
HOUSING/ LED
LED GENERATION VOLTAGE TRIM COLOR TEMP CRI BEAM ANGLE REF. FINISH REF. COLOR REF. OPTIONS ACCESSORIES
❑ D6LED4 ❑ Blank ❑ 6D9LED4 ❑ 27K ❑ 7 ❑ Blank ❑ Blank ❑ Blank ❑ WT ❑ B24

6" High 120V 6" Open 2700 Nominal Vacuum metalized Specular Clear Alzak White Trim Set of two(2) 24"
Output LED ❑ 277V Reflector/ Kelvin 70+ CRI reflector with 45º ❑ SS ❑ CG ❑ TRG bar hangers for T-bar
Housing 277V Light Engine ❑ 35K ❑ 8 cutoff Semi- Champagne Trim Ring ceilings
Assembly 3500 Nominal ❑ SP18 p
Specular Gold Alzak Gasket ❑ B6
HSG OPTION Kelvin 80+ CRI Lensed optic with ❑ MFC ❑ BL (factory Set of two (2) bar
❑ 40K
0 18º spot distribution American Black Alzak installed) hangers for ceiling joist
❑ HDM
Lutron
4000 and Zet painted Matte™ ❑ WE up to 24" centers
Hi-Lume® Kelvin faceplate Wheat Alzak ❑ Signos6
dimming ❑ 50K ❑ MD25 ❑ LW Architectural decorative
to 1%, 5000 Lensed optic Light Wheat trim elements. Refer
3-wire line Kelvin with 25º medium to specification sheets
voltage or Alzak
EcoSystem™
distribution and Zet ❑ PW ARCH-SIG-001–004
digital painted faceplate Pewter Alzak ❑ SCA6
controls ❑ FL35 ❑ WH1 Sloped ceiling adapter
Lensed optic White Paint for 6" housings.
with 35º wide Specify degree of slope
distribution and Zet and type of ceiling.
1
Requires WT option
painted faceplate Slope ceiling adapter
and housing must be
In a continuing effort to offer the best product possible we reserve the right to change, without installed at the same
notice, specifications or materials that in our opinion will not alter the function of the product. time.
A Division of Hubbell Lighting, Inc. Web: www.prescolite.com t Tech Support: (888) 777-4832 ARCH-LED-007
Notes:
P10-68755
Architektū
¯r - 6" D6LED4 Downlight
PHOTOMETRIC DATA
DRIVER DATA D6LED4 D6LED4 277V D6LED4HDM D6LED4277VHDM LUMEN MULTIPLIER
Input Voltage 120V +/- 10% 277V +/- 10% 120V 277V 2700K 3500K 4000K 5000K
Input Frequency 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60Hz 50/60Hz 70+ CRI 1.06 1.13 1.20 1.41
Input Current 0.24A (0.4A max) 0.13A (0.5A max) 0.27A 0.14A 80+ CRI 0.89 Baseline 1.10 1.15
Input Power 28W (34W max) 28.5W (40W max) 33W 35W
Constant Current Output 1400mA 1400mA 1400mA 1400mA Note: Multipliers shown are based on
LED manufacturer data and can be used to
Power Factor ≥0.90 0.78 at 277V >0.90 0.93
approximate the lumen intensity of a fixture with
THD <20% <20% <20% <20% different LED color temperature and/or CRI with
EMI Filtering FCC 47CFR FCC 47CFR FCC 47CFR FCC 47CFR identical optical configuration and reflector finish.
Part 15, Class A Part 15, Class B Part 15, Class A Part 15, Class A For reference only.
Operating Temperature -40ºC to 60ºC -40ºC to 60ºC
Dimming 3 wire line voltage 3 wire line voltage
Over-voltage, over-current, short-circuit protection or EcoSystem to 1% or EcoSystem to 1%
D6LED4-6D9LED435K8
ZONAL LUMEN SUMMARY LUMINANCE DATA IN CANDELA/
LED Light Engine: (10) LED Array Nichia 3500K Mid CRI
ZONE LUMENS %LUMINAIRE SQ. METER
System Wattage: 27.7
Fixture delivered lumens: 1034 Angle in Vertical Average - 0º
0-30 719 69.5
Fixture Efficacy: 37 45° 9067
0-40 928 99.8
Spacing Criteria: 0.9 55° 287
90º 0-60 1029 99.5
65° 0
0-90 1034 100.0
CANDELA DISTRIBUTION 75° 0
90-180 0 0.0
75º DEG CANDELA LUMENS 85° 629
0-180 1034 100.0
400 0 1121
COEFFICIENTS OF UTILIZATION Zonal Cavity Method
5 1047 98
% Effective Floor Cavity Reflectance
60º 15 935 264
Room Cavity
80% 70% 50% 30% 10%

Ratio
25 824 357 20% Effective Floor Cavity Reflectance
800 35 331 209 % Wall Reflectance
45 117 95 70 50 30 10 70 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10
1 113 111 108 106 111 108 106 104 104 102 101 101 99 98 97 96 95
45º 55 3 5 2 108 103 99 95 105 101 97 94 98 95 92 95 92 90 92 90 88
3 102 96 90 86 100 94 89 86 91 88 84 89 86 83 87 84 82
65 0 2
4 97 89 83 79 95 88 83 79 86 81 78 84 80 77 82 79 76
75 0 1 5 92 83 77 73 90 82 77 72 80 76 72 79 75 71 77 74 71
1200 6 87 78 72 67 85 77 71 67 76 70 67 74 70 66 73 69 66
85 1 2 7 82 73 67 63 81 72 67 62 71 66 62 70 65 62 69 65 61
15º 30º 90 0 0 8 78 69 62 58 77 68 62 58 67 62 58 66 61 58 65 61 57
9 74 65 59 54 73 64 58 54 63 58 54 62 57 54 61 57 54
Test No. 2889 10 71 61 55 51 70 61 55 51 60 54 51 59 54 51 58 54 51
Tested at 25ºC Ambient in accordance to IESNA LM-79-2008 D6LED4-6D9LED435K8 Test No. 2889
D6LED4-6D9LED435K8FL35 ZONAL LUMEN SUMMARY LUMINANCE DATA IN CANDELA/

LED Light Engine: (10) LED Array 3500K Mid CRI with Flood Lens SQ. METER
ZONE LUMENS %LUMINAIRE
System Wattage: 27.6 Angle in Vertical Average - 0º
Fixture delivered lumens: 1116 0-30 953 85.4
0-40 1064 95.4
55° 1242
Spacing Criteria: 0.6 0-60 1113 99.7
65° 259
0-90 1116 100.0
90º 75° 212
90-180 0 0.0
85° 0
CANDELA DISTRIBUTION 0-180 1116 100.0
75º DEG CANDELA LUMENS COEFFICIENTS OF UTILIZATION Zonal Cavity Method
800 0 2288 % Effective Floor Cavity Reflectance
Room Cavity
5 2258 212 80% 70% 50% 30% 10%

Ratio
60º 15 1651 451 20% Effective Floor Cavity Reflectance

% Wall Reflectance
25 624 290
70 50 30 10 70 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10
1600 35 171 111 1 114 112 110 108 112 110 108 106 106 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97
2 109 105 102 99 107 104 106 98 100 98 96 97 95 93 95 93 92
45 44 36 3 105 99 95 92 103 98 101 91 95 92 89 93 90 88 91 89 87
45º 55 13 12 4 101 94 89 86 99 93 97 85 91 87 84 89 86 83 87 85 82
5 97 89 84 81 95 89 93 80 87 83 80 85 82 79 84 81 78
65 2 2 6 93 85 80 76 91 84 90 76 83 79 76 82 78 75 80 77 75
75 1 1 7 89 81 76 72 88 81 87 72 79 75 72 78 74 72 77 74 71
2400 8 86 78 73 69 85 77 85 69 76 72 69 75 71 68 74 71 68
85 0 0 9 83 74 69 66 82 74 82 66 73 69 66 72 68 65 71 68 65
15º 30º 90 0 0 10 80 71 66 63 79 71 80 63 70 66 63 69 65 63 69 65 62
D6LED4-6D9LED435K8FL35 Test No. 2768

Test No. 2768
Tested at 25ºC Ambient in accordance to IESNA LM-79-2008 NOTES
Refer to www.prescolite.com for additional photometric tests (IES Files).
Web: www.prescolite.com t Tech Support: (888) 777-4832

.JMMFOOJVN#PVMFWBSEt(SFFOWJMMF 4$64"t Phone (864) 678-1000
Copyright ©2010 Prescolite, Inc., a division of Hubbell Lighting, Inc. All Rights Reserved
Specifications subject to change without notice. t Printed in U.S.A. t ARCH-LED-007 t3/4/10
Notes:
P10-68755
PHOTOMETRIC DATA Architektū

¯r - 6" D6LED4 Downlight
D6LED4-6D9LED435K8MD25 ZONAL LUMEN SUMMARY LUMINANCE DATA IN CANDELA/

LED Light Engine: (10) LED Array 3500K Mid CRI with Medium Lens SQ. METER
0-40 1083 96.0
55° 1242
65° 130
0-90 1128 100.0
90º 75° 0
90-180 0 0.0
85° 0
75º
DEG CANDELA LUMENS
1400 COEFFICIENTS OF UTILIZATION Zonal Cavity Method
0 4067
5 3661 324
Room Cavity
60º 80% 70% 50% 30% 10%
Ratio
25 471 223 % Wall Reflectance
2800 70 50 30 10 70 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10
35 126 82
1 115 112 110 108 112 110 108 107 106 105 100 103 101 100 99 98 98
45º 45 41 32 2 110 106 103 100 108 105 102 99 102 99 195 99 97 95 96 95 93
55 13 12 3 106 101 97 94 104 100 96 93 97 93 90 95 93 90 93 91 89
4 102 97 92 89 101 95 91 88 93 90 86 92 89 86 90 87 85
65 1 0 5 99 92 88 84 97 91 87 84 90 86 83 88 85 83 87 84 82
4200 6 95 89 84 81 94 88 83 80 86 83 79 85 82 79 84 81 79
75 0 0
7 92 85 80 77 91 84 80 77 83 79 76 82 79 76 81 78 76
15º 30º 85 0 0 8 89 82 77 74 88 81 77 74 80 77 73 80 76 73 79 76 73
9 87 79 75 71 86 79 74 71 78 74 71 77 73 71 76 73 71
90 0 0 10 84 76 72 69 83 76 72 69 75 71 69 75 71 69 74 71 68
Test No. 2755
D6LED4-6D9LED435K8MD25 Test No. 2755
Tested at 25ºC Ambient in accordance to IESNA LM-79-2008
D6LED4-6D9LED435K8SP18 ZONAL LUMEN SUMMARY LUMINANCE DATA IN CANDELA/

LED Light Engine: (10) LED Array 3500K Mid CRI with Spot Lens ZONE LUMENS %LUMINAIRE SQ. METER
0-30 1205 94.6
Fixture delivered lumens: 1274 45° 2015
Fixture Efficacy: 46 0-40 1247 97.8
55° 764
65° 259
0-90 1274 100.0
90º 75° 0
85° 0
75º CANDELA DISTRIBUTION

COEFFICIENTS OF UTILIZATION Zonal Cavity Method
4000 DEG CANDELA LUMENS
Room Cavity
0 10676 80% 70% 50% 30% 10%

Ratio
60º 5 7131 585 20% Effective Floor Cavity Reflectance

% Wall Reflectance
15 1516 450
70 50 30 10 70 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10
8000 25 347 171 1 115 113 111 110 113 111 109 108 107 106 105 103 103 102 100 99 99
35 65 41 2 112 108 105 103 110 107 104 102 104 101 100 101 99 98 98 97 96
3 108 104 101 98 107 103 100 97 100 98 96 98 96 94 96 94 93
45º 45 26 19 4 105 100 97 94 104 99 96 93 97 94 92 95 93 91 94 92 90
55 8 7 5 102 97 93 90 101 96 93 90 95 91 89 93 90 88 92 89 88
6 100 94 90 87 99 93 90 87 92 89 86 91 88 86 90 87 85
65 2 1 7 97 91 87 85 96 91 87 84 90 86 84 89 86 84 88 85 83
12000 75 0 0 8 95 89 85 82 94 88 85 82 88 84 82 87 84 82 86 83 81
9 93 87 83 80 92 86 83 80 85 82 80 85 82 80 84 81 80
15º 30º 85 0 0 10 91 85 81 78 90 84 81 78 84 80 78 83 80 78 82 80 78
90 0 0 D6LED4-6D9LED435K8SP18 Test No. 2754

Test No. 2754
Tested at 25ºC Ambient in accordance to IESNA LM-79-2008
NOTES
Refer to www.prescolite.com for additional photometric tests (IES Files).

701 Millennium Blvd., t Greenville, SC 29607 U.S.A. t Phone (864) 678-1000
Copyright ©2010 Prescolite, Inc., a division of Hubbell Lighting, Inc. All Rights Reserved
Specifications subject to change without notice. t Printed in U.S.A. t ARCH-LED-007 t 3/4/10
Job Name: EPC22-224G-DL-LUTRON
NAVFAC Bldg 157 & 210 ECOSYSTEM BALLAST-F5830
Notes:
P10-68755
EPC22-2
2' × 2' High Efficiency, Full Distribution Luminaire / 2 T8, T5, or TT Lamps
PROJECT INFORMATION
Project Name Type
Catalog No. Date
CONSTRUCTION LABELS & ELECTRICAL

FEATURES Luminaire housing, end caps, and reflectors are All luminaires are listed with UL and bear UL
die-formed code-gauge cold-rolled steel. Frameless recessed fixture labels. Approved for CUL.
t 5 5 BOEUXJOUVCFPQUJDBMTZTUFNTBWBJMBCMF optics system hinges from either side for easy access Completely wired with standard class “P”, thermally
t 'VMMEJTUSJCVUJPOQSPWJEFTDPOUSPMMFEIJHIBOHMFMJHIUGPS to lamps and electrical components. Mechanical protected, auto re-setting, HPF, CBM ballast. Sound
visual comfort light trap prevents light leaks. Latches are spring rated A. All ballast leads extend a minimum of 6"
t "EWBODFEPQUJDBMEFTJHOQSPEVDFTIJHIFóDJFODJFT loaded. through the access opening. NEC/CEC-compliant
ballast disconnect is standard except with optional
t &YDMVTJWF5&OFSHZ.BYUVOFECBMMBTUGBDUPSCBMMBTU FINISH emergency battery pack. Damp Label is applied as
t 4UFQEJNNJOHPQUJPOTBWBJMBCMFGPSCPUI5BOE5FYQBOE All visible parts are custom formulated soft, non- standard.
energy savings opportunities glare high-reflectance white powder coat finish,
t -PX8GU2 ratio meets the most restrictive lighting power painted after fabrication. CEILING COMPATIBILITY
density codes Luminaire is available to fit exposed grid ceilings,
SHIELDING or hard ceilings when a flange kit is ordered. Some
t 5ZQJDBMMZRVBMJöFTGPS&1"DUUBYEFEVDUJPOT Three different lens shapes provide a choice of options may increase fixture depth. For information
t 6OJRVFGSBNFMFTTPQUJDTTZTUFNBMMPXTFBTZBDDFTTUPMBNQT fixture aesthetics. Lenses are high transmission on compatibility with specific ceilings, or where
and electrical from below the ceiling extruded acrylic. plenum depth is a problem, contact your Columbia
t 5ISFFMFOTTUZMFTQSPWJEFBFTUIFUJDBMUFSOBUJWFT Lighting representative. Four integral T-bar clips are
t -PXQSPöMFIPVTJOHöUTJOUJHIUQMFOVNTQBDFT INSTALLATION standard.
An access plate is furnished with each recessed
t 1BUFOUQFOEJOH fixture for fast wiring connections without the
necessity to open the fixture or wireway.
ORDERING INFORMATION EXAMPLE EPC22-224G-CV-EPU-F5835

LUTRON ECO
EPC 22 – 2 24 G – DL –
SYSTEM BALLAST U – F5830 –
MODEL NO. OF LAMPS SHIELDING VOLTAGE LAMPS OPTIONS

EPC e∙poc™ Full 2 Two CV Curve Profile 120 120V FO730 30K 70CRI T8 Lamps C3883-Wire Flex
Distribution 277 277V Installed C4884-Wire Flex
Luminaire DL Delta Profile FO735 35K 70CRI T8 Lamps
347 347V1 C5885-Wire Flex
Installed
SH Shield Profile U 120V/277V ELEmergency
FO741 41K 70CRI T8 Lamps Battery Pack
Installed (specify voltage)
LAMP TYPE BALLAST
FO830 30K 80CRI T8 Lamps GLR Fast Blow Fuse
14 2' T5: 14 Watt E Electronic T8, 0.88 Ballast Factor, Instant Start Installed
17 2' T8: 17 Watt ED Electronic T8, T5 Dimming, Programmed Start1 GMF Slow Blow Fuse
FO835 35K 80CRI T8 Lamps
24 2' T5HO: 24 Watt ESD Electronic T8, 0.88 Ballast Factor, Step Installed CSA UL listed or CSA
Dimming, Programmed Start certified for
40TT 40 Watt Twin Tube FO841 41K 80CRI T8 Lamps Canada
Compact, 2G11 Base ELW Electronic T8, 0.77 Ballast Factor, Low Installed
Wattage, Instant Start F5830 30K 80CRI T5 or T5HO Lamps
EHL Electronic T8, 1.18 Ballast Factor, High Installed
SIZE CEILING TYPE Wattage, Instant Start F5835 35K 80CRI T5 or T5HO Lamps ACCESSORIES
22 2' × 2' G Grid E104 Electronic T8, 1.04 Ballast Factor, Instant Start Installed FK22 2' × 2' Single
SM Surface Mount ESD104 Electronic T8, 1.04 Ballast Factor, Step F5841 41K 80CRI T5 or T5HO Lamps Flange Kit
Dimming, Programmed Start Installed FKCR Flange Kit Row
For hard ceilings use
flange kit. EP Electronic T5, T5HO, 1.0 Ballast Factor or T8, FTT830 30K Twin Tube Lamps Adaptor
0.88 Ballast Factor, Programmed Start Installed
EP95 Electronic T5, 0.95 Ballast Factor, Programmed FTT835 35K Twin Tube Lamps
Start Installed
ESD95 Electronic T5, 0.95 Ballast Factor, Step FTT841 41K Twin Tube Lamps
Dimming, Programmed Start Installed
Damp Label - standard EP115 Electronic T5, 1.15 Ballast Factor, Programmed
1
Where available.
Start
ESD115 Electronic T5, 1.15 Ballast Factor, Step
Dimming, Programmed Start
LUTRON ECO SYSTEM
ETT Electronic Twin Tube, Instant Start (specify
voltage) BALLAST
EPTT Electronic Twin Tube, Programmed Start
Page 1/2 Rev. 08/12/08 RECESSED/ARCHITECTURAL / EPC22-2
© 2008 Columbia Lighting, a division of Hubbell Lighting, Inc. Specifications subject to change without notice.
701 Millennium Blvd. Greenville, SC 29607 / Tel 864.678.1000 / Tech Support 864.678.1668 / Website www.columbialighting.com
Notes:
P10-68755
EPC22-2
2' × 2' High Efficiency, Full Distribution Luminaire / 2 T8, T5, or TT Lamps
PHOTOMETRIC DATA Test 15106 Test Date 8/7/08
LUMINAIRE DATA AVG. LUMINANCE (Candela/Sq. M.) COEFFICIENTS OF UTILIZATION (%) INDOOR CANDELA PLOT
90
Luminaire EPC22-224G-DL-EP 0.0 22.5 45.0 67.5 90.0 RC 80 70 50 0
EPOC Troffer 0 2726 2726 2726 2726 2726 RW 70 50 30 10 70 50 30 10 50 30 10 0
Recessed 2 × 2
Average Luminance Angle

30 2676 2717 2806 2876 2899 1 83 80 76 73 81 78 75 72 74 72 70 64
2-lamp with two 40 2627 2694 2824 2945 2987 2 75 69 63 59 73 67 62 58 65 60 57 53 75
opal delta lenses
45 2586 2668 2827 2991 3050 3 69 60 54 48 67 59 53 48 57 51 47 44
Ballast ICN-2S24
50 2540 2635 2835 3055 3155 4 63 53 46 41 61 52 45 40 50 44 40 37 450
Ballast Factor 1.00
55 2482 2589 2858 3200 3334 5 57 47 40 35 56 46 40 35 45 39 34 32
RCR
60
Lamp F24T5HO 6 53 42 35 30 51 42 35 30 40 34 30 28
60 2398 2539 2918 3323 3368
Lumens per 1750 65 2289 2487 3050 3217 3187 7 49 38 31 27 48 38 31 26 36 31 26 24
Lamp
70 2124 2425 2960 2894 2801 8 45 35 28 24 44 34 28 23 33 27 23 22
Watts 52
75 1900 2434 2670 2434 2335 9 42 32 25 21 41 31 25 21 31 25 21 19
Mounting Recessed 900
80 1629 2277 2166 1944 1832 10 40 29 23 19 39 29 23 19 28 23 19 17 0 15 30 45
Shielding Angle 0° = 90 90° = 90
85 1217 1696 1438 1143 1033 RCR = Room Cavity Ratio Horiz 0-180
Spacing 0° = 1.26 90° = 1.36 0.0 45.0 90.0
Criterion RC = Effective Ceiling Cavity Reflectance RW = Wall Reflectance
Luminous Length: 1.83
Opening in Feet Width: 1.83 ZONAL LUMEN SUMMARY ENERGY DATA
Height: 0.00 Zone Lumens Lamp Fixt. Total Luminaire Efficiency 76.9%
0-30 677 19.3 25.2 Luminaire Efficacy Rating (LER) 52
0-40 1125 32.1 41.8 IESNA RP-1-1993 Compliance Non-Compliant
0-60 2065 59.0 76.8 ANSI/IESNA RP-1-2004 Compliance Non-Compliant
0-90 2690 76.9 100.0 Comparative Yearly Lighting Energy $4.62 based on 3000
0-180 2690 76.9 100.0 Cost per 1000 Lumens hrs. and $0.08 per KWH
Test 15109 Test Date 8/8/08

LUMINAIRE DATA AVG. LUMINANCE (Candela/Sq. M.) COEFFICIENTS OF UTILIZATION (%) INDOOR CANDELA PLOT
90
Luminaire EPC22-217G-DL-E104U 0.0 22.5 45.0 67.5 90.0 RC 80 70 50 0
EPOC Troffer 0 2086 2086 2086 2086 2086 RW 70 50 30 10 70 50 30 10 50 30 10 0
Recessed 2 × 2
Average Luminance Angle
30 2038 2075 2141 2201 2219 1 81 77 74 71 79 75 72 70 72 70 67 62

2-lamp with two opal 40 1997 2048 2152 2253 2287 2 73 67 61 57 71 65 60 56 63 59 55 51 75
delta lenses
45 1968 2027 2155 2286 2336 3 66 58 52 47 64 57 51 47 55 50 46 42
Ballast B232IUNV104-A
50 1930 2005 2160 2335 2415 4 61 51 45 40 59 50 44 39 48 43 39 36 350
Ballast Factor 1.04
55 1883 1973 2169 2432 2544 5 56 46 39 34 54 45 38 34 43 38 33 31
RCR
60
Lamp F17T8 6 51 41 34 29 50 40 34 29 39 33 29 27
60 1826 1929 2211 2513 2552
Lumens per 1375 65 1742 1894 2289 2396 2373 7 47 37 30 26 46 36 30 26 35 30 25 24
Lamp
70 1635 1842 2199 2133 2058 8 44 34 27 23 43 33 27 23 32 27 23 21
Watts 36
75 1478 1838 1950 1763 1701 9 41 31 25 21 40 30 25 20 30 24 20 19
Mounting Recessed 700
80 1277 1703 1573 1407 1333 10 39 29 23 19 38 28 22 18 27 22 18 17 0 15 30 45
Shielding Angle 0° = 90 90° = 90
85 996 1254 1033 811 738 RCR = Room Cavity Ratio Horiz 0-180
Spacing 0° = 1.25 90° = 1.36 0.0 45.0 90.0
Criterion RC = Effective Ceiling Cavity Reflectance RW = Wall Reflectance
Luminous Length: 1.83
Opening in Feet Width: 1.83 ZONAL LUMEN SUMMARY ENERGY DATA
Height: 0.00 Zone Lumens Lamp Fixt. Total Luminaire Efficiency 74.3%
0-30 517 18.8 25.3 Luminaire Efficacy Rating (LER) 59
0-40 859 31.2 42.1 IESNA RP-1-2004 Compliance Non-Compliant
0-60 1575 57.3 77.1 Comparative Yearly Lighting $4.07 based on 3000
0-90 2043 74.3 100.0 Energy Cost per 1000 Lumens hrs. and $0.08 per KWH
0-180 2043 74.3 100.0
DIMENSIONAL DATA CEILING COMPATIBILITY

Type G FKCR
33/8"
24"
Side End
For lay-in installation in exposed grid

ceilings. Maximum tee widths of 1" and
maximum tee heights of 2" allowed.
24"
FK22 Flange Kit For flanged fixtures in row configurations, the FKCR adapter bracket
kit is required in addition to the FK22 kit. Order one less FKCR than
the total number of fixtures in row. (Example: Row of two, order (2)
FK22 & (1) FKCR)
Row cut out dimensions using FK22s & FKCR adapters:

24" Side End Width 243/8", Length [24" × (# in row)] + 3/8".
Example: (24" × 2) + 3/8" = 483/8"
NOTE: All dimensions are in inches; dimensions and For hard ceiling applications, order FK22
specifications are subject to change without flange kit. Flange kit wires directly into Flange kit cut out dimension for single unit only: 243/8" × 243/8"
notice. Please consult factory or check sample concealed ceiling opening for a clean,
for verification. finished appearance.
Page 2/2 Rev. 08/12/08 RECESSED/ARCHITECTURAL / EPC22-2
© 2008 Columbia Lighting, a division of Hubbell Lighting, Inc. Specifications subject to change without notice.
701 Millennium Blvd. Greenville, SC 29607 / Tel 864.678.1000 / Tech Support 864.678.1668 / Website www.columbialighting.com
Notes:
P10-68755
EcoSystem® Five Control Input Digital Dimming Ballasts

EcoSystem Ballasts 1 11.03.08
EcoSystem Multiple Control Input

Ballasts
Digital electronic dimming ballasts maximize the

benefits of a lighting management system. EcoSystem
Ballasts offer 100% to 10% dimming; ideal for use
where saving energy, increasing flexibility, and
maximizing productivity are the goals of the lighting EcoSystem case type G
design.
Features
• Continuous, flicker-free dimming from 100% to 10%
• Provides power for and responds to one occupancy
EcoSystem case type J
sensor, one photo sensor, and one personal control
input (infrared receiver or wallstation)
• Communicates status and sensor inputs over the
EcoSystem Bus
• Programmed rapid start design ensures full rated
lamp life while dimming and cycling
• Lamps turn on to any dimmed level without flashing to
full brightness
• Low harmonic distortion throughout the entire
dimming range
• Frequency of operation ensures that ballast does not
interfere with infrared devices
• End-of-lamp-life protection circuitry ensures safe
operation throughout entire lamp life
• Ultra-quiet operation
• Nonvolatile memory restores all ballast settings after
power failure
• Ballasts maintain consistent light output for linear
lamp lengths (i.e. 4 ft., 3 ft., 2 ft. have same relative
output)
• 100% performance tested at factory
® S P E C I F I C AT I O N S U B M I T TA L Page
Job Name: Model Numbers:
Job Number:
Notes:
P10-68755

Specifications Environment
• Minimum lamp starting temperature: 50 °F (10 °C)
Standards • Relative humidity: less than 90% non-condensing
• California Energy Commission Listed • Sound Rating: inaudible in a 27 dB ambient
• UL Listed (evaluated to the requirements of UL935) • Maximum ballast case temperature: 75 °C (167 °F)
• CSA certified (evaluated to the requirements of
C22.2 No. 74) Ballast Wiring & Mounting
• NOM Listed for 32 W T8 Ballasts • Ballast is grounded by a mounting screw to the
• S Mark Certified fixture
• Class P thermally protected • Terminal blocks on the ballast accept the following
• Meets ANSI C82.11 High Frequency Ballast Standard wire gauges:
• Meets FCC Part 18 Non-Consumer requirements for Power Wiring, Lamp Wiring, and EcoSystem Bus:
EMI/RFI emissions only one #18 AWG solid per terminal
• Meets ANSI C62.41 Category A surge protection Class 2 Sensors:
standards up to and including 4 kV only one #22 AWG solid per terminal
• Manufacturing facilities employ ESD reduction • Only one wire per terminal
practices that comply with the requirements of • Class 2 sensor wiring must be separated from all
ANSI/ESD S20.20 power and Class 1 wiring, consult all applicable
• Lutron Quality Systems registered to ISO 9001.2000 local and national codes
• Ballast mounts using two screws (or sheet metal
Performance feature and one screw) within a fluorescent fixture
• Operating Voltage: 120, 220/240, 277 V at 50 or • Wiring from the ballast to lamp sockets shall not
60 Hz exceed 7 ft. for T8, T5, and T5HO lamps
• Grounding: ballast and fixture must be grounded for • Wiring from the ballast to lamps sockets shall not
proper dimming exceed 3 ft. for T5 Twin Tube lamps
• Dimming Range: 100% to 10% measured relative
light output Lamp Seasoning
• Lamp Starting: programmed rapid start Refer to lamp manufacturer for lamp seasoning
• Lamp Current Crest Factor: less than 1.7 requirements prior to dimming
• Light Output Variation: Constant ±2% light output for
line voltage variations of ±10%
• Lamp Life: Average lamp life meets or exceeds
specified lamp ratings
• Power Factor: 0.95 minimum
• Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): Less than 20%
• Inaudible in a 27 dBA ambient
• Maximum Inrush Current: 3 A per ballast at 277 V ,
7A per ballast at 120 V
• Class 2 Output: +20 V , 50mA maximum (one
daylight sensor, one keypad and one occupancy
sensor can be connected)
Job Number:
Notes:
P10-68755

EcoSystem Ballasts for linear and U bend T8 Lamps
Lamp No. of Model Case Input Input Input Ballast System System Ballast Relative
Lamps Size Voltage Current Power Factor Lumens Efficacy Efficacy Efficacy
(VAC) (A) (W) (BF) (lm) (lm/W) Factor (RSE)
F32T8 3 EC5 T832 G UNV 3L G 277 0.31 86.5 0.85 7650 88 0.98 0.94
(48 in.) 240 0.35 84.0 0.85 7650 89 1.01 0.97
120 0.72 85.9 0.85 7650 89 0.99 0.95
EC5 T832 G UNV 317L G 277 0.41 105.7 1.17 10,530 100 1.11 1.06
240 0.47 106.5 1.17 10,530 99 1.10 1.05
120 0.95 106.8 1.17 10,530 99 1.10 1.05
2 EC5 T832 G UNV 2L G 277 0.22 59.6 0.85 5100 86 1.43 0.91
240 0.25 57.6 0.85 5100 89 1.48 0.94
120 0.49 58.8 0.85 5100 87 1.45 0.93
EC5 T832 J UNV 2 J 277 0.21 57.4 0.85 5100 89 1.48 0.95
240 0.25 59.0 0.85 5100 86 1.44 0.92
120 0.49 59.1 0.85 5100 86 1.44 0.92
1 EC5 T832 J UNV 1 J 277 0.12 31.6 0.85 2550 81 2.69 0.86
240 0.13 31.0 0.85 2550 82 2.74 0.87
120 0.26 31.3 0.85 2550 81 2.72 0.87
F25T8 2 EC5 T825 J UNV 2 J 277 0.18 48.9 0.85 3665 75 1.74 0.87
(36 in.) 240 0.20 49.0 0.85 3665 75 1.73 0.87
120 0.41 49.0 0.85 3665 75 1.73 0.87
1 EC5 T825 J UNV 1 J 277 0.10 27.6 0.85 1828 66 3.08 0.77
240 0.11 27.0 0.85 1828 68 3.15 0.79
120 0.23 26.9 0.85 1828 68 3.16 0.79
F17T8 2 EC5 T817 J UNV 2 J 277 0.13 36.2 0.85 2380 66 2.35 0.80
(24 in.) 240 0.15 37.0 0.85 2380 64 2.30 0.78
120 0.31 37.0 0.85 2380 64 2.30 0.78
1 EC5 T817 J UNV 1 J 277 0.08 20.6 0.85 1190 68 4.13 0.70
240 0.09 20.0 0.85 1190 60 4.25 0.72
120 0.17 20.1 0.85 1190 70 4.23 0.72
Job Number:
Notes:
P10-68755

EcoSystem Ballasts for linear T5 Lamps
Size Voltage Current Power Factor Lumens Efficacy Efficacy Efficacy
F35T5 1 EC5 T535 J UNV 1 J 277 0.15 42.0 1.0 3650 87 2.38 0.83
(57.1 in.) 240 0.18 42.3 1.0 3650 87 2.38 0.83
120 0.35 42.2 1.0 3650 87 2.38 0.83
F28T5 2 EC5 T528 J UNV 2 J 277 0.23 64.5 1.0 5800 90 1.55 0.87
(45.2 in.) 240 0.27 65.0 1.0 5800 89 1.54 0.86
120 0.54 65.2 1.0 5800 89 1.53 0.86
1 EC5 T528 J UNV 1 J 277 0.12 32.6 1.0 2900 89 3.07 0.86
240 0.14 32.9 1.0 2900 88 3.04 0.85
120 0.27 32.9 1.0 2900 88 3.04 0.85
F21T5 2 EC5 T521 J UNV 2 J 277 0.17 46.0 1.0 4200 91 2.17 0.91
(33.4 in.) 240 0.20 47.2 1.0 4200 89 2.12 0.89
120 0.39 47.2 1.0 4200 89 2.12 0.89
1 EC5 T521 J UNV 1 J 277 0.09 25.8 1.0 2100 81 3.88 0.81
240 0.11 25.8 1.0 2100 81 3.88 0.81
120 0.22 25.8 1.0 2100 81 3.88 0.81
F14T5 2 EC5 T514 J UNV 2 J 277 0.12 32.8 1.0 2700 82 3.05 0.85
(21.6 in.) 240 0.14 33.3 1.0 2700 81 3.00 0.85
120 0.28 33.3 1.0 2700 81 3.00 0.85
1 EC5 T514 J UNV 1 J 277 0.07 19.0 1.0 1350 71 5.26 0.74
240 0.08 19.2 1.0 1350 70 5.21 0.74
120 0.16 19.2 1.0 1350 70 5.21 0.74
Job Number:
Notes:
P10-68755

EcoSystem Ballasts for linear T5 HO Lamps
F54T5 2 EC5 T554 J UNV 2 J 277 0.40 110.1 1.0 10,000 91 0.91 0.98
(45.2 in.) 240 0.50 119.0 1.0 10,000 84 0.84 0.91
120 0.99 119.3 1.0 10,000 84 0.84 0.91
1 EC5 T554 J UNV 1 J 277 0.21 56.5 1.0 5000 88 1.77 0.96
240 0.24 58.0 1.0 5000 86 1.73 0.93
120 0.48 57.9 1.0 5000 86 1.73 0.93
F39T5 2 EC5 T539 J UNV 2 J 277 0.30 83.0 1.0 7000 84 1.20 0.94
(33.4 in.) 240 0.35 84.0 1.0 7000 83 1.19 0.93
120 0.70 84.3 1.0 7000 83 1.19 0.93
1 EC5 T539 J UNV 1 J 277 0.16 43.3 1.0 3500 81 2.31 0.90
240 0.18 44.0 1.0 3500 80 2.27 0.89
120 0.37 44.0 1.0 3500 80 2.27 0.89
F24T5 2 EC5 T524 J UNV 2 J 277 0.20 54.8 1.0 4000 73 1.82 0.89
(21.6 in.) 240 0.23 54.0 1.0 4000 74 1.85 0.89
120 0.45 53.9 1.0 4000 74 1.86 0.89
1 EC5 T524 J UNV 1 J 277 0.11 30.0 1.0 2000 67 3.33 0.80
240 0.12 28.8 1.0 2000 69 3.47 0.83
120 0.24 28.8 1.0 2000 69 3.47 0.83
Job Number:
Notes:
P10-68755

EcoSystem Ballasts for T5 Twin Tube Lamps
FT55 2 EC5 T555 J UNV 2 J 277 0.40 110.8 0.9 8640 78 0.81 0.99
(20.7 in.) 240 0.46 110.4 0.9 8640 78 0.82 0.90
120 0.92 110.4 0.9 8640 78 0.82 0.90
1 EC5 T555 J UNV 1 J 277 0.20 55.4 0.9 4320 70 1.62 0.89
240 0.23 55.2 0.9 4320 70 1.63 0.90
120 0.46 55.2 0.9 4320 70 1.63 0.90
FT50 2 EC5 T550 J UNV 2 J 277 0.36 99.7 1.0 8000 80 1.00 1.00
(22.5 in.) 240 0.42 100.8 1.0 8000 79 0.99 0.99
120 0.84 100.8 1.0 8000 79 0.99 0.99
1 EC5 T550 J UNV 1 J 277 0.20 55.4 1.0 4000 72 1.81 0.90
240 0.23 54.0 1.0 4000 72 1.85 0.93
120 0.45 54.0 1.0 4000 74 1.85 0.93
FT40 2 EC5 T540 J UNV 2 J 277 0.27 74.8 1.0 6200 83 1.34 1.07
(22.5 in.) 240 0.32 76.8 1.0 6200 81 1.30 1.04
120 0.64 76.8 1.0 6200 81 1.30 1.04
1 EC5 T540 J UNV 1 J 277 0.16 44.3 1.0 3100 70 2.26 0.90
240 0.18 43.2 1.0 3100 72 2.31 0.93
120 0.36 43.2 1.0 3100 72 2.31 0.93
FT39 2 EC5 T536 J UNV 2 J 277 0.26 72.0 1.0 5700 79 1.39 1.00
FT36 240 0.31 73.2 1.0 5700 78 1.37 0.98
(15.5 in.) 120 0.61 73.2 1.0 5700 78 1.37 0.98
1 EC5 T536 J UNV 1 J 277 0.14 38.8 1.0 2850 74 2.57 0.93
240 0.17 39.6 1.0 2850 72 2.53 0.91
120 0.33 39.6 1.0 2850 72 2.53 0.91
Job Number:
Notes:
P10-68755

EcoSystem Ballast Case Dimensions
G Case
A
B
C D
E
G Case Dimensions
A = 9.5 in. (241 mm)
B = 8.9 in. (226 mm)
C = 7.1 in. (180 mm)
D = 1.0 in. (25 mm)
E = 2.38 in. (60 mm)
G case ballasts ship with 36 in. leads for lamp connections

and 18 in. leads for Hot, Neutral, E1 and E2 connections
J Case
A
B
C D
E
J Case Dimensions
A = 18.0 in. (457 mm)
B = 17.68 in. (449 mm) F
C = 6.82 in. (173 mm)
D = .394 in. (10 mm)
E = 1.0 in. (25 mm)
F = 1.18 in. (30 mm)
Job Number:
Notes:
P10-68755

EcoSystem Ballast Wiring Diagrams - T8, T5, T5 HO
Wiring to One Lamp (J case shown)

Blue
BLU
BLU
Red
RED
RED
Wiring to Two Lamps (J case shown)

Blue
BLU
BLU
YEL Yellow
YEL
RED
RED Red
Wiring to Two Lamps (G case shown)

Blue
BLU
BLU
YEL
YEL
Yellow
N/C
N/C
Red
RED
RED
Wiring to Three Lamps (G case shown)

Blue
BLU
BLU
YEL
YEL
Yellow
Striped
B/W
B/W
Red
RED
RED
NOTICE
• Maximum ballast to lamp socket lead length is 7 ft. (2 m)
• Wire colors shown are labeled on the ballast, but may vary depending upon fixture construction
Job Number:
Notes:
P10-68755

EcoSystem Ballast Wiring Diagrams - T5 Twin-Tube
Wiring to One Lamp
BLU
BLU Blue
Red
RED
RED
Wiring to Two Lamps

Blue
BLU
BLU
Yellow
YEL
YEL
Red
RED
RED
NOTICE
Job Number:
Notes:
P10-68755

EcoSystem Ballast Wiring:

EcoSystem Bus
EcoSystem Bus Overview

• The EcoSystem Bus wiring (E1 and E2) connects NEU
277 V~
DH
the digital ballasts together to form a lighting control HOT
system
Class 2
E1
Bus
• Each EcoSystem Bus supports up to 64 digital E2
ballasts, 32 occupant sensors, 8 daylight sensors, Ballast Terminals

and 64 wallstations or IR receivers
• E1 and E2 (EcoSystem bus wires) are polarity
insensitive and can be wired in any topology
• An EcoSystem Bus Supply provides power for the
EcoSystem Bus and supports system programming
• All EcoSystem Bus programming is completed by
NEU
using the EcoSystem Programmer
277 V~
DH
HOT
EcoSystem Bus Wiring
Class 2
E1
Bus
E2
• Ballast EcoSystem Bus terminals only accept one
#18 AWG solid wire Ballast Terminals
• Make sure that the supply breaker to the Digital Ballast To the EcoSystem
and EcoSystem Bus Supply is OFF when wiring Bus Supply & up
• Connect the two conductors to the two Digital Ballast to 64 total ballasts
terminals E1 and E2 as shown
• Using two different colors for E1 and E2 will reduce
confusion when wiring several ballasts together
• The EcoSystem bus may be wired Class 1 or Class 2.
Consult applicable electrical codes for proper wiring
practices
Notes
• The EcoSystem Bus Supply does not have to be
located at the end of the Digital Loop
• E1 and E2 wires are not polarity sensitive
• EcoSystem Bus length is limited by the wire gauge
used for E1 and E2 as follows:
Wire Gauge Bus Length (max)

#12 AWG 2200 ft. (670 m)
#14 AWG 1400 ft. (427 m)
#16 AWG 900 ft. (274 m)
Job Number:
Notes:
P10-68755

EcoSystem Ballast Wiring: Fixture Manufacturers:

Class 2 Sensors • UL 1598 6.17.1 allows:
Factory installed power limited wiring and branch
Electrical Contractors and Engineers: circuit wiring that come in random contact within
the luminaire shall have insulation rated for the
• Always follow applicable national and local electrical
maximum voltage that exists in any of the circuits.
code requirements when connecting circuits to
(EcoSystem ballast circuits require minimum 600 V
EcoSystem devices
insulated wire)
• All field installed Class 2 wiring must be separated
• UL 1598 6.17.2.1 requires:
from line voltage wiring by at least 0.25 in. (6.4 mm)
Luminaires designed for the field installation of
• Some local electrical codes require Class 2 wiring to
power limited circuits shall be provided with a
be separately routed in a metal conduit
means of segregating or separating the field-installed
• Ballasts Class 2 Sensor terminals only accept
power limited circuit wiring from the branch circuit
#22 AWG solid conductors
wiring within the luminaire (see UL 1598 6.17 for
Lutron Requires: details)
• Keep class 1 and class 2 wiring separate. Lutron Requires:

• Where separation is not possible, use a 600 V
• Keep class 1 and class 2 wiring separate
insulated cable with an internal shield. Connect the
shield to ground to provide better noise immunity for
low voltage circuits
• Refer to Application note #142 for additional
information
Job Number:
Notes:
P10-68755


Daylight Sensor
Wiring to a Daylight Sensor G Case Terminals

• Sensor wiring summary:
277 Volt
NEU
DH
SH
Sensor Wire Ballast Terminal Terminal Color
Bus
Class 2
E1
Red +20 V Red E2
Black Common Black
Class 2 (#22 AWG Solid)

White IR White +20V
Yellow Daylight Yellow Common

IR
Occ
Daylight
• Make sure that the supply breaker to the Digital
Ballast is OFF when wiring. #22 AWG solid only
• Connect the four conductors to the four Digital
Ballast terminals as shown.
• Daylight sensor must be placed within 50 ft. (15 m) Daylight Sensor
of the ballast.
• Ballast Class 2 terminals only accept one #22 AWG
solid wire.
Notes Class 2
(#22 AWG Solid)
J Case Terminals
Common
• Consult the daylight sensor specification sheet to
Daylight
+20V
Occ
properly locate the sensor.
IR
• Do not place the sensor above pendant fixtures,
directly below lighting fixtures, or within skylight
wells.
• When wiring both a wallstation and daylight sensor
to one ballast, only connect the IR wire (white) from
the keypad, cap off the white wire from the daylight
sensor.
#22 AWG solid only
• All sensor and wallstation wiring is Class 2. Follow all
applicable national and local codes for proper circuit
separation and protection. Daylight Sensor
Job Number:
Notes:
P10-68755


Occupancy Sensor
G Case Terminals
Wiring to a Lutron Occupant Sensor (LOS-XX)
277 Volt
• Sensor wiring summary: NEU
DH
SH
Bus
Class 2
E1
E2
Red +20 V Red
Black Common Black

+20V
Blue Occ Blue Common
IR
Occ
Daylight
Ballast is OFF when wiring #22 AWG solid only
• Connect the three conductors to the three ballast
terminals as shown Occupant
• Occupant sensor must be placed within 50 ft. (15 m) Sensor
of the ballast
solid wire
Notes
Class 2
• Occupant sensors from other manufacturers may be J Case Terminals

(#22 AWG Solid)
Common
Daylight
used with EcoSystem ballasts if the sensor meets
+20V
Occ
IR
the following criteria:
Vin = +20 V , current draw less than 35 mA
• If other manufacturer’s occupant sensors are used
terminal colors and sensor wire colors may not
match
applicable national and local codes for proper circuit #22 AWG solid only
separation and protection. Occupant
Sensor
Job Number:
Notes:
P10-68755

EcoSystem Ballast Wiring Diagrams

(continued) G Case Terminals
Wiring to an IR Receiver and Wallstation
277 Volt
NEU
DH
SH
• Wiring summary:
Bus
Class 2
E1
E2

+20V
Red +20 V Red
Common
Black Common Black IR
Occ
White IR White Daylight
• Make sure that the supply breaker to the Digital #22 AWG solid only
Ballast is OFF when wiring
• Connect the three conductors to the three Digital
Ballast terminals as shown IR Receiver
• Receiver must be placed within 50 ft. (15 m) of the
ballast
solid wire J Case Terminals
Class 2
(#22 AWG Solid)
Common
Daylight
+20V
Occ
IR
Notes
• Only one wallstation or IR receiver can be wired to a
digital ballast
• If a daylight sensor and wallstation/IR receiver are
connected to one ballast, do not connect the
daylight sensor’s IR output
separation and protection.
IR Receiver
Wires to Digital Ballast
Wallstation
Job Number:
Notes:
P10-68755


Multiple Devices
Multiple Sensors with One Ballast

• EcoSystem ballasts accept wiring for one daylight Class 2
J Case Terminals (#22 AWG Solid)
Common
sensor input, one occupant sensor input and one IR
Daylight
+20V
Occ
input (wallstation or IR receiver)
IR
• EcoSystem daylight sensors have IR outputs that
allow the device to operate as a programming port.
In applications where a daylight sensor and
wallstation are wired to the same ballast, do not
connect the white wire of the daylight sensor to
the ballast. The wallstation operates as the
programming port through its integral IR receiver
• Use the chart below as a guide for wiring multiple
devices to a ballast
How to Use the Chart

Connect a senor to a ballast from the “Devices” column (in bold). Along
the selected device row, are “Y’s” and “N’s”. Where a “Y” is placed, the
device at the top of that column can also be connected to the same
ballast. An “N” indicates no connection allowed.
Devices Daylight Occupant Wallstation Daylight
sensor sensor or Sensor
(with IR) IR receiver (no IR)
Daylight sensor
(with IR) Y N N
Occupant
sensor Y Y Y
Wallstation or
IR Receiver N Y Y
Daylight sensor
(no IR) N Y Y
Example: When a Daylight Sensor with its internal IR are connected to
a ballast, then only an occupancy sensor can be added for the system
to properly function.
Job Number:
Notes:
P10-68755


Line Voltage Dimmers
EcoSystem Ballasts and 3-wire dimmers NEU
277 V~
DH
• Lutron 3-wire dimmers only control the ballast they HOT
are wired to; EcoSystem does not support grouping
Class 2
E1
Bus
E2
Orange
of 3-wire control input.
White
Black
Hot / Black
3-Wire Control Wiring
• Make sure that the supply breaker to the Digital Neutral
Ballast is OFF when wiring. White
NEU
277 V~
• Wire as shown DH
HOT
Yellow
Class 2
Line input Connects to E1
Bus
E2
Hot Dimmer Black Wire

Neutral Dimmer White Wire
LUTRON
Red
Dimmer wire Connects to

Yellow Ballast Orange (DH)
Red Ballast Black (HOT) Green
White Ballast White (NEU)
3-Wire Dimmer
Green Earth Ground
Ground
• EcoSystem ballast line voltage and 3-wire input

terminals only accept one #18 AWG solid wire. Notice
3-Wire control turns off digital ballasts when the
Emergency and 3-wire control is in the off position. The digital ballast
• EcoSystem ballasts controlled by a wallbox dimmer inputs: daylight sensor, wallstation, occupant sensor,
should not be used for emergency/egress lighting and IR receiver will not function when the digital
unless an external emergency ballast is used in the ballast is turned off
fixture. See Lutron Ap. Note #50.
• EcoSystem ballasts may be used for emergency/
egress lighting when controlled by a Lutron dimming
panel (GP); where the panel is a dedicated
emergency panel.
Job Number:
Notes:
P10-68755

Attention Electricians and

Fixture Manufacturers
Ballast/Socket Leads Lamp Seasoning

Lead lengths from ballast to socket must not exceed Consult lamp manufacturer’s recommendations on
7 ft. (2 m) for linear lamps (T5, T5HO, T8). Lead lamp seasoning prior to dimming
lengths must not exceed 3 ft. for T5 twin tube
lamps. Further Information
For further information please visit
Lamp Sockets
www.lutron.com/ecosystem or contact our 24-hour
Lamp sockets as per IEC 60400 are required to Technical Support Center at 1-800-523-9466
ensure positive lamp-pin to socket contact.
Mounting for T5 and T5HO Lamps

Mount lamps 3/8 in. ± 1/8 in. away from the
grounded metal surface.
Mounting for T8 & T5 Twin Tube Lamps

Having a lamp too close to the grounded metal will
reduce lamp life. Having a fluorescent lamp too far
away from the grounded metal will make the lamp
flicker or not turn on at all.
Job Number:
Job Name: PLK-12-2T5-CM48-OA-LUTRON
NAVFAC Bldg 157 & 210 ECOSYSTEM BALLAST-MW-SGL-F5835
Notes:
P10-68755
GCB:89C<DFLEK
(#)#fi*K/#K,#fiK,?FCXdgj#;ì\Zk$@e[ì\Zk;`jki`Ylk`fe
GIFA<:K@E=FID8K@FE
Project Name Type
Catalog No. Date
:FEJKIL:K@FE ;@JKI@9LK@FE
Plank is constructed of a heavy 20-gauge steel The standard distribution for Plank has
body with a 9 7⁄8" wide by 2" high profile in hous- approximately 20-30% down light. Optical covers
ing lengths of 4', 8', or 12' lengths. Fixtures are can be used to customize the distribution. Our
available with up to three T8, T5, or T5HO lamps in (CLC) Center Lamp Cover may be selected as an
cross section. An optional perforated pattern on option to direct 100% of the center lamp light
either side of the shielding may be ordered (see down. This is ideal for use with multi-purpose
ordering information below). Modular mounting applications such as classrooms.
=<8KLI<J points maintain convenient, predictable locations.
s 2ECTILINEARSHAPEWITHCLEANELEGANTLINES The exact shape of the housing is maintained by DFLEK@E>
s (EAVY GAUGECONSTRUCTIONPROVIDESEXCELLENT the use of a patented inner die-cast plate at each Plank is designed for ceiling suspension with an
HOUSINGRIGIDITYPATENTEDDIE CASTALUMINUM fixture end (patent 6,796,676 B2) throughout the aircraft cable mechanism. To maintain consistent,
JOINERSENSUREEXCELLENTROWINTEGRITY run to prevent snaking. The housing is designed predictable mounting points, fixtures use an aircraft
s ,OWPROlLEHOUSINGISONLYDEEPANDvWIDE to wrap around the plate and secures on top with cable yoke mounting mechanism from two points
s /NETWOORTHREE44OR4(/LAMPSINCROSS concealed screws to ensure housing tolerances at each hanging location. An adjustable aircraft
SECTION are consistent. cable of varying lengths is supplied (see ordering
s 7IDESELECTIONOFmUSHORREGRESSEDSHIELDING information below). The end of the cable barrel
BAFmESANDLOUVER =@E@J? screws into a standard 1⁄4 20 bolt brought down
s /PTIONALPERFORATEDHOUSINGSUPPLIESPERFORATED Housing and all painted parts are treated with a from the ceiling. Cover plates are provided to shield
SLOTTEDORPATTERNEDSTRIPSONEITHERSIDEOF multi-stage phosphate prior to finish. Parts are the ceiling cutout. A straight (standard) or optional
SHIELDINGFORADDEDVISUALINTEREST then finished with a white powder coat for maxi- coiled cord is available for feed locations as is a
s )NTEGRALBALLASTREMOTEBALLASTINGNOTREQUIRED mum consistent coverage and longevity. Other feed canopy. All fixtures are suspended in modular
s #ONTROLCOMPATIBLEFORDAYLIGHTHARVESTING colors may be specified; refer to page MTX-1 or increments and must be supported at each fixture
OCCUPANCYSENSORSORDIMMINGSYSTEMSSMALL contact your local Alera Lighting representative. housing end. Refer to the Plank TID sheet for actual
CASESIZEBALLASTSREQUIRED hanging points with specific row information.
s ,OWPROlLEADJUSTABLECABLEMOUNTHANGING
J?@<C;@E>
Plank includes both direct and indirect lighting C89<CJ8E;<C<:KI@:8C
SYSTEM
elements. Shielding for the direct element may All fixtures bear appropriate UL or CUL labels.
s #ONSISTENTPREDICTABLEMOUNTINGLOCATIONS
be selected as a white cross baffle with opal Fixtures are prewired with electronic T8, T5, or
SIMPLIFYINSTALLATION
overlay (WCB), regressed perforated panel (RPF), T5HO ballasts and are available in 120 or 277
s 5,LISTED
flat perforated panel (FPF), opal acrylic lens (OA), volt. Some ballast options are available as dual-
s $AMPLABELAVAILABLEONMOSTMODELS
acrylic pattern 12 lens (A12), or semi-specular voltage 120/277 volt. All fixtures are wired for
parabolic louver (LD). For a dramatic touch, single circuit operation. Additional circuits can be
colored lensing material may be selected as an supplied as an option on the two and three lamp
overlay; contact factory. configurations; see ordering information below.
FI;<I@E>@E=FID8K@FE <O8DGC<1GCB$)+$*K,?F$G=JK$:D+/$N:9$<GL$DN$CI
LUTRON ECO
GCB Ç 12 Ç 2T5 Ç Ç :D Ç 48 Ç OA ÇSYSTEM BALLAST Ç MW Ç SGL Ç Ç F5835
IFNC<E>K? ?FLJ@E>KPG< JLJG<EJ@FE 98CC8JK :FCFI <E;:8GJ

Specify "LANK Solid (Std.) C<E>K? E Electronic, Instant -7 Matte White KNFG<IIFN
entire row 0&34 Perforated 18" (Std.) Start, (Std. for T8) (Std.) "LANK Flat End
12 Strip 24" EP Electronic, :4 ZET Silver Cap (Std.)
(3,4 Horizontal Slot Programmed Start See MTX-1 for other
DF;<C 36 36" (Std. for T5 and
Strip color selections.
0,+ Plank 48" T5HO, optional
Rectangular 63,4 Vertical Slot for T8)
Strip Other lengths =@OKLI<C<E>K? FGK@FEJ
Housing available on Unless specified, Alera
#,$ Custom Laser request. will use fewest ballasts Single or Row Individual ,2 Left/Right Switching
Cut Design ppossible. Lengths. Note: Fixtures in (2-Lamp only)*
Strip LUTRON ECO rows are modular and will )"/" Inboard/Outboard
be identified as components Switching (3-Lamp
SYSTEM BALLAST within the row by their only)*
C8DGKPG<8E;GIF=@C< DFLEK@E> ;FNEC@>?KJ?@<C;@E> MFCK8>< individual lengths.
Lengths for this product are: %, Emergency Battery
4 One T8 Lamp #- Adj. Aircraft Cable 7#" White Cross Baffle 5 120V- 4 = 4' 8 = 8' 12 = 12' Pack (Small case
4 Two T8 Lamps Mount 277V only)
20& Regressed
4 Three T8 Lamps See HGR-1 for other Perforated 120V ',2 Fast Blow Fuse
hanging methods. SINGLE
4 One T5 Lamp FPF Flat Perforated 277V GMF Slow Blow Fuse
4 Two T5 Lamps /! Opal Acrylic Lens 347V #3! UL listed or CSA F5835-
4 Three T8 Lamps ! Pattern 12 Thick certified for Canada LAMPS
Acrylic Lens $# Dust Cover (T8 only)
4(/ One T5HO Lamp
,$ Low Iridescent #,# Center Lamp Cover
4(/ Two T5HO Lamps Semi-Specular (T8 only)
4(/ Three T5HO Parabolic Louver
*Switching configuration
Lamps
must be provided.
GX^\(&/I\m%((&'-&'/ 9<8DJ&GCB:D
)''/8c\iXC`^_kè^#X[`m`j`fef]?lYY\ccC`^_kè^#@eZ%Jg\Z`ÔZXk`fejXe[[XkXjlYa\ZkkfZ_Xe^\n`k_flkefk`Z\%
.'(D`cc\ee`ld9cm[%>i\\em`cc\#J:)0-'.&K\c/-+%-./%('''&K\Z_Jlggfik/-+%-./%(,/'&N\Yj`k\nnn%Xc\iXc`^_kè^%Zfd
Notes:
P10-68755
GCB:89C<DFLEK
:IFJJJ<:K@FE
2" 2" 2"
9⁄" 9⁄" 9⁄"

1T8 Lamp 2T8 Lamps 3T8 Lamps
2" 2" 2"
9⁄" 9⁄" 9⁄"

1T5, T5HO Lamp 2T5, T5HO Lamps 3T5, T5HO Lamps
G?FKFD<KI@:;8K8 QFE8CCLD<EJLDD8IP
:ONE ,UMENS ,AMP &IXT
CLD@E8@I<;8K8 K\jk(+'*/ 0-30 207 7.1 7.4 <EP;8K8
Luminaire PLK-1T8-WCB-E 0-40 327 11.3 11.7 Total Luminaire Efficiency 96.5%
Plank Architectural Beam 0-60 529 18.2 18.9 Luminaire Efficacy Rating (LER) 76
9.75 × 48 1-Lamp with Gloss White 0-90 620 21.4 22.1
ANSI/IESNA RP-1-2004 Compliance Yes-VDT Intensive
Cross Baffle and Opal Overlay 90-120 774 26.7 27.7 Use
Ballast REL-1P32-SC 90-130 1138 39.2 40.6 Comparative Yearly Lighting Energy $3.16 based on
Ballast Factor 0.92 90-150 1767 60.9 63.1 Cost per 1000 Lumens 3000 hrs. and
Lamp F32T8 90-180 2179 75.1 77.9 $0.08 per KWH
Lumens per Lamp 2900 0-180 2799 96.5 100.0
Watts 34
Shielding Angle 0º = 90 90º = 90 @E;FFI:8E;<C8GCFK 8M<I8><CLD@E8E:<:Xe[\cX&Jh%D%

:F<==@:@<EKJF=LK@C@Q8K@FE 0 3344 3344 3344 3344 3344
30 2587 2642 2831 3089 3265
2#
40 2205 2297 2542 2894 3155
27
45 1974 2074 2373 2771 3069
1 89 85 81 78 78 75 72 70 58 56 54 18
50 1697 1843 2190 2628 2957
2 81 74 69 64 71 66 61 57 51 48 45 16
!NGLE
55 1493 1554 1964 2434 2741
3 74 65 59 53 65 58 53 48 45 41 38 14
60 1408 1455 1713 2135 2276
4 67 58 51 45 60 51 45 41 40 36 32 12
65 1332 1360 1555 1638 1555
5 62 51 44 38 55 46 40 35 35 31 28 10
2#2
70 1269 1269 1441 1338 1166

6 57 46 38 33 50 41 35 30 32 27 24 9
75 1224 1269 1315 1179 1133
7 52 41 34 29 46 37 31 26 29 24 21 8
80 1216 1216 1216 1013 946
8 48 37 30 25 43 33 27 23 26 22 19 7
85 1212 1077 808 673 673
9 45 34 27 22 40 30 24 20 24 20 17 7
10 42 31 24 20 37 28 22 18 22 18 15 6
2#2 = Room Cavity Ratio
2# = Effective Ceiling Cavity Reflectance 27 = Wall Reflectance Test Date 9/16/2005
G?FKFD<KI@:;8K8 QFE8CCLD<EJLDD8IP
:ONE ,UMENS ,AMP &IXT
CLD@E8@I<;8K8 K\jk(+'*+ 0-30 113 3.9 4.2 <EP;8K8
Luminaire PLK-1T8-RPF-E 0-40 183 6.3 6.8 Total Luminaire Efficiency 92.7%
9.75 × 48 1-Lamp with Gloss White 0-90 363 12.5 13.5
ANSI/IESNA RP-1-2004 Compliance Yes-VDT Intensive
Regress Basket and Opal Overlay 90-120 812 28.0 30.2 Use
Lamp F32T8 90-180 2324 80.1 86.5 $0.08 per KWH
Lumens per Lamp 2900 0-180 2687 92.7 100.0
Watts 33
Shielding Angle 0º = 90 90º = 90 @E;FFI:8E;<C8GCFK 8M<I8><CLD@E8E:<:Xe[\cX&Jh%D%

:F<==@:@<EKJF=LK@C@Q8K@FE 0 1713 1713 1713 1713 1713
30 1666 1653 1653 1639 1626
2#
40 1593 1547 1547 1531 1516
27
45 1526 1493 1477 1460 1443
1 83 79 76 73 73 70 67 64 51 49 48 11
50 1460 1424 1405 1387 1351
2 76 69 64 60 66 61 57 53 45 42 40 9
!NGLE
55 1350 1329 1309 1268 1248

3 69 61 55 50 60 54 48 44 40 36 33 8
60 1220 1197 1197 1126 1079
4 63 54 47 42 55 47 42 37 35 31 28 7
65 1083 1055 1055 916 833
5 58 48 41 36 50 42 36 32 31 27 24 6
2#2
70 892 892 823 652 583

6 53 43 36 31 46 37 32 27 28 24 21 5
75 680 725 589 499 499
7 49 38 31 26 43 34 28 24 25 21 18 5
80 608 608 540 473 473
8 45 34 28 23 39 30 25 21 23 19 16 4
85 538 538 538 538 538
9 42 31 25 20 36 28 22 18 21 17 14 4
10 39 28 22 18 34 25 20 16 19 15 12 3
2#2 = Room Cavity Ratio
2# = Effective Ceiling Cavity Reflectance 27 = Wall Reflectance Test Date 9/9/2005
GX^\)&/I\m%((&'-&'/ 9<8DJ&GCB:D
Notes:
P10-68755
GCB:89C<DFLEK
G?FKFD<KI@:;8K8
CLD@E8@I<;8K8 K\jk(+'(+ QFE8CCLD<EJLDD8IP <EP;8K8

Luminaire PLK-2T8-WCB-E :ONE ,UMENS ,AMP &IXT Total Luminaire Efficiency 96.8%
9.75 × 48 2-Lamp with Gloss White 0-40 790 13.6 14.1 ANSI/IESNA RP-1-2004 Compliance Yes-VDT Intensive
Center Louver and Side Reflectors 0-60 1266 21.8 22.6 Use
Lamp F32T8 90-130 1907 32.9 34.0 $0.08 per KWH
Lumens per Lamp 2900 90-150 3221 55.5 57.4
Watts 63 90-180 4108 70.8 73.2
Shielding Angle 0º = 90 90º = 90 0-180 5613 96.8 100.0
:F<==@:@<EKJF=LK@C@Q8K@FE @E;FFI:8E;<C8GCFK 8M<I8><CLD@E8E:<:Xe[\cX&Jh%D%

2#
27 0 8095 8095 8095 8095 8095
1 90 86 82 79 80 77 74 71 60 58 56 22 30 6259 6435 6882 7451 7762
2 82 75 70 65 73 67 63 59 53 49 47 19 40 5314 5544 6126 6876 7366
3 75 66 59 54 67 59 54 49 47 43 39 16 45 4745 5011 5691 6504 7051
4 68 59 51 46 61 53 46 42 41 37 34 14 50 4107 4435 5183 6059 6662
!NGLE
5 63 52 45 39 56 47 41 36 37 33 29 12 55 3579 3784 4643 5543 6095
2#2
6 58 47 39 34 51 42 36 31 33 29 25 11 60 3402 3473 4059 4974 5467

7 53 42 35 30 48 38 32 27 30 26 22 10 65 3220 3276 3692 4331 4608
8 49 38 31 26 44 34 28 24 27 23 20 9 70 3053 3121 3499 3636 3567
9 46 35 28 23 41 31 25 21 25 21 17 8 75 2992 3128 3309 3309 3264
10 43 32 25 20 38 29 23 19 23 19 16 7 80 3040 3175 3243 3243 3243
2#2 = Room Cavity Ratio 85 3365 3365 3365 3231 3231
2# = Effective Ceiling Cavity Reflectance 27 = Wall Reflectance
Test Date 9/18/2007
G?FKFD<KI@:;8K8
CLD@E8@I<;8K8 K\jk(*/0' QFE8CCLD<EJLDD8IP <EP;8K8

Luminaire PLK-2T8-PERF-WCB-E :ONE ,UMENS ,AMP &IXT Total Luminaire Efficiency 92.0%
Ballast ICN-2M32-MC 0-90 1370 23.6 25.7 Comparative Yearly Lighting Energy $3.00 based on
Lamp F32T8 90-130 1839 31.7 34.5 $0.08 per KWH
Lumens per Lamp 2900 90-150 3106 53.6 58.2
Watts 62 90-180 3965 68.4 74.3

2#
27 0 7438 7438 7438 7438 7438
1 85 81 78 75 76 73 70 67 56 55 53 20 30 5784 5933 6245 6692 7126
2 78 71 66 62 69 64 59 56 50 47 44 17 40 4977 5161 5590 6172 6784
3 71 63 56 51 63 56 51 47 44 40 37 15 45 4496 4695 5193 5824 6504
4 65 56 49 43 58 50 44 40 39 35 32 13 50 3924 4143 4745 5439 6169
!NGLE
5 60 49 42 37 53 44 38 34 35 31 27 11 55 3293 3518 4213 4950 5666

2#2
6 55 44 37 32 49 40 34 29 31 27 24 10 60 3027 3074 3660 4388 5068

7 51 40 33 28 45 36 30 26 28 24 21 9 65 2859 2887 3220 3803 4303
8 47 36 29 25 42 33 27 23 26 22 18 8 70 2744 2744 3053 3190 3156
9 43 33 26 22 39 30 24 20 24 19 16 7 75 2674 2720 2856 2810 2538
10 40 30 24 19 36 27 22 18 22 18 15 7 80 2702 2702 2702 2567 2432
Test Date 3/24/2005
GX^\*&/I\m%((&'-&'/ 9<8DJ&GCB:D
Notes:
P10-68755
GCB:89C<DFLEK
G?FKFD<KI@:;8K8
CLD@E8@I<;8K8 K\jk(+'*( QFE8CCLD<EJLDD8IP <EP;8K8

Luminaire PLK-2T8-RPF-E :ONE ,UMENS ,AMP &IXT Total Luminaire Efficiency 93.6%
Regress Basket and Opal Overlay 0-60 898 15.5 16.5 Use
Lamp F32T8 90-130 2013 34.7 37.1 $0.08 per KWH
Lumens per Lamp 2900 90-150 3420 59.0 63.0
Watts 62 90-180 4376 75.5 80.7

2#
27 0 5033 5033 5033 5033 5033
1 85 81 78 75 75 72 69 67 54 53 51 16 30 4863 4850 4850 4796 4755
2 78 71 66 61 68 63 59 55 48 45 42 13 40 4625 4594 4548 4457 4380
3 71 63 56 51 62 56 50 46 42 39 36 11 45 4463 4430 4330 4198 4098
4 65 55 48 43 57 49 43 39 37 33 30 10 50 4234 4198 4052 3869 3742
!NGLE
5 59 49 42 37 52 44 38 33 33 29 26 9 55 3968 3907 3702 3436 3293
2#2
6 54 44 37 32 48 39 33 29 30 26 23 8 60 3590 3543 3285 2933 2769

7 50 39 32 27 44 35 29 25 27 23 20 7 65 3137 3054 2776 2387 2221
8 46 36 29 24 41 32 26 22 24 20 17 6 70 2538 2470 2230 1818 1681
9 43 32 26 21 38 29 23 19 22 18 15 5 75 1994 1994 1677 1496 1451
10 40 29 23 19 35 26 21 17 20 16 14 5 80 1621 1554 1621 1486 1419
Test Date 9/18/2007
G?FKFD<KI@:;8K8
CLD@E8@I<;8K8 K\jk(+'(. QFE8CCLD<EJLDD8IP <EP;8K8

Luminaire PLK-3T8-WCB-E :ONE ,UMENS ,AMP &IXT Total Luminaire Efficiency 92.2%
9.75 × 48 3-Lamp with Gloss White 0-40 1173 13.5 14.6 ANSI/IESNA RP-1-2004 Compliance Yes-VDT Normal
Lamp F32T8 90-130 2517 28.9 31.4 $0.08 per KWH
Lumens per Lamp 2900 90-150 4463 51.3 55.7
Watts 88 90-180 5794 66.6 72.3

2#
27 0 12424 12424 12424 12424 12424
1 86 82 79 76 77 73 71 68 57 56 54 22 30 9523 9632 10079 10770 11230
2 78 72 66 62 70 64 60 56 51 48 45 19 40 8071 8239 8852 9801 10537
3 71 63 57 52 64 57 51 47 45 41 38 16 45 7201 7433 8179 9291 10187
4 65 56 49 44 58 50 45 40 40 36 32 14 50 6187 6516 7447 8797 9819
!NGLE
5 60 50 43 38 53 45 39 34 36 31 28 12 55 5420 5584 6668 8243 9368

2#2
6 55 45 38 32 49 40 34 30 32 28 24 11 60 5092 5162 5889 7579 8799

7 51 40 33 28 45 36 30 26 29 25 21 10 65 4802 4830 5385 6829 7967
8 47 36 30 25 42 33 27 23 26 22 19 9 70 4494 4528 5077 5934 6860
9 44 33 27 22 39 30 24 20 24 20 17 8 75 4306 4442 4669 5031 5394
10 41 30 24 20 37 27 22 18 22 18 15 7 80 4256 4256 4256 4459 4662
Test Date 8/11/2005
GX^\+&/I\m%((&'-&'/ 9<8DJ&GCB:D
Notes:
P10-68755
GCB:89C<DFLEK
G?FKFD<KI@:;8K8
CLD@E8@I<;8K8 K\jk(+')' QFE8CCLD<EJLDD8IP <EP;8K8

Luminaire PLK-1T5HO-WCB-EP :ONE ,UMENS ,AMP &IXT Total Luminaire Efficiency 96.2%
Center Louver and Opal Overlay 0-60 716 16.1 16.7 Use
Ballast ICN2S5490C 0-90 847 19.0 19.8 Comparative Yearly Lighting Energy $3.43 based on
Lamp F54T5HO 90-130 1793 40.3 41.9 $0.08 per KWH
Lumens per Lamp 4450 90-150 2785 62.6 65.0
Watts 62 90-180 3434 77.2 80.2

2#
27 0 4540 4540 4540 4540 4540
1 88 84 80 77 77 74 71 69 56 54 53 16 30 3509 3603 3888 4240 4430
2 80 73 68 63 70 65 60 57 49 46 44 14 40 2971 3124 3492 3967 4242
3 73 64 58 53 64 57 52 47 44 40 37 12 45 2671 2837 3252 3750 4048
4 67 57 50 44 59 51 45 40 39 35 31 10 50 2318 2519 2975 3504 3778
!NGLE
5 61 51 43 38 54 45 39 34 35 30 27 9 55 2045 2168 2679 3129 3334
2#2
6 56 45 38 33 49 40 34 30 31 27 23 8 60 1924 1994 2370 2651 2745

7 52 41 33 28 46 36 30 26 28 24 20 7 65 1832 1888 2165 2249 2221
8 48 37 30 25 42 33 27 23 25 21 18 7 70 1749 1818 2024 1989 1887
9 44 33 27 22 39 30 24 20 23 19 16 6 75 1677 1813 1904 1904 1813
10 41 30 24 20 37 27 22 18 21 17 14 5 80 1757 1757 1824 1757 1757
Test Date 8/15/2005
G?FKFD<KI@:;8K8
CLD@E8@I<;8K8 K\jk(+'*- QFE8CCLD<EJLDD8IP <EP;8K8

Luminaire PLK-1T5HO-RPF-EP :ONE ,UMENS ,AMP &IXT Total Luminaire Efficiency 96.3%
9.75 × 48 1-Lamp with Regress 0-40 242 5.4 5.6 ANSI/IESNA RP-1-2004 Compliance Yes-VDT Intensive
Perforated Basket and Opal Overlay 0-60 408 9.2 9.5 Use
Ballast ICN-2S54 0-90 484 10.9 11.3 Comparative Yearly Lighting Energy $3.48 based on
Lamp F54T5HO 90-130 1945 43.7 45.4 $0.08 per KWH
Lumens per Lamp 4450 90-150 3061 68.8 71.4
Watts 63 90-180 3804 85.5 88.7

2#
27 0 2276 2276 2276 2276 2276
1 86 82 79 75 75 72 69 66 52 50 49 9 30 2208 2181 2167 2154 2140
2 78 72 66 62 68 63 58 54 46 43 40 8 40 2098 2067 2037 2022 1976
3 71 63 56 51 62 55 50 45 40 37 34 7 45 2024 1991 1958 1908 1875
4 65 56 48 43 56 49 43 38 36 32 29 6 50 1916 1898 1843 1807 1770
!NGLE
5 60 49 42 37 52 43 37 33 32 28 25 5 55 1800 1759 1718 1677 1616

2#2
6 55 44 37 31 47 39 32 28 28 24 21 4 60 1642 1619 1596 1478 1408

7 50 39 32 27 44 35 28 24 25 21 18 4 65 1444 1416 1416 1249 1138
8 46 35 28 24 40 31 25 21 23 19 16 4 70 1166 1166 1166 960 858
9 43 32 25 21 37 28 22 19 21 17 14 3 75 952 997 907 771 725
10 40 29 23 18 35 26 20 16 19 15 13 3 80 878 878 811 743 676
Test Date 9/13/2005
GX^\,&/I\m%((&'-&'/ 9<8DJ&GCB:D
Notes:
P10-68755
GCB:89C<DFLEK
G?FKFD<KI@:;8K8
CLD@E8@I<;8K8 K\jk(+')( QFE8CCLD<EJLDD8IP <EP;8K8

9.75 × 48 2-Lamp with Gloss White 0-40 952 10.7 11.4 ANSI/IESNA RP-1-2004 Compliance Yes-VDT Normal
Center Louver and Opal Overlay 0-60 1514 17.0 18.1 Use
Ballast ICN2S5490C 0-90 1798 20.2 21.5 Comparative Yearly Lighting Energy $3.48 based on
Lamp F54T5HO 90-130 3203 36.0 38.3 $0.08 per KWH
Lumens per Lamp 4450 90-150 5222 58.7 62.4
Watts 121 90-180 6569 73.8 78.5

2#
27 0 9890 9890 9890 9890 9890
1 86 82 79 76 76 73 70 68 56 54 52 17 30 7573 7749 8263 8900 9279
2 78 72 67 62 69 64 60 56 49 46 43 15 40 6417 6647 7275 8071 8592
3 72 63 57 52 63 56 51 47 43 40 37 13 45 5724 6023 6686 7549 8179
4 66 56 49 44 58 50 44 39 38 34 31 11 50 4964 5275 6078 7063 7720
!NGLE
5 60 50 43 37 53 44 38 34 34 30 27 10 55 4377 4541 5400 6484 7220
2#2
6 55 45 37 32 49 40 34 29 31 27 23 9 60 4153 4200 4834 5913 6617

7 51 40 33 28 45 36 30 25 28 24 20 8 65 3942 3970 4469 5274 5746
8 47 36 29 25 42 32 27 22 25 21 18 7 70 3739 3773 4288 4494 4596
9 44 33 26 22 39 30 24 20 23 19 16 6 75 3626 3717 3944 4034 4125
10 41 30 24 19 36 27 21 18 21 17 14 6 80 3716 3581 3783 3716 3783
Test Date 8/17/2005
G?FKFD<KI@:;8K8
CLD@E8@I<;8K8 K\jk(+')+ QFE8CCLD<EJLDD8IP <EP;8K8

9.75 × 48 3-Lamp with Gloss White 0-40 1510 11.3 12.5 ANSI/IESNA RP-1-2004 Compliance Noncompliant
Center Louver and Opal Overlay 0-60 2405 18.0 19.8 Comparative Yearly Lighting Energy $3.64 based on
Ballast ICN-4S5490C-2LS 0-90 2861 21.4 23.6 Cost per 1000 Lumens 3000 hrs. and
Ballast Factor 1.00 90-120 2725 20.4 22.5 $0.08 per KWH
Lamp F54T5HO 90-130 4341 32.5 35.8
Lumens per Lamp 4450 90-150 7284 54.8 60.1
Watts 183 90-180 9259 69.4 76.4

2#
27 0 16049 16049 16049 16049 16049
1 84 80 77 74 74 71 68 66 55 53 51 18 30 12260 12409 13005 13736 14400
2 76 70 65 60 68 62 58 54 48 45 43 16 40 10368 10583 11425 12558 13554
3 70 62 55 50 62 55 50 45 43 39 36 13 45 9225 9540 10585 11879 13074
4 64 54 48 43 56 49 43 39 38 34 31 12 50 7958 8396 9673 11225 12557
!NGLE
5 58 48 41 36 52 43 37 33 34 30 26 10 55 6995 7220 8693 10431 11863

2#2
6 54 43 36 31 48 39 33 29 30 26 23 9 60 6617 6711 7743 9479 10864

7 50 39 32 27 44 35 29 25 27 23 20 8 65 6274 6302 7162 8467 9716
8 46 35 29 24 41 32 26 22 25 21 18 7 70 5900 5900 6757 7306 8198
9 43 32 26 21 38 29 23 19 23 19 16 7 75 5757 5893 6255 6391 6845
10 40 29 23 19 35 26 21 17 21 17 14 6 80 5810 5743 5945 5608 5878
Test Date 9/6/2005
GX^\-&/I\m%((&'-&'/ 9<8DJ&GCB:D
Notes:
P10-68755
GCB:89C<DFLEK
G?FKFD<KI@:;8K8
CLD@E8@I<;8K8 K\jk(,'*0 QFE8CCLD<EJLDD8IP <EP;8K8

Luminaire PLK-3T8-WCB-EU-MW-4-CLC :ONE ,UMENS ,AMP &IXT Total Luminaire Efficiency 66.1%
9.75 X 48 3-Lamp with White Center 0-40 726 12.3 18.6 ANSI/IESNA RP-1-2004 Compliance Yes-VDT Intensive
Baffle and Center Lamp Cover 0-60 1142 19.4 29.3 Use
Ballast ICN-2P32-SC ICN-1P32-SC 0-90 1328 22.5 34.0 Comparative Yearly Lighting Energy $6.32 based on
Lamp F32T8 90-130 1100 18.6 28.2 $0.08 per KWH
Lumens per Lamp 2950 90-150 1953 33.1 50.0
Watts 90 90-180 2574 43.6 66.0

2#
27 0 7872 7872 7872 7872 7872
1 63 60 57 55 56 54 52 50 43 42 41 20 30 5852 5933 6204 6624 6990
2 57 53 49 46 51 48 44 42 38 36 34 17 40 4885 4993 5391 5973 6539
3 52 46 42 38 47 42 38 35 34 31 29 14 45 4297 4446 4944 5641 6321
4 48 41 36 32 43 37 33 30 30 27 25 13 50 3614 3833 4435 5293 6023
!NGLE
5 44 37 32 28 40 33 29 26 27 24 22 11 55 3048 3150 3907 4868 5645
2#2
6 41 33 28 24 37 30 26 22 25 21 19 10 60 2863 2909 3308 4364 5162

7 37 30 25 21 34 27 23 20 22 19 17 9 65 2665 2693 2943 3831 4553
8 35 27 22 19 31 25 20 17 20 17 15 8 70 2504 2470 2676 3121 3739
9 32 25 20 17 29 23 18 15 19 15 13 7 75 2357 2357 2357 2493 2674
10 30 23 18 15 27 21 17 14 17 14 12 7 80 2297 2094 1959 1892 1892
Test Date 6/24/2008
G?FKFD<KI@:;8K8
CLD@E8@I<;8K8 K\jk(,(0, QFE8CCLD<EJLDD8IP <EP;8K8

Luminaire PLK-232-LD-EP-4 :ONE ,UMENS ,AMP &IXT Total Luminaire Efficiency 85.4%
9.75 X 48 2-Lamp with 1 x 44 Cell 0-40 892 15.1 17.7 ANSI/IESNA RP-1-2004 Compliance Yes-VDT Intensive
Semi Specular Louver 0-60 1430 24.2 28.4 Use
Ballast ICN-2P32-N 0-90 1522 25.8 30.2 Comparative Yearly Lighting Energy $3.20 based on
Lamp F32T8 90-130 1679 28.5 33.3 $0.08 per KWH
Lumens per Lamp 2950 90-150 2792 47.3 55.4
Watts 59 90-180 3520 59.7 69.8

2#
27 0 8177 8177 8177 8177 8177
1 80 77 74 71 72 69 67 65 55 53 52 23 30 7247 7654 8033 8426 8670
2 74 68 63 59 66 61 57 54 49 46 44 20 40 6570 7183 7627 8209 8653
3 67 60 54 50 60 54 49 45 43 40 37 18 45 5691 6471 7267 8209 8653
4 62 53 47 42 55 48 43 39 39 35 32 15 50 4143 5074 6461 7428 8268
!NGLE
5 57 48 41 36 51 43 38 33 35 31 28 14 55 2414 3129 4827 6157 6954

2#2
6 52 43 36 31 47 39 33 29 31 27 24 12 60 1244 1572 2769 4364 5115

7 48 38 32 28 43 35 29 25 28 24 21 11 65 805 916 1416 2554 3081
8 45 35 29 24 40 32 26 22 26 22 19 10 70 583 617 892 1441 2092
9 42 32 26 21 37 29 24 20 24 20 17 9 75 544 589 725 907 1315
10 39 29 23 19 35 26 21 18 22 18 15 8 80 608 608 676 676 878
Test Date 9/23/2008
GX^\.&/I\m%((&'-&'/ 9<8DJ&GCB:D
Notes:
P10-68755
GCB:89C<DFLEK
G?FKFD<KI@:;8K8
CLD@E8@I<;8K8 K\jk(,(0- QFE8CCLD<EJLDD8IP <EP;8K8

9.75 X 48 1-Lamp with 1 x 44 Cell 0-40 401 13.6 15.5 ANSI/IESNA RP-1-2004 Compliance Yes-VDT Intensive
Ballast ICN-2P32-N 0-90 713 24.2 27.6 Comparative Yearly Lighting Energy $3.20 based on
Lamp F32T8 90-130 994 33.7 38.5 $0.08 per KWH
Lumens per Lamp 2950 90-150 1530 51.9 59.3
Watts 36 90-180 1868 63.3 72.4

2#
27 0 3355 3355 3355 3355 3355
1 82 78 72 72 73 70 68 65 55 53 52 21 30 2940 3102 3644 4308 4619
2 75 69 64 60 67 62 58 54 49 46 44 19 40 2680 3124 4089 4686 4962
3 68 61 55 50 61 55 50 46 43 40 37 16 45 2356 3020 3998 4364 4662
4 63 54 47 43 56 49 43 39 39 35 32 14 50 1734 2537 3431 3815 4161
!NGLE
5 57 48 41 36 51 43 38 33 34 30 27 12 55 1023 1575 2414 2925 3211
2#2
6 53 43 36 31 47 39 33 29 31 27 24 11 60 563 798 1267 1713 1807

7 49 39 32 27 44 35 29 25 28 24 21 10 65 361 444 666 1027 1194
8 45 35 28 24 40 32 26 22 25 21 18 9 70 274 309 446 823 1269
9 42 32 25 21 37 29 23 20 23 19 16 8 75 227 317 363 499 771
10 39 29 23 19 35 26 21 17 21 17 15 7 80 270 270 338 405 473
Test Date 9/24/2008
G?FKFD<KI@:;8K8
CLD@E8@I<;8K8 K\jk(,(0/ QFE8CCLD<EJLDD8IP <EP;8K8

9.75 X 48 2-Lamp with 1 x 44 Cell 0-40 1309 14.7 16.2 ANSI/IESNA RP-1-2004 Compliance Yes-VDT Normal
Ballast ICN-2S54 0-90 2153 24.2 26.7 Comparative Yearly Lighting Energy $3.64 based on
Lamp F54T5HO 90-130 2976 33.4 36.9 $0.08 per KWH
Lumens per Lamp 4450 90-150 4745 53.3 58.9
Watts 122 90-180 5907 66.4 73.3

2#
27 0 11708 11708 11708 11708 11708
1 84 81 78 75 75 72 70 67 57 55 53 22 30 10201 11217 12531 12653 12747
2 77 71 66 62 69 64 60 56 50 47 45 19 40 8867 10445 10491 10812 11379
3 71 63 57 52 63 57 52 47 45 41 38 17 45 4566 9092 9440 11149 12643
4 65 56 49 44 58 50 45 40 40 36 33 15 50 5475 6771 8469 11279 12648
!NGLE
5 60 50 43 38 53 45 39 35 36 32 29 13 55 3170 4091 6484 7957 8672

2#2
6 55 45 38 33 49 40 35 30 32 28 25 12 60 1689 2088 3285 3989 3989

7 51 40 34 29 45 36 31 27 29 25 22 10 65 1083 1221 1804 2387 2748
8 47 36 30 25 42 33 27 23 27 22 19 9 70 858 960 1303 2195 3019
9 44 33 27 23 39 30 25 21 24 20 17 9 75 816 997 1179 1405 1994
10 41 30 24 20 36 28 22 19 22 18 16 8 80 1013 1149 1284 1284 1486
Test Date 9/29/2008
GX^\/&/I\m%((&'-&'/ 9<8DJ&GCB:D
Notes:
P10-68755

EcoSystem Multiple Control Input

Ballasts
Digital electronic dimming ballasts maximize the

benefits of a lighting management system. EcoSystem
Ballasts offer 100% to 10% dimming; ideal for use
where saving energy, increasing flexibility, and
maximizing productivity are the goals of the lighting EcoSystem case type G
design.
Features
• Continuous, flicker-free dimming from 100% to 10%
• Provides power for and responds to one occupancy
EcoSystem case type J
sensor, one photo sensor, and one personal control
input (infrared receiver or wallstation)
• Communicates status and sensor inputs over the
EcoSystem Bus
• Programmed rapid start design ensures full rated
lamp life while dimming and cycling
• Lamps turn on to any dimmed level without flashing to
full brightness
dimming range
• Frequency of operation ensures that ballast does not
interfere with infrared devices
• End-of-lamp-life protection circuitry ensures safe
operation throughout entire lamp life
• Nonvolatile memory restores all ballast settings after
power failure
• Ballasts maintain consistent light output for linear
lamp lengths (i.e. 4 ft., 3 ft., 2 ft. have same relative
output)
Job Number:
Notes:
P10-68755

Standards • Relative humidity: less than 90% non-condensing
• California Energy Commission Listed • Sound Rating: inaudible in a 27 dB ambient
• UL Listed (evaluated to the requirements of UL935) • Maximum ballast case temperature: 75 °C (167 °F)
• CSA certified (evaluated to the requirements of
C22.2 No. 74) Ballast Wiring & Mounting
• NOM Listed for 32 W T8 Ballasts • Ballast is grounded by a mounting screw to the
• S Mark Certified fixture
• Class P thermally protected • Terminal blocks on the ballast accept the following
• Meets ANSI C82.11 High Frequency Ballast Standard wire gauges:
• Meets FCC Part 18 Non-Consumer requirements for Power Wiring, Lamp Wiring, and EcoSystem Bus:
EMI/RFI emissions only one #18 AWG solid per terminal
• Meets ANSI C62.41 Category A surge protection Class 2 Sensors:
standards up to and including 4 kV only one #22 AWG solid per terminal
• Manufacturing facilities employ ESD reduction • Only one wire per terminal
practices that comply with the requirements of • Class 2 sensor wiring must be separated from all
ANSI/ESD S20.20 power and Class 1 wiring, consult all applicable
• Lutron Quality Systems registered to ISO 9001.2000 local and national codes
• Ballast mounts using two screws (or sheet metal
Performance feature and one screw) within a fluorescent fixture
• Operating Voltage: 120, 220/240, 277 V at 50 or • Wiring from the ballast to lamp sockets shall not
60 Hz exceed 7 ft. for T8, T5, and T5HO lamps
• Grounding: ballast and fixture must be grounded for • Wiring from the ballast to lamps sockets shall not
proper dimming exceed 3 ft. for T5 Twin Tube lamps
• Dimming Range: 100% to 10% measured relative
light output Lamp Seasoning
• Lamp Starting: programmed rapid start Refer to lamp manufacturer for lamp seasoning
• Lamp Current Crest Factor: less than 1.7 requirements prior to dimming
• Light Output Variation: Constant ±2% light output for
line voltage variations of ±10%
• Lamp Life: Average lamp life meets or exceeds
specified lamp ratings
• Power Factor: 0.95 minimum
• Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): Less than 20%
• Inaudible in a 27 dBA ambient
• Maximum Inrush Current: 3 A per ballast at 277 V ,
7A per ballast at 120 V
• Class 2 Output: +20 V , 50mA maximum (one
daylight sensor, one keypad and one occupancy
sensor can be connected)
Job Number:
Notes:
P10-68755

EcoSystem Ballasts for linear and U bend T8 Lamps
F32T8 3 EC5 T832 G UNV 3L G 277 0.31 86.5 0.85 7650 88 0.98 0.94
(48 in.) 240 0.35 84.0 0.85 7650 89 1.01 0.97
120 0.72 85.9 0.85 7650 89 0.99 0.95
EC5 T832 G UNV 317L G 277 0.41 105.7 1.17 10,530 100 1.11 1.06
240 0.47 106.5 1.17 10,530 99 1.10 1.05
120 0.95 106.8 1.17 10,530 99 1.10 1.05
2 EC5 T832 G UNV 2L G 277 0.22 59.6 0.85 5100 86 1.43 0.91
240 0.25 57.6 0.85 5100 89 1.48 0.94
120 0.49 58.8 0.85 5100 87 1.45 0.93
EC5 T832 J UNV 2 J 277 0.21 57.4 0.85 5100 89 1.48 0.95
240 0.25 59.0 0.85 5100 86 1.44 0.92
120 0.49 59.1 0.85 5100 86 1.44 0.92
1 EC5 T832 J UNV 1 J 277 0.12 31.6 0.85 2550 81 2.69 0.86
240 0.13 31.0 0.85 2550 82 2.74 0.87
120 0.26 31.3 0.85 2550 81 2.72 0.87
F25T8 2 EC5 T825 J UNV 2 J 277 0.18 48.9 0.85 3665 75 1.74 0.87
(36 in.) 240 0.20 49.0 0.85 3665 75 1.73 0.87
120 0.41 49.0 0.85 3665 75 1.73 0.87
1 EC5 T825 J UNV 1 J 277 0.10 27.6 0.85 1828 66 3.08 0.77
240 0.11 27.0 0.85 1828 68 3.15 0.79
120 0.23 26.9 0.85 1828 68 3.16 0.79
F17T8 2 EC5 T817 J UNV 2 J 277 0.13 36.2 0.85 2380 66 2.35 0.80
(24 in.) 240 0.15 37.0 0.85 2380 64 2.30 0.78
120 0.31 37.0 0.85 2380 64 2.30 0.78
1 EC5 T817 J UNV 1 J 277 0.08 20.6 0.85 1190 68 4.13 0.70
240 0.09 20.0 0.85 1190 60 4.25 0.72
120 0.17 20.1 0.85 1190 70 4.23 0.72
Job Number:
Notes:
P10-68755

EcoSystem Ballasts for linear T5 Lamps
Size Voltage Current Power Factor Lumens Efficacy Efficacy Efficacy
F35T5 1 EC5 T535 J UNV 1 J 277 0.15 42.0 1.0 3650 87 2.38 0.83
(57.1 in.) 240 0.18 42.3 1.0 3650 87 2.38 0.83
120 0.35 42.2 1.0 3650 87 2.38 0.83
F28T5 2 EC5 T528 J UNV 2 J 277 0.23 64.5 1.0 5800 90 1.55 0.87
(45.2 in.) 240 0.27 65.0 1.0 5800 89 1.54 0.86
120 0.54 65.2 1.0 5800 89 1.53 0.86
1 EC5 T528 J UNV 1 J 277 0.12 32.6 1.0 2900 89 3.07 0.86
240 0.14 32.9 1.0 2900 88 3.04 0.85
120 0.27 32.9 1.0 2900 88 3.04 0.85
F21T5 2 EC5 T521 J UNV 2 J 277 0.17 46.0 1.0 4200 91 2.17 0.91
(33.4 in.) 240 0.20 47.2 1.0 4200 89 2.12 0.89
120 0.39 47.2 1.0 4200 89 2.12 0.89
1 EC5 T521 J UNV 1 J 277 0.09 25.8 1.0 2100 81 3.88 0.81
240 0.11 25.8 1.0 2100 81 3.88 0.81
120 0.22 25.8 1.0 2100 81 3.88 0.81
F14T5 2 EC5 T514 J UNV 2 J 277 0.12 32.8 1.0 2700 82 3.05 0.85
(21.6 in.) 240 0.14 33.3 1.0 2700 81 3.00 0.85
120 0.28 33.3 1.0 2700 81 3.00 0.85
1 EC5 T514 J UNV 1 J 277 0.07 19.0 1.0 1350 71 5.26 0.74
240 0.08 19.2 1.0 1350 70 5.21 0.74
120 0.16 19.2 1.0 1350 70 5.21 0.74
Job Number:
Notes:
P10-68755

EcoSystem Ballasts for linear T5 HO Lamps
F54T5 2 EC5 T554 J UNV 2 J 277 0.40 110.1 1.0 10,000 91 0.91 0.98
(45.2 in.) 240 0.50 119.0 1.0 10,000 84 0.84 0.91
120 0.99 119.3 1.0 10,000 84 0.84 0.91
1 EC5 T554 J UNV 1 J 277 0.21 56.5 1.0 5000 88 1.77 0.96
240 0.24 58.0 1.0 5000 86 1.73 0.93
120 0.48 57.9 1.0 5000 86 1.73 0.93
F39T5 2 EC5 T539 J UNV 2 J 277 0.30 83.0 1.0 7000 84 1.20 0.94
(33.4 in.) 240 0.35 84.0 1.0 7000 83 1.19 0.93
120 0.70 84.3 1.0 7000 83 1.19 0.93
1 EC5 T539 J UNV 1 J 277 0.16 43.3 1.0 3500 81 2.31 0.90
240 0.18 44.0 1.0 3500 80 2.27 0.89
120 0.37 44.0 1.0 3500 80 2.27 0.89
F24T5 2 EC5 T524 J UNV 2 J 277 0.20 54.8 1.0 4000 73 1.82 0.89
(21.6 in.) 240 0.23 54.0 1.0 4000 74 1.85 0.89
120 0.45 53.9 1.0 4000 74 1.86 0.89
1 EC5 T524 J UNV 1 J 277 0.11 30.0 1.0 2000 67 3.33 0.80
240 0.12 28.8 1.0 2000 69 3.47 0.83
120 0.24 28.8 1.0 2000 69 3.47 0.83
Job Number:
Notes:
P10-68755

EcoSystem Ballasts for T5 Twin Tube Lamps
FT55 2 EC5 T555 J UNV 2 J 277 0.40 110.8 0.9 8640 78 0.81 0.99
(20.7 in.) 240 0.46 110.4 0.9 8640 78 0.82 0.90
120 0.92 110.4 0.9 8640 78 0.82 0.90
1 EC5 T555 J UNV 1 J 277 0.20 55.4 0.9 4320 70 1.62 0.89
240 0.23 55.2 0.9 4320 70 1.63 0.90
120 0.46 55.2 0.9 4320 70 1.63 0.90
FT50 2 EC5 T550 J UNV 2 J 277 0.36 99.7 1.0 8000 80 1.00 1.00
(22.5 in.) 240 0.42 100.8 1.0 8000 79 0.99 0.99
120 0.84 100.8 1.0 8000 79 0.99 0.99
1 EC5 T550 J UNV 1 J 277 0.20 55.4 1.0 4000 72 1.81 0.90
240 0.23 54.0 1.0 4000 72 1.85 0.93
120 0.45 54.0 1.0 4000 74 1.85 0.93
FT40 2 EC5 T540 J UNV 2 J 277 0.27 74.8 1.0 6200 83 1.34 1.07
(22.5 in.) 240 0.32 76.8 1.0 6200 81 1.30 1.04
120 0.64 76.8 1.0 6200 81 1.30 1.04
1 EC5 T540 J UNV 1 J 277 0.16 44.3 1.0 3100 70 2.26 0.90
240 0.18 43.2 1.0 3100 72 2.31 0.93
120 0.36 43.2 1.0 3100 72 2.31 0.93
FT39 2 EC5 T536 J UNV 2 J 277 0.26 72.0 1.0 5700 79 1.39 1.00
FT36 240 0.31 73.2 1.0 5700 78 1.37 0.98
(15.5 in.) 120 0.61 73.2 1.0 5700 78 1.37 0.98
1 EC5 T536 J UNV 1 J 277 0.14 38.8 1.0 2850 74 2.57 0.93
240 0.17 39.6 1.0 2850 72 2.53 0.91
120 0.33 39.6 1.0 2850 72 2.53 0.91
Job Number:
Notes:
P10-68755

EcoSystem Ballast Case Dimensions
G Case
A
B
C D
E
G Case Dimensions
A = 9.5 in. (241 mm)
B = 8.9 in. (226 mm)
C = 7.1 in. (180 mm)
D = 1.0 in. (25 mm)
E = 2.38 in. (60 mm)
G case ballasts ship with 36 in. leads for lamp connections

and 18 in. leads for Hot, Neutral, E1 and E2 connections
J Case
A
B
C D
E
J Case Dimensions
A = 18.0 in. (457 mm)
B = 17.68 in. (449 mm) F
C = 6.82 in. (173 mm)
D = .394 in. (10 mm)
E = 1.0 in. (25 mm)
F = 1.18 in. (30 mm)
Job Number:
Notes:
P10-68755

EcoSystem Ballast Wiring Diagrams - T8, T5, T5 HO
Wiring to One Lamp (J case shown)

Blue
BLU
BLU
Red
RED
RED
Wiring to Two Lamps (J case shown)

Blue
BLU
BLU
YEL Yellow
YEL
RED
RED Red

Blue
BLU
BLU
YEL
YEL
Yellow
N/C
N/C
Red
RED
RED

Blue
BLU
BLU
YEL
YEL
Yellow
Striped
B/W
B/W
Red
RED
RED
NOTICE
Job Number:
Notes:
P10-68755

EcoSystem Ballast Wiring Diagrams - T5 Twin-Tube
Wiring to One Lamp
BLU
BLU Blue
Red
RED
RED
Wiring to Two Lamps

Blue
BLU
BLU
Yellow
YEL
YEL
Red
RED
RED
NOTICE
Job Number:
Notes:
P10-68755


EcoSystem Bus
EcoSystem Bus Overview

• The EcoSystem Bus wiring (E1 and E2) connects NEU
277 V~
DH
the digital ballasts together to form a lighting control HOT
system
Class 2
E1
Bus
• Each EcoSystem Bus supports up to 64 digital E2
ballasts, 32 occupant sensors, 8 daylight sensors, Ballast Terminals

and 64 wallstations or IR receivers
• E1 and E2 (EcoSystem bus wires) are polarity
insensitive and can be wired in any topology
• An EcoSystem Bus Supply provides power for the
• All EcoSystem Bus programming is completed by
NEU
using the EcoSystem Programmer
277 V~
DH
HOT
EcoSystem Bus Wiring
Class 2
E1
Bus
E2
• Ballast EcoSystem Bus terminals only accept one
#18 AWG solid wire Ballast Terminals
• Make sure that the supply breaker to the Digital Ballast To the EcoSystem
and EcoSystem Bus Supply is OFF when wiring Bus Supply & up
• Connect the two conductors to the two Digital Ballast to 64 total ballasts
practices
Notes
• E1 and E2 wires are not polarity sensitive

#12 AWG 2200 ft. (670 m)
#14 AWG 1400 ft. (427 m)
#16 AWG 900 ft. (274 m)
Job Number:
Notes:
P10-68755

EcoSystem Ballast Wiring: Fixture Manufacturers:

Class 2 Sensors • UL 1598 6.17.1 allows:
Factory installed power limited wiring and branch
Electrical Contractors and Engineers: circuit wiring that come in random contact within
the luminaire shall have insulation rated for the
• Always follow applicable national and local electrical
maximum voltage that exists in any of the circuits.
code requirements when connecting circuits to
(EcoSystem ballast circuits require minimum 600 V
EcoSystem devices
insulated wire)
• All field installed Class 2 wiring must be separated
• UL 1598 6.17.2.1 requires:
from line voltage wiring by at least 0.25 in. (6.4 mm)
Luminaires designed for the field installation of
• Some local electrical codes require Class 2 wiring to
power limited circuits shall be provided with a
be separately routed in a metal conduit
means of segregating or separating the field-installed
• Ballasts Class 2 Sensor terminals only accept
power limited circuit wiring from the branch circuit
#22 AWG solid conductors
wiring within the luminaire (see UL 1598 6.17 for
Lutron Requires: details)
• Keep class 1 and class 2 wiring separate. Lutron Requires:

• Keep class 1 and class 2 wiring separate
• Refer to Application note #142 for additional
information
Job Number:
Notes:
P10-68755


Daylight Sensor
Wiring to a Daylight Sensor G Case Terminals

• Sensor wiring summary:
277 Volt
NEU
DH
SH
Bus
Class 2
E1
Red +20 V Red E2
Black Common Black

White IR White +20V
Yellow Daylight Yellow Common

IR
Occ
Daylight
Ballast is OFF when wiring. #22 AWG solid only
• Connect the four conductors to the four Digital
Ballast terminals as shown.
• Daylight sensor must be placed within 50 ft. (15 m) Daylight Sensor
of the ballast.
solid wire.
Notes Class 2
(#22 AWG Solid)
J Case Terminals
Common
• Consult the daylight sensor specification sheet to
Daylight
+20V
Occ
properly locate the sensor.
IR
• Do not place the sensor above pendant fixtures,
directly below lighting fixtures, or within skylight
wells.
• When wiring both a wallstation and daylight sensor
to one ballast, only connect the IR wire (white) from
the keypad, cap off the white wire from the daylight
sensor.
#22 AWG solid only
applicable national and local codes for proper circuit
separation and protection. Daylight Sensor
Job Number:
Notes:
P10-68755


Occupancy Sensor
G Case Terminals
Wiring to a Lutron Occupant Sensor (LOS-XX)
277 Volt
• Sensor wiring summary: NEU
DH
SH
Bus
Class 2
E1
E2
Red +20 V Red
Black Common Black

+20V
Blue Occ Blue Common
IR
Occ
Daylight
Ballast is OFF when wiring #22 AWG solid only
• Connect the three conductors to the three ballast
terminals as shown Occupant
• Occupant sensor must be placed within 50 ft. (15 m) Sensor
of the ballast
solid wire
Notes
Class 2
• Occupant sensors from other manufacturers may be J Case Terminals

(#22 AWG Solid)
Common
Daylight
used with EcoSystem ballasts if the sensor meets
+20V
Occ
IR
the following criteria:
Vin = +20 V , current draw less than 35 mA
• If other manufacturer’s occupant sensors are used
terminal colors and sensor wire colors may not
match
separation and protection. Occupant
Sensor
Job Number:
Notes:
P10-68755

EcoSystem Ballast Wiring Diagrams

(continued) G Case Terminals
Wiring to an IR Receiver and Wallstation
277 Volt
NEU
DH
SH
• Wiring summary:
Bus
Class 2
E1
E2

+20V
Red +20 V Red
Common
Black Common Black IR
Occ
White IR White Daylight
• Make sure that the supply breaker to the Digital #22 AWG solid only
• Connect the three conductors to the three Digital
Ballast terminals as shown IR Receiver
• Receiver must be placed within 50 ft. (15 m) of the
ballast
solid wire J Case Terminals
Class 2
(#22 AWG Solid)
Common
Daylight
+20V
Occ
IR
Notes
• Only one wallstation or IR receiver can be wired to a
digital ballast
• If a daylight sensor and wallstation/IR receiver are
connected to one ballast, do not connect the
daylight sensor’s IR output
separation and protection.
IR Receiver
Wires to Digital Ballast
Wallstation
Job Number:
Notes:
P10-68755


Multiple Devices
Multiple Sensors with One Ballast

• EcoSystem ballasts accept wiring for one daylight Class 2
J Case Terminals (#22 AWG Solid)
Common
sensor input, one occupant sensor input and one IR
Daylight
+20V
Occ
input (wallstation or IR receiver)
IR
• EcoSystem daylight sensors have IR outputs that
allow the device to operate as a programming port.
In applications where a daylight sensor and
wallstation are wired to the same ballast, do not
connect the white wire of the daylight sensor to
the ballast. The wallstation operates as the
programming port through its integral IR receiver
• Use the chart below as a guide for wiring multiple
devices to a ballast
How to Use the Chart

Connect a senor to a ballast from the “Devices” column (in bold). Along
the selected device row, are “Y’s” and “N’s”. Where a “Y” is placed, the
device at the top of that column can also be connected to the same
ballast. An “N” indicates no connection allowed.
Devices Daylight Occupant Wallstation Daylight
sensor sensor or Sensor
(with IR) IR receiver (no IR)
Daylight sensor
(with IR) Y N N
Occupant
sensor Y Y Y
Wallstation or
IR Receiver N Y Y
Daylight sensor
(no IR) N Y Y
Example: When a Daylight Sensor with its internal IR are connected to
a ballast, then only an occupancy sensor can be added for the system
to properly function.
Job Number:
Notes:
P10-68755


Line Voltage Dimmers
EcoSystem Ballasts and 3-wire dimmers NEU
277 V~
DH
• Lutron 3-wire dimmers only control the ballast they HOT
are wired to; EcoSystem does not support grouping
Class 2
E1
Bus
E2
Orange
of 3-wire control input.
White
Black
Hot / Black
3-Wire Control Wiring
• Make sure that the supply breaker to the Digital Neutral
Ballast is OFF when wiring. White
NEU
277 V~
• Wire as shown DH
HOT
Yellow
Class 2
Line input Connects to E1
Bus
E2
Hot Dimmer Black Wire

LUTRON
Red
Dimmer wire Connects to

Red Ballast Black (HOT) Green
White Ballast White (NEU)
3-Wire Dimmer
Green Earth Ground
Ground
• EcoSystem ballast line voltage and 3-wire input

terminals only accept one #18 AWG solid wire. Notice
3-Wire control turns off digital ballasts when the
Emergency and 3-wire control is in the off position. The digital ballast
• EcoSystem ballasts controlled by a wallbox dimmer inputs: daylight sensor, wallstation, occupant sensor,
should not be used for emergency/egress lighting and IR receiver will not function when the digital
unless an external emergency ballast is used in the ballast is turned off
fixture. See Lutron Ap. Note #50.
• EcoSystem ballasts may be used for emergency/
egress lighting when controlled by a Lutron dimming
panel (GP); where the panel is a dedicated
emergency panel.
Job Number:
Notes:
P10-68755

Attention Electricians and

Fixture Manufacturers
Ballast/Socket Leads Lamp Seasoning

Lead lengths from ballast to socket must not exceed Consult lamp manufacturer’s recommendations on
7 ft. (2 m) for linear lamps (T5, T5HO, T8). Lead lamp seasoning prior to dimming
lengths must not exceed 3 ft. for T5 twin tube
lamps. Further Information
For further information please visit
Lamp Sockets
www.lutron.com/ecosystem or contact our 24-hour
Lamp sockets as per IEC 60400 are required to Technical Support Center at 1-800-523-9466
ensure positive lamp-pin to socket contact.
Mounting for T5 and T5HO Lamps

Mounting for T8 & T5 Twin Tube Lamps

Having a lamp too close to the grounded metal will
reduce lamp life. Having a fluorescent lamp too far
away from the grounded metal will make the lamp
flicker or not turn on at all.
Job Number:
Job Name: SL20-2/39BX-DRA-CB-XX"-
NAVFAC Bldg 157 & 210 FINISH-VOLTAGE
Notes:
P10-68755
Job Name: 2200-DRS-4000-99M-062-DM-IN-
NAVFAC Bldg 157 & 210 SM1
Notes:
P10-68755
LUNERA 2200 LED

2FT X 2FT GRID LAY-IN LUMINAIRE

INTENDED USE
The LuneraTM 2200 is an ultra thin architectural lay-in luminaire for office, school, hospital, and other
commercial applications. It generates soft, voluminous light that is ideal for a range of applications.
The uniform luminance across the light panel allows the fixture to be placed without it being a source
of glare. It does all in an aesthetically pleasing fixture package.
Utlizing superior quality LEDs, Lunera achieves greater output and efficiency producing high color
rendering and extended lifetime performance.
Lunera fixtures are manufactured in the US using clean manufacturing standards including ROHs
compliancy.
FEATURES
THE L UNER A 2200 IS A DIRECT REPL ACEMENT FOR 2’ X 4’ TROFFERS IN COMMERCIAL SPACES .
s 3,845 lumens
s 62 watts
s .62 watts/ sq. ft. (typical)
s Smooth continuous dimming (0-10 volt)
s Color temp: 4000K, 5000K
s 5 Year Warranty
s 85+ CRI
s Easily remotable power supply
s LM-80 tested LEDs
s LM-79 tested luminaire
CONSTRUCTION
Solid design, precision tooling and exacting quality control create a commercial LED fixture that
meets the industry’s needs and requirements.
Anodized aluminum extrusion with acrylic layers, tested and proven LEDs and a solid state power
supply.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ACCESSORIES
Standard driver is high efficiency, solid-state with smooth dimming available.

HANGING GARAGE MOUNT SURFACE MOUNT BAT TERY
Choose 120V 50/60Hz or 277V 50/60Hz. HARDWARE BACKUP
HS1: HANGNG GM1: GARAGE SM1: SURFACE 1BB: BAT TERY

HARDWARE MOUNT MOUNT BACKUP
(8 F T) NA: NONE NA: NONE NA: NONE
M A N U FACT U R E D NA: NONE
IN THE U.S.
ORDERING
PL ATFORM DIRECTIONAL FRAME CCT VOLTAGE WAT TAGE CONTROL PSU
2200 DR S 062
2200 DR: DIRECT S: SILVER 4000: 4000K 120V: 120 VOLTS 062: 62 WAT TS SS: STANDARD IN: INTEGRATED
5000: 5000K 277V: 277 VOLTS SWITCH RE: REMOTE
999M: MULTI VOLT DM: 0-10V DIM (OPEN BAY )
INSTALL ATION INSTRUCTIONS, LM-79 TESTING, AND IES FILES AVAIL ABLE ONLINE AT W W W.LUNERA.COM
Notes:
P10-68755
LUNERA 2200 GRID LAY-IN FIXTURE
SPECIFICATIONS PHOTOMETRICS
ZONAL LUMEN SUMMARY INTENSIT Y (CANDLEPOWER ) SUMMARY

U #$ K#/1 9 V / 3I C4I
3AT3I 8&% .- .- 3I ."% ."%

3AC3I -%8 . . 4I ." .".

! "
3A=3I .8%% 28W& 28W& ;4I .% .%"
#$ %&"
3A83I %-"- <4I & &&
'(
)*+, -.
T4I ;3&2 8"
$$
/0
C4I 8% 8%&
#1
)#23, 4353336$
44I 2;= 2<3
+
7 89
=4I C23 C2T
:
;<3:43*=36><22:43*=36>
'
24I .% .%"
+ $ -.?
&4I 8 "
@53A;3:5' =38=/B'
83I
@$$)6B?B@, <CDB<CDB;D
?0 ;CE$
6$ /F>F/
G$ G
HF/
0$
$$
F
F$>FF);4*;=58*;=
1
0
,
G

A;4I;<<IJF)A<=I 43I ,
6F <3KA&4KL65AF$
BL#0$ ;4M

5;33M
N

E

P#! P#! '#!

A
O 1

P$
Q
F$F5L6

( 'N @
F@

#'@
$$ #23L
F435333J0$RS;T3 I)<==I,
SURFACE MEASUREMENTS
8X8 8 X 10 10 X 10 10 X 12 12 X 12
FOOT CANDLES 53 46 37 31 24
LPD 1.03 0.78 0.62 0.52 0.43
DIMENSIONS & MOUNTING
POWER CONSUMPTION
23 13/16” 1.063 1 3/16”
62 watts
OUTPUT
23 13/16”
3,845 lumens
EFFICACY
62 Lm/W
Lunera Lighting, Inc | For more info, contact us at info@lunera.com | www.lunera.com |

T 650-241-3875 | F 650-362-1987 | 3696 Haven Avenue, Suite A, Redwood City, CA 94063
© 2010 LuneraTM Lighting, Inc. All Rights Reserved PID# 10-9.L3.DO1 RE V A
Notes:
P10-68755
LUNERA 2200 LED

2FT X 2FT PARKING GARAGE FIXTURE
INTENDED USE
The 2250 is an LED fixture designed for indoor parking facilities. Using LED technology, it gener-
ates uniform light that is ideal for the energy efficient parking garage. The uniformity across the light
panel allows the fixture to be placed without it being a source of glare. It is a fully closed system that
is maintenance free.
Utlizing superior quality LEDs and state of the art engineering design, Lunera achieves greater out-
put efficiency and extended lifetime performance.
FEATURES
s 3,840 lumens
s 62 watts
s .085 watts/ sq. ft. (typical)
s Controllable (0-10 volt)
s Damp Rated
s 5000K color temperature
POWER CONSUMPTION
s Easily remotable power supply
s 5 Year Warranty
s
s
s
85+ CRI
LM-80 tested LEDs
LM-79 tested luminaire
62 watts
OUTPUT
CONSTRUCTION
Solid design, precision tooling and exacting quality control create a commercial LED fixture that
exceeds industry requirements and delivers the full potential of LED technology.
Aluminum extrusion with acrylic layers, tested and proven LEDs and a solid state power supply.
3,845 lumens
FINISH
Anodized aluminum encasing with various custom finishes available.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Standard driver is high efficiency, solid-state with smooth dimming available.
Choose 120V 50/60Hz or 277V 50/60Hz.
DIMENSIONS & MOUNTING
23.3”
23.3” 4.0”
INSTALL ATION INSTRUCTIONS, LM-79 TESTING, AND IES FILES AVAIL ABLE ONLINE AT W W W.LUNERA.COM
Lunera Lighting, Inc | For more info, contact us at info@lunera.com | www.lunera.com |

T 650-241-3875 | F 650-362-1987 | 3696 Haven Avenue, Suite A, Redwood City, CA 94063
© 2010 LuneraTM Lighting, Inc. All Rights Reserved PID# 10-9.L3.DO1 RE V A
Job Name: SDPS6LED4-35K-8-277V-
NAVFAC Bldg 157 & 210 LUTRON 3D HILUME DIMMING
Notes:
P10-68755
DATE: TYPE:
Pendalum™
FIRM NAME:
SDPS6LED4 PROJECT:
6" Surface Mount
LED Pendant
High Output
120V, 277V For conversion to millimeters,
multiply inches by 25.4
Not to Scale
APPLICATIONS: temperatures and drive currents at or below

Prescolite’s Pendalum series of luminaires manufacturer's requirements per IESNA- 31/16"
1
3 16
provides specifiers with a superior alternative LM-80-08 test data.

to traditional low bay fixtures and cylinders.
Optics: Vacuum metalized injection molded
The Pendalum™ collection is ideal for a
optical reflector features (10) parabolic LED
wide variety of applications including retail
modules with Prescolite’s patent pending
stores, commercial offices, schools, grocery
American Matte™ finish to produce uniform
stores, restaurants, and airport terminals.
illumination. Also available in spot, medium,
FIXTURE CONSTRUCTION: or wide distribution to best fit higher ceiling
Decorative diecast aluminum heat sink with applications. 177/8"
17 7
8
decorative 52º hang-straight canopy/driver

Reflector/light engine assembly attaches with
compartment and 17 7/8" x 1/2" I.P. stem.
a single tamper resistant screw (tool provided) 293/4"
29 3
Painted surfaces feature durable powder

4
for added security and ensures ceiling

coat finish in Zet (metallic silver), White,
appearance free of sagging throughout life of
or Black.
the product.
REFLECTOR:
LED DRIVER:
High purity spun aluminum reflector with
iridescence suppressed Alzak anodized Energy efficient solid state constant current
finish in a variety of colors. electronic driver with 50,000 hour minimum
anticipated life. Meets UL Class 2, inherent
LED LIGHT ENGINE:
short-circuit protection, self limited, overload 87/8"
87
8
High output LED light engine equipped with

protected.
(10) high brightness white LEDs (2700K,
3500K, 4000K, or 5000K) on a metal clad INSTALLATION:
circuit board. Secured to an integral die Luminaire mounts to standard J-box.
cast aluminum heat sink for excellent thermal LABELS:
management. System designed for optimal CSA C/US listed. Suitable for
3
55.750
/4"
life and lumen maintenance (50,000 hours damp location under covered ceiling.
at 70% average lumen maintenance*).
*LED life calculations are based upon
maintaining application LED junction
CATALOG NUMBER: EXAMPLE: SDPS6LED435K7DM Z
FIXTURES LED COLOR TEMP. CRI BEAM ANGLE VOLTAGE REFLECTOR FINISH REFLECTOR COLOR FIXTURE FINISH
❑ SDPS6LED4 ❑ 27K ❑7 ❑ Blank ❑ Blank ❑ Blank ❑ Blank ❑ Z
(1) 6" Pendant 2700 Kelvin Nominal Vacuum metalized 120V Specular Clear Alzak Zet (metallic
Mount Surface ❑ 35K 70+ CRI reflector with 45º ❑ 277V ❑ SS ❑ CG silver)
High Output LED 3500 Kelvin ❑ 8 cutoff 120/277V Semi-Specular Champagne ❑ BL
Luminaire ❑ 40K Nominal ❑ SP18 Gold Alzak Black
4000 Kelvin 80+ CRI Lensed optic ❑ BL ❑ WH
with 18º spot Black Alzak White
❑ 50K
distribution
5000 Kelvin ❑ WE
❑ MD25 Wheat Alzak
Lensed optic
❑ LW
with 25º medium
Light Wheat
distribution
Alzak
LUTRON 3D HI-LUME ❑ FL35
❑ PW
DIMMING Lensed optic
Pewter Alzak
with 35º wide
distribution
In a continuing effort to offer the best product possible we reserve the right to change, without
notice, specifications or materials that in our opinion will not alter the function of the product.
A Division of Hubbell Lighting, Inc. Web: www.prescolite.com t Tech Support: (888) 777-4832 ALUM-PLM-014
Notes:
P10-68755
Alūm - SDPS6LED4 - 6" Surface

PHOTOMETRIC DATA Mount LED Pendant
DRIVER DATA SDPS6LED4 SDPS6LED4 277V LUMEN MULTIPLIER

Input Voltage 120V +/- 10% 120/277V +/- 10% 2700K 3500K 4000K 5000K
Input Frequency 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 70+ CRI 1.06 1.13 1.20 1.41
Input Current 0.235A (0.4A max) 0.23A/0.13A $3* #BTFMJOF
Input Power 28W (34W max) 27.5/28.5 W
Constant Current Output 1400mA 1400mA Note: Multipliers shown are based on LED manufacturer data
and can be used to approximate the lumen intensity of a fixture
1PXFS'BDUPS ö with different LED color temperature and/or CRI with identical
THD <20% <20% optical configuration and reflector finish. For reference only.
EMI Filtering FCC 47CFR FCC 47CFR
Part 15, Class A Part 15, Class B
Operating Temperature -40ºC to 60ºC -40ºC to 60ºC
Over-voltage, over-current, short-circuit protected
SDPS6LED435K8 BL ZONAL LUMEN SUMMARY LUMINANCE DATA IN CANDELA/

LED Light Engine: (10) LED Array 3500K Mid CRI SQ. METER
4ZTUFN8BUUBHF Angle in Vertical Average - 0º
'JYUVSFEFMJWFSFEMVNFOT 0-30 644 67.2
Fixture Efficacy: 34.3 45°
0-40 806 84.1
55° 4321
Spacing Criteria: 0.8 0-60
65°
100.0
90º 75° 252
0 0.0
85° 0
CANDELA DISTRIBUTION 0-180 100.0
75º
DEG CANDELA LUMENS COEFFICIENTS OF UTILIZATION Zonal Cavity Method
400 0 % Effective Floor Cavity Reflectance
Room Cavity
80% 70% 50% 30% 10%

60º 5 1047
Ratio
20% Effective Floor Cavity Reflectance

15 860 242
% Wall Reflectance
25 706 304 70 50 30 10 70 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10
800 35 251 162 1 113 110 108 105 111 108 106 104 104 102 101 100 99 98 97 96 95
2 107 102 98 94 105 100 96 93 97 94 91 94 91 89 91 89 87
45º 45 142 3 101 95 89 85 99 93 88 85 91 87 83 88 85 82 86 83 81
55 38 36 4 96 88 82 78 94 87 81 77 85 80 76 83 79 75 81 77 74
5 91 82 76 71 89 81 75 71 79 74 70 77 73 70 76 72 69
65 6 7 6 86 77 70 66 84 76 70 66 74 69 65 73 68 65 71 67 64
1200 75 1 1 7 81 72 65 61 80 71 65 61 70 64 60 68 64 60 67 63 60
8 77 67 61 57 76 67 61 57 66 60 56 65 60 56 64 59 56
15º 30º 85 0 0 9 73 63 57 53 72 63 57 53 62 57 53 61 56 53 60 56 52
0 10 70 60 54 50 69 59 54 50 59 53 50 58 53 49 57 53 49
5FTU/P SDPS6LED435K8 BL 5FTU/P
5FTUFEBU$"NCJFOUJOBDDPSEBODFUP*&4/"-.
SDPS6LED435K8FL35 BL ZONAL LUMEN SUMMARY LUMINANCE DATA IN CANDELA/

LED Light Engine: (10) LED Array 3500K Mid CRI with Flood Lens SQ. METER
Fixture Efficacy: 36.6 45° 4150
0-40
Spacing Criteria: 0.6 55°
0-60 1015
65° 1080
1023 100.0
90º 75° 504
0 0.0
85° 0
75º DEG CANDELA LUMENS COEFFICIENTS OF UTILIZATION Zonal Cavity Method
0 2100
Room Cavity
700 80% 70% 50% 30% 10%

5
Ratio
20% Effective Floor Cavity Reflectance

60º 15 1525 416 % Wall Reflectance
25 572 267 70 50 30 10 70 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10
1 114 112 109 107 112 110 108 106 106 104 102 102 101 99 98 97 97
1400 35 152 2 109 105 102 99 107 103 100 97 100 98 95 97 95 93 95 93 91
45 45 34 3 105 99 95 91 103 98 94 91 95 92 89 93 90 88 91 89 87
4 101 94 89 86 99 93 89 85 91 87 84 89 86 83 87 84 82
45º 55 14 5 5 97 89 84 81 95 88 84 80 87 83 80 85 82 79 84 81 78
65 7 6 6 93 85 80 76 91 84 80 76 83 79 76 82 78 75 80 77 75
7 89 81 76 72 88 81 76 72 79 75 72 78 74 72 77 74 71
75 2 2 8 86 78 73 69 85 77 72 69 76 72 69 75 71 68 74 71 68
2100 9 83 74 69 66 82 74 69 66 73 69 66 72 68 65 71 68 65
85 0 1
10 80 71 66 63 79 71 66 63 70 66 63 69 65 63 69 65 63
15º 30º 0
SDPS6LED435K8FL35 BL 5FTU/P
5FTU/P
NOTES: Refer to www.prescolite.com for additional photometric tests (IES Files).

$PQZSJHIUª1SFTDPMJUF *OD BEJWJTJPOPG)VCCFMM-JHIUJOH *OD"MM3JHIUT3FTFSWFE
Specifications subject to change without notice. t Printed in U.S.A. t ALUM-PLM-014 t
Notes:
P10-68755
Alūm - SDPS6LED4 - 6" Surface

PHOTOMETRIC DATA Mount LED Pendant
SDPS6LED435K8MD25 BL ZONAL LUMEN SUMMARY LUMINANCE DATA IN CANDELA/

LED Light Engine: (10) LED Array 3500K Mid CRI with Medium Lens SQ. METER
'JYUVSFEFMJWFSFEMVNFOT 0-30
'JYUVSF&GmDBDZ 45° 3781
0-40 1038
55°
Spacing Criteria: 0.4 0-60 1085
65° 1235
90º 100.0
75° 252
0 0.0
85° 748
75º CANDELA DISTRIBUTION 0-180 100.0
DEG CANDELA LUMENS
1350
0 4020 COEFFICIENTS OF UTILIZATION Zonal Cavity Method
60º 5 3614 % Effective Floor Cavity Reflectance
Room Cavity
15 1566 435 80% 70% 50% 30% 10%
Ratio
2700 % Wall Reflectance
35 114 75
70 50 30 10 70 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10
45º 45 41 31 1 114 112 110 108 112 110 108 106 106 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97
2 110 106 103 100 108 104 101 99 101 99 97 98 96 95 96 94 93
55 17 16
3 106 101 97 93 104 99 96 93 97 94 91 95 92 90 92 90 88
65 8 7 4 102 96 92 88 100 95 91 88 93 89 87 91 88 86 89 87 85
4050 5 98 92 87 84 97 91 87 83 89 85 83 88 84 82 86 83 81
75 1 3 6 95 88 83 80 94 87 83 80 86 82 79 85 81 79 83 80 78
15º 30º 85 1 1 7 92 85 80 77 91 84 80 76 83 79 76 82 78 76 81 78 75
8 89 81 77 74 88 81 77 73 80 76 73 79 76 73 78 75 73
0 9 86 79 74 71 85 78 74 71 77 73 71 77 73 70 76 73 70
5FTU/P 10 84 76 72 69 83 76 71 68 75 71 68 74 71 68 74 70 68
5FTUFEBU$"NCJFOUJOBDDPSEBODFUP*&4/"-. SDPS6LED435K8MD25 BL 5FTU/P
SDPS6LED435K8SP18 BL ZONAL LUMEN SUMMARY LUMINANCE DATA IN CANDELA/

LED Light Engine: (10) LED Array 3500K Mid CRI with Spot Lens SQ. METER
Fixture delivered lumens: 1182 0-30 1100
Fixture Efficacy: 42.36 45°
0-40 1147
Spacing Criteria: 0.2 55° 1137
0-60 1178
65° 463
90º 1182 100.0
75° 252
0 0.0
85° 748
75º
DEG CANDELA LUMENS
3500 COEFFICIENTS OF UTILIZATION Zonal Cavity Method
0 % Effective Floor Cavity Reflectance
5 6325 518
Room Cavity
60º 80% 70% 50% 30% 10%

Ratio

25 367 177 % Wall Reflectance
7000 35 71 46 70 50 30 10 70 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10
1 115 113 111 109 113 111 109 108 107 106 104 103 102 101 100 99 98
45º 45 32 23 2 111 108 105 102 109 106 103 101 103 101 99 100 98 97 98 96 95
3 108 103 100 97 106 102 99 96 100 97 95 97 95 93 95 93 92
55 10 4 105 99 96 93 103 98 95 92 96 93 91 95 92 90 93 91 89
65 3 3 5 102 96 92 89 100 95 91 89 93 90 88 92 89 87 91 88 86
6 99 93 89 86 98 92 88 86 91 88 85 90 87 85 88 86 84
10500 75 1 1 7 96 90 86 83 95 89 86 83 88 85 83 87 84 82 86 84 82
85 1 0 8 94 87 83 81 93 87 83 81 86 83 80 85 82 80 84 82 80
15º 30º 9 92 85 81 79 91 85 81 78 84 81 78 83 80 78 83 80 78
0 10 89 83 79 77 89 83 79 77 82 79 76 81 78 76 81 78 76
5FTU/P SDPS6LED435K8SP18 BL 5FTU/P
NOTES: Refer to www.prescolite.com for additional photometric tests (IES Files).

$PQZSJHIUª1SFTDPMJUF *OD BEJWJTJPOPG)VCCFMM-JHIUJOH *OD"MM3JHIUT3FTFSWFE
Specifications subject to change without notice. t Printed in U.S.A. t ALUM-PLM-014 t
Notes:
P10-68755
Fluorescent Dimming Ballasts Hi-lume® 3D Architectural Dimming

Hi-lume 3D 1 06.11.09
Hi-lume 3D Overview
Hi-lume 3D architectural electronic dimming ballasts

are designed to meet the most demanding lighting
requirements. By providing industry leading
performance with a full-range of 100% to less than 1%
fluorescent dimming, Hi-lume 3D ballasts enable you to
provide the ideal visual environment for any application.
Features
• Continuous, flicker-free dimming from 100% to
1% for T5 and 0.7% for T8 Hi-lume 3D, case type C
• Supports standard 3-wire line-voltage phase-control 1.18 in. W (30 mm) x 1.00 in. H (25 mm) x
technology for consistent fixture-to-fixture 18.00 in. L (457 mm)
dimming performance
• Compatible with EcoSystem® Bus control, GRAFIK
Eye® QS, and Quantum®, allowing for integration into
an existing/planned EcoSystem
• Models available for T5 and T8 lamps
• Programmed rapid start design preheats lamp
cathodes before applying full arc voltage to ensure
full-rated lamp life while dimming and cycling
• Lamps turn on to any dimmed level without
flashing to full brightness
dimming range maintains power quality
• Frequency of operation ensures that ballast
does not interfere with infrared devices operating
between 38 and 42 kHz
• Inrush current limiting circuitry eliminates circuit Hi-lume 3D, case type G
breaker tripping, switch arcing, and relay failure 2.38 in. W (60 mm) x 1.00 in. H (25 mm) x
• For linear lamps, ballasts maintain consistent 9.5 in. L (241 mm)
light output for different lamp lengths, ensuring
fixture uniformity
• Protected from miswires of any input power to
control lead, or from lamp leads to each other
and/or ground
• 100% compatible with all Lutron 3-wire fluorescent
controls and EcoSystem digital controls
• 5-year limited warranty with Lutron field service
commissioning (3-year standard warranty)
from date of purchase
Job Number:
Notes:
P10-68755

Hi-lume 3D 2 06.11.09
Performance • Relative humidity: less than 90% non-condensing
• Dimming Range: 100% to < 0.7% measured relative • Sound Rating: inaudible in a 27 dB ambient
light output (RLO) for T8 and 100% to 1% measured • Maximum ballast case temperature: 75 °C (167 °F)
relative light output for T5.
• Lamp Starting: programmed rapid start Standards
• Relative Humidity: maximum 90% noncondensing • California Energy Commission Listed
• Lamp Current Crest Factor: less than 1.7 • UL Listed (evaluated to the requirements of UL935)
• Lamp Flicker: none visible • CSA certified (evaluated to the requirements of
• Light Output Variation: constant ±2% light output for C22.2 No. 74)
line voltage variations of ±10% • Class P thermally protected
• Lamp Life: average lamp life meets or exceeds • Meets ANSI C82.11 High Frequency Ballast
rating of lamp manufacturer Standard
• Power Factor: greater than .95 • Meets FCC Part 18 Non-Consumer requirements
• Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): less than 10% for EMI/RFI emissions
• Maximum Inrush Current: 7 amps per ballast at • Meets ANSI C62.41 Category A surge protection
120 V, 3 amps per ballast at 277 V standards up to and including 6 kV
• Operating Voltage: Universal input 120/277 V • Manufacturing facilities employ ESD reduction
• Ballast Factor - 1.0/1.17 for T8 lamps and 1.0 for practices that comply with the requirements
T5 lamps of ANSI/ESD S20.20
• Lutron Quality Systems registered to ISO
9001.2000
Dimming Range for T5 lamps:
BF Dimming Range Dimming Ballast Wiring & Mounting
(Max/Min (BF) Ratio
1.0 1.00 / 0.01 100:1 • Ballast is grounded via a mounting screw to the
fixture
Dimming Range for T8 lamps: • Ballast mounts using two screws (or sheet metal
BF Dimming Range Dimming feature and one screw) within a fluorescent fixture.
(Max/Min (BF) Ratio • Power and lamp wiring terminals accept only one
1.17 1.17 / 0.0085 138:1 18 AWG solid wire per terminal
1.0 1.00 / 0.0085 118:1
Lamp Seasoning
Refer to your lamp company for lamp seasoning
requirements prior to dimming.
Job Number:
Notes:
P10-68755

Hi-lume 3D 3 06.11.09
Hi-lume 3D Ballasts for Linear and U-Bent T8 Lamps

Lamp Lamp Lamps Case Hi-lume 3D Input Ballast Ballast Input System System Ballast Relative
Type Watts per Size Voltage Current Factor Power Lumens* Efficacy* Efficacy System
(length) Ballast (VAC) (A) (BF) (W) (lm) (lm/W) Factor Efficacy
(BEF) (RSE)
T8 and 32 W 1 C H3D T832 C UNV 1 10 277 0.13 1.00 34.8 3000 86 2.87 0.92
U-Bent (48 in) 1 C 240 0.15 1.00 35.0 3000 86 2.85 0.91
1 C 120 0.30 1.00 35.1 3000 85 2.85 0.91
1 C H3D T832 C UNV 1 17 277 0.15 1.17 39.7 3510 88 2.95 0.94
1 C 240 0.17 1.17 40.0 3510 88 2.92 0.94
1 C 120 0.34 1.17 40.1 3510 88 2.92 0.93
2 C H3D T832 C UNV 2 10 277 0.24 1.00 65.7 6000 91 1.52 0.97
2 C 240 0.28 1.00 66.3 6000 90 1.51 0.97
2 C 120 0.58 1.00 66.5 6000 90 1.50 0.96
2 C H3D T832 C UNV 2 17 277 0.28 1.17 75.4 7020 93 1.55 0.99
2 C 240 0.31 1.17 76.5 7020 92 1.53 0.98
2 C 120 0.67 1.17 76.9 7020 91 1.52 0.97
3 G H3D T832 G UNV 3 10 277 0.37 1.00 93.5 9000 96 1.07 1.03
3 G 240 0.40 1.00 94.9 9000 96 1.05 1.01
3 G 120 0.83 1.00 95.4 9000 96 1.05 1.01
3 G H3D T832 G UNV 3 17 277 0.41 1.17 105.7 10,530 100 1.11 1.06
3 G 240 0.47 1.17 106.5 10,530 99 1.10 1.05
3 G 120 0.95 1.17 106.8 10,530 99 1.10 1.05
25 W 1 C H3D T825 C UNV 1 10 277 0.11 1.00 29 1900 65 3.44 0.86
(36 in) 1 C 240 0.12 1.00 29 1900 66 3.46 0.87
1 C 120 0.25 1.00 30 1900 64 3.34 0.84
1 C H3D T825 C UNV 1 17 277 0.12 1.17 34 2223 66 3.49 0.87
1 C 240 0.14 1.17 33 2223 67 3.53 0.88
1 C 120 0.29 1.17 34 2223 66 3.46 0.87
2 C H3D T825 C UNV 2 10 277 0.22 1.00 56 3800 68 1.79 0.89
2 C 240 0.24 1.00 56 3800 68 1.79 0.89
2 C 120 0.49 1.00 59 3800 64 1.69 0.85
2 C H3D T825 C UNV 2 17 277 0.24 1.17 62 4446 71 1.88 0.94
2 C 240 0.27 1.17 62 4446 72 1.89 0.95
2 C 120 0.55 1.17 64 4446 69 1.83 0.91
17 W 1 C H3D T817 C UNV 1 10 277 0.08 1.00 23 1300 57 4.37 0.74
(24 in) 1 C 240 0.09 1.00 23 1300 58 4.42 0.75
1 C 120 0.19 1.00 23 1300 57 4.39 0.75
1 C H3D T817 C UNV 1 17 277 0.09 1.17 25 1521 60 4.62 0.79
1 C 240 0.10 1.17 25 1521 60 4.62 0.79
1 C 120 0.20 1.17 26 1521 59 4.57 0.78
2 C H3D T817 C UNV 2 10 277 0.14 1.00 39 2600 67 2.58 0.88
2 C 240 0.16 1.00 38 2600 68 2.60 0.89
2 C 120 0.32 1.00 39 2600 66 2.56 0.87
2 C H3D T817 C UNV 2 17 277 0.15 1.17 42 3042 73 2.80 0.95
2 C 240 0.18 1.17 42 3042 73 2.81 0.95
2 C 120 0.36 1.17 43 3042 71 2.71 0.92
* Actual number may vary with lamp model. Please consult lamp manufacturer for lamp-specific data.
Job Number:
Notes:
P10-68755

Hi-lume 3D 4 06.11.09
Hi-lume 3D Ballasts for Linear T5 Lamps

Lamp Lamp Lamps Case Hi-lume 3D Input Ballast Ballast Input System System Ballast Relative
Type Watts per Size Voltage Current Factor Power Lumens* Efficacy* Efficacy System
(length) Ballast (VAC) (A) (BF) (W) (lm) (lm/W) Factor Efficacy
(BEF) (RSE)
T5 Linear 28 W 1 C H3D T528 C UNV 1 10 277 0.12 1.0 32.1 2900 89 3.07 0.86
(45.2 in) 1 C 240 0.13 1.0 32.2 2900 88 3.04 0.85
1 C 120 0.27 1.0 32.5 2900 88 3.04 0.85
2 C H3D T528 C UNV 2 10 277 0.23 1.0 64.1 5800 90 1.55 0.87
2 C 240 0.26 1.0 64.0 5800 89 1.54 0.86
2 C 120 0.54 1.0 65.0 5800 89 1.53 0.86
21 W 1 C H3D T521 C UNV 1 10 277 0.09 1.0 25.2 2100 83 3.97 0.83
(33.4 in) 1 C 240 0.10 1.0 24.9 2100 84 4.02 0.84
1 C 120 0.22 1.0 25.8 2100 81 3.88 0.81
2 C H3D T521 C UNV 2 10 277 0.18 1.0 48.6 4200 86 2.06 0.86
2 C 240 0.20 1.0 47.9 4200 88 2.09 0.88
2 C 120 0.41 1.0 49.2 4200 85 2.03 0.85
14 W 1 C H3D T514 C UNV 1 10 277 0.07 1.0 19.1 1350 71 5.24 0.73
(21.6 in) 1 C 240 0.08 1.0 18.5 1350 73 5.41 0.76
1 C 120 0.16 1.0 18.8 1350 72 5.32 0.74
2 C H3D T514 C UNV 2 10 277 0.13 1.0 35.4 2700 76 2.82 0.79
2 C 240 0.15 1.0 35.2 2700 77 2.84 0.80
2 C 120 0.29 1.0 35.3 2700 76 2.83 0.79
* Actual number may vary with lamp model. Please consult lamp manufacturer for lamp-specific data.
Job Number:
Notes:
P10-68755

Hi-lume 3D 5 06.11.09
Case Dimensions
C
A A 18.00 in (457 mm)
B
B
B 17.68 in (449 mm)
(mounting centers)
C 1.0 in (25 mm)
C
C D 1.18 in (30 mm)
D
D
G
A D
B A 9.5 in (241 mm)
C
B 8.9 in (226 mm)
(mounting centers)
C 7.1 in (180 mm)
D 1.0 in (25 mm)
E E 2.38 in (60 mm)
Job Number:
Notes:
P10-68755

Hi-lume 3D 6 06.11.09
Hi-lume 3D Dimmer Wiring

3-Wire Control Wiring NEU
LINE
DH
HOT
Orange
White
WARNING: Risk of electric shock.
Black
Class 2
E1
Bus
Disconnect power before servicing or E2
installing.

Neutral
• Wire as shown Hot / White
Black NEU
LINE
Line input: Connects to: DH
HOT
Hot Dimmer Black Wire Yellow
Class 2
E1
Bus
E2
LUTRON
Red
Dimmer wire: Connects to: Ground
Red Ballast Black (HOT)
Green
White Ballast White (NEU) 3-Wire Dimmer
Green Earth Ground
Ground
• Hi-lume 3D ballast line voltage and 3-wire input
terminals only accept one 18 AWG solid wire
Emergency and 3-wire

• Ballasts controlled by a wallbox dimmer should not
be used for emergency/egress lighting unless an
external emergency ballast is used in the fixture.
See Lutron App. Note #50.
• Ballasts may be used for emergency/egress light-
ing when controlled by a Lutron dimming panel (GP)
and the panel is a dedicated emergency panel.
Job Number:
Notes:
P10-68755

Hi-lume 3D 7 06.11.09
Hi-lume 3D Wiring Diagrams

EcoSystem® Bus Overview NEU
LINE
DH
• The EcoSystem Bus wiring (E1 and E2) connects HOT
the digital ballasts together to form a lighting control
Class 2
E1
Bus
system E2
• Each EcoSystem Bus supports up to 64 digital ballasts,

Ballast Terminals
32 occupant sensors, 8 daylight sensors, and
64 wallstations or IR receivers
• Sensors do not directly connect to Hi-lume 3D ballasts
• E1 and E2 (EcoSystem bus wires) are polarity insensitive
and can be wired in any topology
• An EcoSystem Bus Supply provides power for the NEU
LINE
DH
HOT
• All EcoSystem Bus programming is completed by using
the EcoSystem Programmer, GRAFIK Eye® QS with
Class 2
E1
Bus
E2
EcoSystem, or Quantum®
Ballast Terminals
EcoSystem Bus Wiring To the EcoSystem
• Ballast EcoSystem Bus terminals only accept one Bus Supply & up to
18 AWG solid wire 64 total ballasts
• Make sure that the supply breaker to the Digital Ballast
and EcoSystem Bus Supply is OFF when wiring
• Connect the two conductors to the two Digital Ballast
practices
Notes

12 AWG 2200 ft. (670 m)
14 AWG 1400 ft. (427 m)
16 AWG 900 ft. (274 m)
Job Number:
Notes:
P10-68755

Hi-lume 3D 8 06.11.09
Wiring to One Lamp (C case shown)
BLU
Blue
BLU
Red
RED
RED
Wiring to Two Lamps (C case shown)

Blue
BLU
BLU
Yellow
YEL
YEL
Red
RED
RED

Blue
BLU
BLU
YEL
YEL
Yellow
N/C
N/C
Red
RED
RED

BLU
Blue
BLU
YEL
YEL
Yellow
Striped
B/W
B/W
Red
RED
RED
NOTICE
Job Number:
Notes:
P10-68755

Hi-lume 3D 9 06.11.09
ATTENTION ELECTRICIANS ATTENTION

AND CONTRACTORS FACILITIES MANAGERS
Ballast/Socket Leads PERFORMANCE

Lead lengths from ballast to socket must not exceed Lamp Seasoning
7 ft. (2 m) for T5 and T8 linear lamps.
Consult lamp manufacturer’s recommendations on
Lamp Sockets lamp seasoning prior to dimming.
Lamp sockets as per IEC 60400 are required to

ensure positive lamp-pin to socket contact. SERVICE
Lamp Mounting Replacement Parts
Many fluorescent lamp sockets are available with Use replacement parts with exact Lutron model
mounting slots to vary the height of the lamp away numbers. Consult Lutron if you have any questions.
from the grounded metal surface. Use these slots
to get the lamp glass to be 1/2 in. ± 1/4 in. away Further Information
from the grounded metal surface for T8 lamps and
For further information, please visit us at
3/8 in. ± 1/8 in. for T5 lamps.
www.lutron.com/ballasts or contact our 24-hour
Having a fluorescent lamp too close to the grounded Technical Support Center at 1-800-523-9466.
metal will make the minimum intensity too low and
will reduce lamp life. Having a fluorescent lamp too
far away from the grounded metal will make the
lamp flicker or not turn on at all.
Ballast Operating Temperature

Ballast case temperature must not exceed 75 °C at
any point on ballast.
Wiring and Grounding

Ballast and lighting fixture must be effectively
grounded. Ballasts must be installed per national
and local electrical codes.
Job Number:
Job Name: LS-B1_502DR0-DIM
Notes:
P10-68755
TM
C-SERIES
Part Number
Heavy Duty LED Linear Suspended
Type Comment
Albeo’s LED linear fixture provides an
energy efficient, no maintenance
LM-79
alternative to traditional fluorescent
Tested
strip lights. Ideal for office,
commercial, industrial, and retail
applications. Albeo’s patent-pending
TEMPRTM Technology allows the LEDs
to run cooler than fluorescent and last
5 to 10 times longer with no
hazardous waste. One strip provides 4.6 ” 1.9 ”
light comparable to a two lamp
fluorescent fixture at 1/3 less power. Patents
Pending
Robust and Innovative Construction
Albeo’s TEMPRTM thermal management 7.0”
7.0”
technology transfers heat from the LED into the
rugged aluminum housing, reducing junction
temperature for more light and longer life.
Optical Advantage
Brightest and highest efficacy LEDs come in a
wide range of colors for almost any application.
Directional LEDs put more light where it’s Options
needed, greatly increasing efficiency. High value or brightness options provide solutions
for a wide range of applications.
Superior Performance
No flicker. No buzzing. Low power Easy Mounting
consumption. –10 to +110F operation. Standard chain, cable, or rod suspended. Designed
to be mounted individually or in continuous run.
Electrical System
120 or 277 VAC input. Robust magnetic Warranty
transformer included. Dimming capabilities. The Linear fixture is guaranteed for five years,
subject to Albeo’s standard terms and conditions.
Ordering Information Not all combinations available.
Product # of LED LED LED Input

Platform Model bars Length CCT Pitch Voltage Optics Mounting Options Revision
LS V 1 4 5 1 1 0 C 0 Rx
LS V High 1 1 bar 4 4 ft 4 5000°K 0 1 inch 1 120 V 0 Lens C Chain 0 None Used to
Value (bright) further
Linear 2 2 bars 5 4200°K 1 1
1.5
5 iinch
h 2 277 V 1 No Lens R Rod M Motion define
Suspended Sensor
B High (value) product
LED
Brightness 6 3500°K N Narrow configuration
Light Fixture V 0-10V
D Diffuser Dimming DIM-
DIMMING
For more options or custom configurations, please contact sales.

rev. 7.16.09
Industrial Strength LED Lighting 1. 866. 825. 5420

www.albeotech.com
Notes:
P10-68755
TM
C-SERIES
Optical and Electrical Specifications — 4ft versions
All options not listed. Please contact sales for technical specs of other part numbers.
Type Part Number Length Color Temp # of LEDs Lumens Watts Lumens/W
1-BAR VERSIONS
LS-V144-1x0xx-R4 4 ft Bright 5000 K 30 2000 29 75
LS-V145-1x0xx-R4 4 ft Cool 4200 K 30 1800 29 67
Value
LS-V145-1x0xx-R3 4 ft Cool 4200 K 30 2100 36 64

2-BAR VERSIONS
LS-V245-1x0xx-R4 4 ft Cool 4200 K 60 3600 58 62
LS-V245-1x0xx-R3 4 ft Cool 4200 K 60 4225 72 62
1-BAR VERSIONS
LS-B144-0x0xx-R4 4 ft Bright 5000 K 45 3000 44 75
LS-B145-0x0xx-R4 4 ft Cool 4200 K 45 2700 44 67
Bright
LS-B145-0x0xx-R5 4 ft Cool 4200 K 45 3175 54 67

2-BAR VERSIONS
LS-B245-0x0xx-R4 4 ft Cool 4200 K 90 5400 87 67
LS-B245-0x0xx-R5 4 ft Cool 4200 K 90 6350 108 67
Photometry Tested to LM-79 standards
Narrow Standard
Distribution Distribution
The Albeo LED Suspended Strip fixture must be installed by a qualified electrician. It is the
responsibility of the contractor, installer, purchaser, owner, and user to install, maintain, and
operate the fixture in such a manner as to comply with all state and local laws, ordinances,
regulations, and the American National Standards Institute Safety Code.
US Patents Pending
Specification subject to change without notice. See website for latest version.
rev. 7.16.09

www.albeotech.com
Notes:
P10-68755
TM
C-SERIES
Part Number
Type Comment
Albeo’s LED linear fixture provides an
energy efficient, no maintenance
LM-79
alternative to traditional fluorescent
Tested
strip lights. Ideal for office,
commercial, industrial, and retail
applications. Albeo’s patent-pending
TEMPRTM Technology allows the LEDs
to run cooler than fluorescent and last
5 to 10 times longer with no
hazardous waste. One strip provides 4.6 ” 1.9 ”
light comparable to a two lamp
fluorescent fixture at 1/3 less power. Patents
Pending
Robust and Innovative Construction
Albeo’s TEMPRTM thermal management 7.0”
7.0”
technology transfers heat from the LED into the
rugged aluminum housing, reducing junction
temperature for more light and longer life.
Optical Advantage
Brightest and highest efficacy LEDs come in a
wide range of colors for almost any application.
Directional LEDs put more light where it’s Options
needed, greatly increasing efficiency. High value or brightness options provide solutions
for a wide range of applications.
Superior Performance
No flicker. No buzzing. Low power Easy Mounting
consumption. –10 to +110F operation. Standard chain, cable, or rod suspended. Designed
to be mounted individually or in continuous run.
Electrical System
120 or 277 VAC input. Robust magnetic Warranty
transformer included. Dimming capabilities. The Linear fixture is guaranteed for five years,
subject to Albeo’s standard terms and conditions.
Ordering Information Not all combinations available.
For more options or custom configurations, please contact sales.

rev. 7.16.09

www.albeotech.com
Notes:
P10-68755
TM
C-SERIES
Optical and Electrical Specifications — 8ft versions
All options not listed. Please contact sales for technical specs of other part numbers.
Type Part Number Length Color Temp # of LEDs Lumens Watts Lumens/W
1-BAR VERSIONS
LS-V185-1x0xx-R4 8 ft Cool 4200 K 60 3600 58 67
Value
LS-V185-1x0xx-R3 8 ft Cool 4200 K 60 4225 72 64

2-BAR VERSIONS
LS-V285-1x0xx-R4 8 ft Cool 4200 K 120 7200 116 62
LS-V285-1x0xx-R3 8 ft Cool 4200 K 120 8450 144 62
1-BAR VERSIONS
LS-B185-0x0xx-R4 8 ft Cool 4200 K 90 5400 87 67
Bright
LS-B185-0x0xx-R5 8 ft Cool 4200 K 90 6350 108 67

2-BAR VERSIONS
LS-B284-0x0xx-R4 8 ft Bright 5000 K 180 12,000 175 75
LS-B285-0x0xx-R4 8 ft Cool 4200 K 180 10,800 175 67
LS-B284-0x0xx-R5 8 ft Bright 5000 K 180 14,150 216 71
LS-B285-0x0xx-R5 8 ft Cool 4200 K 180 12,700 216 67
Photometry Tested to LM-79 standards
Narrow Standard
Distribution Distribution
The Albeo LED Suspended Strip fixture must be installed by a qualified electrician. It is the
responsibility of the contractor, installer, purchaser, owner, and user to install, maintain, and
operate the fixture in such a manner as to comply with all state and local laws, ordinances,
regulations, and the American National Standards Institute Safety Code.
US Patents Pending
Specification subject to change without notice. See website for latest version.
rev. 7.16.09

www.albeotech.com
WOODWORKS ™ Ekos ®
Wall Systems
WoodWorks Ekos Wall System Perforated in Ekos Dark Cherry with Aluminum Accent Trim

• Rich, natural wood finishes • No detectable VOC emissions • Conference rooms
• Less expensive and easier to install than • Panels can be installed horizontally • Office
custom millwork or vertically • Retail and hospitality
• Standard system with variety of accessories • Higher education
• Can help contribute to LEED® credits with no- • Healthcare
added formaldehyde and high recycled content
Finish Selection Perforation Option (Actual 1:1 scale shown)

Due to printing limitations, shade may vary
from actual product.
Ekos Maple Ekos Light Cherry

(MP) (LC)
Ekos Dark Cherry Ekos Mahogany

(DC) (HG)
Type: Round-Staggered
Hole Size: 0.4mm [.015"]
% Open Area: 5.7%
Wall Systems
Acoustical Benefits
• Perforated Ekos panels absorb 50% of sound striking the surface

• Improves sound quality and reduces reverberation within a space
STC Ratings for Ekos added to Drywall
• STC levels increase as both perforated and unperforated Ekos panels are
added to standard drywall partitions
5/8" drywall on
• Reduces sound intrusion between spaces and increases speech privacy
Design 5/8" drywall on 3-5/8" metal studs
3-5/8" metal studs with R-11 Fiberglass
insulation in cavity
Standard STC 38 STC 44

drywall
only
One wall STC 43 STC 52

with Ekos
Both walls STC 46 STC 52

with Ekos
Mahogany Finish Molding Ekos Mahogany Perforated
and Bullnose Accent Trim (magnified view –
with perforated panels 5% open area per panel)
Sustainable Design*
Industry’s first wood wall system with:
Wood back veneer,
• Construction Waste Management, recyclable option through Armstrong unstained
Recycling Program, LEED® MR Credit 2.1-2
• 78% Recycled Content, LEED MR Credit 4.1-2 Perforated mineral fiber
substrate
• Regional Materials, LEED MR Credit 5.1-2
• 8.9% Rapidly Renewable Materials, LEED MR Credit 6.0 No-added
urea-formaldehyde
• Enhanced Acoustical Performance, LEED for Schools EQ Credit 9 adhesive
• Low Emitting Materials, no detectable formaldehyde, CHPS listing, LEED
for Schools EQ Credit 4-Option 6 No-solvent
coatings
* For more information on how Ekos Wall Systems meet sustainable design requirements, see Armstrong (face and back)
Wall Systems Formaldehyde sheet (CS-3839) and Wall Systems Sustainable Design sheet (CS-3840)
or visit armstrong.com/walls Wood face veneer,
stained finish
Kerfed on Veneer edge banding

long sides for spline on all sides
installation system
Versatile Accessories
• Decorative solid wood trims, corners, chair rails and moldings complement Ekos panel finishes
• Aluminum trims add an eclectic edge
• Consult WoodWorks Ekos brochure (CS-3826) for more accessory photos
Aluminum Reveal Accent Trim in Dark Cherry Chair Rail with Maple 6" Base Molding Dark Cherry Peak Corner
Natural Anodized Black Rail Insert
Recycled
Content: 78% armstrong.com/greengenie
™ ®
WOODWORKS Ekos LEED Credits
® LEED for Schools
Energy Waste Recycled Local Renewable Daylight Acoustics Low Emitting
Wall Systems Mgmt Content Materials Materials & Views or CHPS
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Location Dependent
Colors
Ekos Maple (MP) Ekos Dark Cherry (DC)
Ekos Light Cherry (LC) Ekos Mahogany (HG)
Visual Selection
Acoustics Recycling
NRC Rating Acoustics VOC Program
Ekos A D STC Rating Formal-
Item Number Description Dimensions Pcs/Ctn [#] Finishes [F*] Mounting 1 wall 2 walls dehyde
Unperforated Vertical Panels
5800_ _ _ 8' Ekos Vertical Wall Panel 96 x 24 x 5/8" 2 or 4 MP, LC, DC or HG N/A N/A 43 46 No added Yes
Unperforated
5801_ _ _ 9' Ekos Vertical Wall Panel 108 x 24 x 5/8" 2 or 4 MP, LC, DC or HG N/A N/A 43 46 No added Yes
Unperforated
5802_ _ _ Nominal 10' Ekos Vertical 118 x 24 x 5/8" 2 or 4 MP, LC, DC or HG N/A N/A 43 46 No added Yes
Wall Panel Unperforated
Perforated Vertical Panels

5803_ _ _ 8' Ekos Vertical Wall Panel 96 x 24 x 5/8" 2 or 4 MP, LC, DC or HG .45 .50 43 46 No added Yes
Perforated
5804_ _ _ 9' Ekos Vertical Wall Panel 108 x 24 x 5/8" 2 or 4 MP, LC, DC or HG .45 .50 43 46 No added Yes
Perforated
5805_ _ _ Nominal 10' Ekos Vertical 118 x 24 x 5/8" 2 or 4 MP, LC, DC or HG .45 .50 43 46 No added Yes
Wall Panel Perforated
Unperforated Horizontal Panels

5970_ _ _ 8' Ekos Horizontal Wall Panel 96 x 24 x 5/8" 2 or 4 MP, LC, DC or HG N/A N/A 43 46 No added Yes
Unperforated
5971_ _ _ 9' Ekos Horizontal Wall Panel 108 x 24 x 5/8" 2 or 4 MP, LC, DC or HG N/A N/A 43 46 No added Yes
Unperforated
5972_ _ _ Nominal 10' Ekos Horizontal 118 x 24 x 5/8" 2 or 4 MP, LC, DC or HG N/A N/A 43 46 No added Yes
Wall Panel Unperforated
Perforated Horizontal Panels

5973_ _ _ 8' Ekos Horizontal Wall Panel 96 x 24 x 5/8" 2 or 4 MP, LC, DC or HG .45 .50 43 46 No added Yes
Perforated
5974_ _ _ 9' Ekos Horizontal Wall Panel 108 x 24 x 5/8" 2 or 4 MP, LC, DC or HG .45 .50 43 46 No added Yes
Perforated
5975_ _ _ Nominal 10' Ekos Horizontal 118 x 24 x 5/8" 2 or 4 MP, LC, DC or HG .45 .50 43 46 No added Yes
Wall Panel Perforated
When specifying or ordering, please include pieces/ctn and color suffix. EXAMPLE: 58054HG = 4 nominal 10' perforated vertical panels in Ekos Mahogany finish
NOTE: When wall panels are selected, you must also select Wall Installation Splines
Physical Data
Panel Material Panel Weight Ekos wall panels are not recommended for use in
Mineral fiber with real wood veneers. Face veneers are 1.6 lbs/SF high-traffic or high-impact areas. For these areas,
quarter-cut, random-matched Anegre or Makore veneers Warranty contact Architectural Specialties at 1 877 ARMSTRONG
stained to the Ekos finishes. One (1) year limited warranty and select options 1-1-4 to explore WoodWorks
Panel Surface Finish Details: armstrong.com/warranty Custom wall systems.
Tinted, no-solvent coatings on face veneers.
Application Considerations Ekos wall panels may be installed horizontally.
Accessory Material Due to the natural characteristics of veneers, variations For more details, see installation instructions at
Milled solid wood stained to coordinate with Ekos in color and grain can be expected. Do not mix panels armstrong.com/ekos.
finishes. Extruded aluminum. from different lots. Veneered panels may also darken
Fire Performance over time.
Class B fire performance per IBC. Flame spread Rating It is very important that WoodWorks Ekos panels are
of 50 or less and Smoke Developed Classification of 100 climatized prior to installation. Relative humidity between
or less when tested per ASTM E84 or CAN/ULC S 102. 25% and 55% and temperatures between 50º F and 86º F
must be maintained.
Wall Systems
Accessories
Item Number Description Lengths [##] Finishes [F*] Material [M]
Decorative Accent Trims and Splines
5850_[##] [ F*]
5850A_ _ _ _ Peak Accent Trim 8' [08], 9' [09] or 9'-10" [10] MP, LC, DC or HG Solid Wood
5850B_ _ _ _ Bullnose Accent Trim 8' [08], 9' [09] or 9'-10" [10] MP, LC, DC or HG Solid Wood
5850C_ _ _ _ Reverse Bead Accent Trim 8' [08], 9' [09] or 9'-10" [10] MP, LC, DC or HG Solid Wood
5850D_ _ _ _ Bead Accent Trim 8' [08], 9' [09] or 9'-10" [10] MP, LC, DC or HG Solid Wood
5850J_ _ _ _ Cap Accent Trim 8' [08], 9' [09] or 9'-10" [10] NA or BL* Aluminum
5850K_ _ _ _ Reveal Accent Trim 8' [08], 9' [09] or 9'-10" [10] NA or BL* Aluminum
5858[##][M]
5858_ _ _ Wall Installation Spline (concealed) 8' [08], 9' [09] or 9'-10" [10] N/A Plastic [X] or
Aluminum [Y]
5860[##][M]
5860_ _ _ Wall Bead Installation Spline † 8' [08], 9' [09] or 9'-10" [10] N/A Plastic [X]
* Aluminum Accent Trims available in Natural Anodized (NA) or Black Anodized (BL) finishes
† This accessory should be used when Decorative Accent Trims are not selected.
NOTE: When a Decorative Accent Trim is selected, you must also choose a Wall Installation Spline.
EXAMPLES: 5850K08BL – 8' Reveal Accent Trim in Black Anodized; 585808Y – 8' Wall Installation Spline in Aluminum
Decorative Corners and Splines

585_[##] [ F*]
5851_ _ _ _ Peak Corner 8' [08], 9' [09] or 9'-10" [10] MP, LC, DC or HG Solid Wood
5852_ _ _ _ Bullnose Corner 8' [08], 9' [09] or 9'-10" [10] MP, LC, DC or HG Solid Wood
5853_ _ _ _ Reverse Bead Corner 8' [08], 9' [09] or 9'-10" [10] MP, LC, DC or HG Solid Wood
5854_ _ _ _ Chamfered Corner 8' [08], 9' [09] or 9'-10" [10] MP, LC, DC or HG Solid Wood
5859[##][M]
5859_ _ _ Corner Installation Spline (concealed) 8' [08], 9' [09] or 9'-10" [10] N/A Plastic [X] or
Aluminum [Y]
NOTE: When a Decorative Corner is selected, you must also choose a Corner Installation Spline
EXAMPLES: 585109DC – 9' Decorative Corner in Dark Cherry; 585909X – 9' Corner Installation Spline in Plastic
Moldings
585_[F*]
5855_ _ 4 Base Molding 8'- 4" [08] MP, LC, DC or HG Solid Wood
5856_ _ 6 Base Molding 8'- 4" [08] MP, LC, DC or HG Solid Wood
5857[##] [F*]
5857_ _ _ _ Finish Molding 8'- 4" [08], 9'- 4" [09] or 10'- 2" [10] MP, LC, DC or HG Solid Wood
5867_ _ Inside Corner Molding 8'- 4" MP, LC, DC, HG, XX* Solid Wood
EXAMPLE: 5855HG – 4" Base Molding in Mahogany

EXAMPLE: 585710HG – Nominal 10' Finish Molding in Mahogany
Chair Rail Accessories

586_[F*]
5861_ _ Mounting Rail 8'- 4" MP, LC, DC, HG, XX * Solid Wood
5863_ _ Rail Insert 8'- 4" MP, LC, DC, HG, BL, XX * Solid Wood
5963NA Rail Insert – 8'- 0" NA Solid Wood

Aluminum Finish and Aluminum
5864_ _ Rail Cap 8'- 4" MP, LC, DC, HG, XX * Solid Wood
5866_ _ Easel Ledge 8'- 4" MP, LC, DC, HG, XX * Solid Wood
* Insert two-letter color suffix for all Chair Rail item orders, except 5963NA. EXAMPLE: 5861HG – Mounting Rail in Mahogany
NOTE: XX is unfinished wood, which can be field-painted.

1 877 276 7876
armstrong.com/ekos LEED® is a registered trademark of the U.S. Green Building Council
CS-3842-509 © AWI Licensing Company, 2009 • Printed in the United States of America
3840 SustainableDesign_1008:CS-3460A SustainableDesign_3 11/4/08 1:17 PM Page 1
WALL SYSTEMS
Armstrong WoodWorks™ Ekos® Wall Systems

LEED® Credit Summary
SECTION I. PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION 3. To be prepared for emergencies and to act promptly
Product Name: Armstrong WoodWorks Ekos and responsibly to protect people and the environment
Wall Systems should accidents or incidents occur.
4. To make products that are environmentally safe in their
SECTION II. ENVIRONMENTAL POLICY intended use by our customers and consumers, and
Our overall goal is to make sure our activities as a to accompany them with adequate information for
corporation are in harmony with the natural world their proper use, maintenance and disposal.
around us. 5. To reduce waste, to make use of recycling in all our
The Armstrong policy on the environment embodies operations, and to take care that we dispose of unneeded
these aims: materials in an environmentally appropriate manner.
1. To exercise care in the selection, use and conservation
of energy and raw materials, especially natural SECTION III.
resources, to assure that we are not wasting such This credit summary is an overview of Armstrong
resources. WoodWorks Ekos Wall Systems contributions to the
2. To make use of research and production technology to LEED® Rating System. The credits apply to LEED for
provide for the environmental safety in workplaces and New Construction (LEED-NC), LEED for Existing
communities and to seek to reduce risk to the earth, its Buildings (LEED-EB), LEED for Commercial Interiors
waters and atmosphere. (LEED-CI) and LEED for Schools. For more information,
visit armstrong.com/ekos.
MATERIAL AND Intent: Divert construction, demolition, and land clearing debris from disposal in landfills
RESOURCES and incinerators. Redirect recovered resources back to the manufacturing process.
Redirect reusable materials to the appropriate sites.
MR Credit 2.1, 2.2 – Requirements: Recycle and/or salvage at least 50% or 75% (by weight or volume)
CONSTRUCTION of non-hazardous construction and demolition debris. Develop and implement a
WASTE MANAGEMENT – construction waste management plan quantifying material diversion goals.
(Divert 50% & 75% from
disposal) Armstrong is the first ceiling manufacturer with a closed-loop recycling program which redirects
recovered ceilings back to the manufacturing process. Armstrong WoodWorks Ekos Wall
Systems are integrated into this program. Please contact your Armstrong representative or our
Recycling Center at 1-877-276-7876 (Option 1-8) for more details on how this program can
help you meet this requirement. Walls or Ceilings must be combined with other items to
achieve this credit.
MR Credit 4.1, 4.2 – Intent: Increase the demand for building products that incorporate recycled content
RECYCLED CONTENT materials, thereby reducing impacts resulting from extraction and processing of virgin
(10% & 20% materials.
post-consumer + 1/2
Requirements: Use materials with recycled content such that the sum of the
pre-consumer)
post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of the pre-consumer (post-industrial)
content constitutes at least 10% or 20% of the total value of the materials in the project.
Armstrong WoodWorks Ekos Wall Systems contain 78% recycled content. See chart at
end for details. TechLine can supply the appropriate documentation needed for your LEED
submittal packet. For a more immediate response, be sure to access our Green Genie™ tool
at armstrong.com/greengenie. Armstrong products must be aggregated with all other
recycled content materials in order to achieve this credit.
MATERIAL AND Intent: Increase demand for building materials and products that are extracted and
RESOURCES (...cont.) manufactured within the region, thereby supporting the use of indigenous resources and
reducing the environmental impacts resulting from transportation.
MR Credit 5.1, 5.2 – Requirements: LEED NC – Use building products that have been extracted, harvested
REGIONAL MATERIALS or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles of the project site for minimum of
10% or 20% (based on cost) of the total materials value. If only a fraction of the product
LEED NC – 10% Extracted,
Processed & Manufactured is extracted, harvested or recovered and manufactured locally, then only that percentage
Regionally (by weight) shall contribute to the regional value.
LEED CI – 20% Manufactured LEED CI– Use a minimum of 20% of all construction and Division 12 (furniture) materials
Regionally and products that are manufactured regionally within a radius of 500 miles.
Contact TechLine to get regional materials documentation for these products for LEED MR
Credits 5.1 and 5.2. For a more immediate response, be sure to access our Green Genie tool
at armstrongcom/greengenie.
MR Credit 6.0 – RAPIDLY Intent: LEED NC – Reduce the use and depletion of finite raw materials and
RENEWABLE MATERIALS long-cycle renewable materials by replacing them with rapidly renewable materials.
LEED CI – Reduce the use and depletion of finite raw materials and long-cycle renewable
materials by replacing them with rapidly renewable materials.
Requirements: LEED NC – Use rapidly renewable building materials and products (made
from plants that are typically harvested within a ten-year cycle or shorter) for 2.5% of the total
value of all building materials and products used in the project, based on cost.
LEED CI – Use rapidly-renewable construction and Division 12 (Furniture and Furnishings)
materials and products, made from plants that are typically harvested within a 10-year or
shorter cycle, for 5% of the total value of all materials and products used in the project.
Armstrong WoodWorks Ekos Wall Systems contain 9% rapidly renewable content.
See chart at end for details. Armstrong products must be aggregated with all other
rapidly renewable content materials in order to achieve this credit.
INDOOR Intent: Reduce the quantity of indoor air contaminants that are odorous, irritating and/or
ENVIRONMENTAL harmful to the comfort and well-being of installers and occupants.
QUALITY Requirements: All of the adhesives and sealants used in the building must meet the
requirements of the South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule #1168.
EQ Credit 4.1 to 4.5 – Interior paints and coating applied on-site must meet the limitations and restrictions
LOW-EMITTING concerning chemical components set by several standards. Carpets must meet the Green
MATERIALS Label Plus testing and product requirements.
LEED NC – Composite Wood & These credits pertain to adhesives & sealants, paints, carpets and composite wood.
Agrifiber Products Mineral Fiber Ceilings, Walls and Suspension Systems do not fit in any of the product
categories designated in this credit. Please note, however, that many of our products do
meet the State of Washington and California Section 01350 requirements for low emissions.
For additional information, refer to “Formaldehyde Emissions & Interior Spaces – What You
Need To Know About Choosing Wood Wall Systems,” CS-3839. See the sustainability
table on the back page for emissions information.
Low emitting products can be used as a possible innovation credit.
2
LEED FOR Intent: Provide classrooms that are quiet in which teachers can speak to the class
SCHOOLS without straining their voices and students can effectively communicate with each other
and the teacher.
EQ Prerequisite 3 Minimum Acoustical Performance is required. Design classrooms and other core learning
spaces to meet the Reverberation Time (RT) requirements of ANSI Standard S12.60-2002
(Annexes B-D 45 dBA). Also design classrooms and other core learning spaces to meet the
Sound Transmission Class (STC) requirements of at least 35.
To learn more about the design guidelines for Classroom acoustics and ANSI S12.60 visit
the Armstrong website armstrong.com/acoustics. The ANSI Standard S12.60 for Classroom
Acoustics addresses the issues of both reverberation time and background noise and their effect
on speech intelligibility by placing maximum permissible levels on each. Armstrong has
developed a simple reverberation tool to aid in your selection of materials
to meet this credit. This interactive tool helps you calculate reverberation time and hear the
difference in five simple steps:
1. Describe the space
2. See recommended guidelines
3. Select surface materials. For ceilings, select a higher performance ceiling (high NRC).
4. The program will calculate the current reverberation time
5. Select treatment materials for your space to meet the reverberation recommendation
and hear the difference, before and after!
OR Two Alternative Compliance Paths (PIEACP - Performance/Intent Equivalent
Alternative Compliance Path)
The alternative compliance paths are not intended to replace any of the existing compliance
paths currently available. They offer alternatives to the current paths.
To Meet the Reverberation Time Requirement:
1. PATH 1 - Confirm that 100% of all standard classroom ceiling areas are finished with
a material that has a Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) of 0.70 or higher. This can typically
be achieved with a lay-in acoustical ceiling tile or other acoustical finish material.
2. PATH 2 - Confirm that the conbined total area of acoustical wall panels, ceiling finishes,
and other sound absorbent finishes equals or exceeds the total ceiling area of the room,
and that all materials in the calculation have an NRC of 0.70 or higher.
Refer to the Sustainability Table on page 4 or Armstrong Product Catalog for a listing of NRC
values for all of our ceiling and wall products. Many of our ceiling and wall products meet the
required NRC values.
To Meet the Sound Transmission Requirement:
For sound transmission between core learning spaces and adjacent interior spaces –
Take measurements to limit the sound transmission between core learning spaces and their
adjacencies. Provide a narrative describing measures taken to limit sound transmission
between core learning spaces and adjacencies. Address the following: Wall constructions,
interior glazing assemblies, door construction, partition construction. Also limit noise
transmission through sound paths including open plenums above core learning spaces,
connecting doors between core learning spaces, ceiling air return grilles into open plenums,
cross talk via mechanical ductwork.
Refer to the Sustainability Table or Armstrong Product Catalog for a listing of CAC and STC
values for all of our ceiling and wall products. For open plenum designs, refer to our selection
of canopies and clouds.
EQ Credit 9 – Use the same guidelines in EQ Prerequisite 3. Meet a lower RT time (40dBA - 1 pt.; 35 dBA -
ENHANCED ACOUSTICAL 2 pts.) Exemplary acoustical performance may qualify for an Innovation & Design credit.
PERFORMANCE To learn more about the design guidelines for Classroom Acoustics and ANSI S12.60 visit
the Armstrong website www.armstrong.com/acoustics.
EQ Credit 4 – Option 6 LEED Requirements: All acoustical ceiling systems and wall coverings must meet
LOW-EMITTING CA Dept. of Health Services Standard Practice for the Testing of VOC Emissions.
MATERIALS Armstrong Ceiling and Wall Systems Contribution:
Many Armstrong mineral fiber ceiling and wall systems will meet the low-emitting materials
requirement for Ceiling and Wall Systems, and are listed on the CHPS Low-Emitting Materials
list. See the Sustainability Table on page 4 for Ekos specific product information.
3
Sustainability Table
LEED for Schools
Environmental
Quality
USGBC Material and Resources LEED for Schools EQ Prerequisite 3
LEED Credits MR 2.1 & 2.2, MR 4.1 & 4.2, MR 5.1 & 5.2, MR 6 EQ 4 Option 6 and Credit 9
Total Total Total No-Added VOC Meets

Armstrong Recycling Recycled Pre- Post- Regional Rapidly Urea- 01350*
Wall Product Program Content Consumer Consumer Materials Renewable Formaldehyde CHPS Listed NRC STC**
Ekos Perforated ✔ 78% 77% 1% Verify through 9% ✔ ✔ 0.45 38-52

Wall Panels TechLine or
Green Genie
Ekos Unperforated ✔ 78% 77% 1% Verify through 9% ✔ ✔ NA 38-52

Wall Panels TechLine or
Green Genie
* VOC - Please refer to "The Basics of Formaldehyde When Choosing Wood Wall Systems" (CS-3839) for more details.
These products meet Section 01350 CA and "Collaborative for High Performance Schools (CHPS)." Contact Armstrong TechLine for more information.
** Depends on installation method
Green Genie™ – Search, evaluate and document which Armstrong Ceiling

or Wall product meets the environmental criteria needed for your project
at armstrong.com/greengenie
100%
Printed on recyclable paper
with vegetable-based inks.
Cert. no. SW-COC-003961 Please Recycle.
Contact TechLineSM for further information – 8 a.m. to 5:30 p.m. EST, Monday through Friday
FAX 1-800-572-8324 or email: techline@armstrong.com
armstrong.com/ekos
CS-3840 –1108 © AWI Licensing Company, 2008

4506 52nd Ave S.E.
Calgary, Alberta T2C 4N7
Toll Free: (800) 640-3709
Phone: (403) 236-1333
Fax: (403) 236-1373
Email: Goldray@goldrayindustries.com
Digital Artwork Requirements
General
• Include a hardcopy of your digital file(s) to ensure we have an accurate representation of your
artwork.
• Convert all fonts to paths/outlines/curves to avoid font substitutions. If this is not possible, include
or embed all fonts. Converting fonts is recommended to avoid delays and font copyright
infringement.
• Avoid all forms of compression in raster files. (Tiff, bmp, gif, all jpeg)
Format - Vector
• Art Work made from fills and outlines, with fonts converted to curves.
• Corel Draw 13 or lower, Adobe Illustrator, EPS
• Auto Cad – Not recommended for graphics artwork but acceptable for Elevation details. Include
hard copies and final cut list. Please delete all non glass related information.
File format - Raster

• Adobe Photo Shop (Preferred) –PSD and TIF (no image compression).
• Avoid all forms of image compression in raster files. (Tiff, bmp, gif, all jpeg)
Media Transfer Format

• CD Rom – DVD Rom.
• Email file to your salesperson - no size limit.
• Please label all disks with file names, programs and version #’s used. Include a contact name and
phone number for any media related questions we may have.
Effective Date: 01-Nov-03 Page 1 of 1

Revision Date: 10-Sept-04 Revision #: 02
STANDARD FINISHES
UNIVERSE GRADE 1
CREME BRULEE WHITECAP WHEAT SENECA
MILKYWAY MICA COSMIC DEPTH
To accurately evaluate whether this material suits your needs, please contact your local DIRTT Distribution Partner to order a sample
DIRTT | DOING IT RIGHT THIS TIME

STANDARD FINISHES
GLASS
BACKPAINTED
DG10 - CALM DG11 - PUDDLE DG51 - RIFF DG50 - SHIMMER DG16 - CHIT
DG17 - CHAT DG15 - SCOUT
BACKPAINTED - TREND
DG41 - HOT DG42 - TANGO DG43 - FRESH DG44 - COOL DG45 - MOODY BLUE
DG46 - SHAKE IT DG47 - SLICK DG18 - STARWHITE DG48 - SQUEEZE DG49 - RAINCHECK

STANDARD FINISHES
GLASS
LAMINATED
DG30 - MIST DG31 - CLOUD DG34 - WHITE
ETCHED
ADDITIONAL
DG32 - DEW
DG33 - HAZE
DG35 - CRISS DG37 - SPURT DG38 - BLOOP DG39 - CANE

STANDARD FINISHES
Available in several colors; DIRTTs standard textured paint is water-based. Making it a safer choice during manufacturing
and a safer choice for end-users so that they do not have to endure hazardous off-gassing after construction is finished.
VENEERS
GRADE 1 & 2
MAPLE DIRTT OAK ANIGRE DEER WALNUT FOX CHERRY DOGWOOD
FAWN CHERRY FIR HAWK WALNUT MINK WALNUT ESPRESSO

WALNUT
GRADE 3 & 4
WASHED OAK ESPRESSO OAK ELK OAK BEECH BEAR FIGURED FIGURED ANIGRE
ANIGRE
MOOSE OAK OTTER OAK

STANDARD FINISHES
POWDERCOATS
STANDARD
DP03-STONE DP02-FOG DP10-CLAY DP11-PEAT DP12-SLATE DP13-BLACK
DP14-SOLO DP15-SCOUT DP16-CHIT DP17-CHAT DP01-WHITE DP50-SHIMMER
DP51-RIFF

STANDARD FINISHES
OTHER
ZIPPERS & TRIMS
SILVER CHARCOAL BLACK

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
The fastest, most hygienic hand dryer.
Mounting bracket
12”
6”
Electrical: 0.2”
x
Input voltage: 110-120V AC, single phase 60 Hz
Rated power: 1400W, 12.0A 2.4”
Motor type: Dyson Digital Motor. switched reluctance brushless
Motor speed: 81,000 rpm 0.2” y
Heater type: None
Standby power consumption: 1w
Energy consumption per dry: .00468kwh
Construction:
Die-cast aluminum casing with anti-microbial scuff resistant 2”
lacquer coating on exterior surfaces
Color finish: Metallic silver, gloss lacquer 25.25”
Anti-microbially integrated external plastics and seals
Pressed anti-rust steel backplate
Tamper-proof T30 type exterior screws
Water ingress protection to IPX5
13.7”
Filtration:
HEPA filter with anti-microbial coating 9.3”
99.97% particulate efficiency <99.9% bacteria removal.
Operation:
2”
Touch-free infra-red activation
Hand dry time: 12 seconds
(measured to method defined in National Sanitation Foundation protocol P335)
Mounting locations 10.6” z
Airspeed at nozzle: 400mph
Operating airflow: 68cfm
See table for
Rated operating noise power: 84db(A)
recommended
mounting height
Logistics:
Single unit order code: 13043-01
Unit weight: 32lb
Packaged weight: 39lb
Packaged dimensions: 29.1” × 14.3” × 12.2”
10”
Pallet Count: 13
Pallet Type: US
Unit Barcode: 879957001275
Standard warranty:
5 year parts, 1 year labor limited
Product Certification
ETL listed in accordance with UL507
Recommended height from floor Male Female Child/Disabled

x To top of machine 41.25” 38.25” 34.25”
y To mounting bracket screw 39” 36” 32”
z To bottom of machine 16” 13” 9”
TESTED. CERTIFIED. HYGIENIC.
For further information please contact Dyson on: 1-888-DYSON-AB or visit our website at www.dysonairblade.com
AB02
208V
REAR VIEW
Electrical
12”
Electrical supply: 208 V AC, 3 phase 60 Hz Mounting bracket
6”
Rated power: 1600 W 0.2”
Motor type: Dyson digital motor. Switched reluctance brushless
Motor speed: 88,000 rpm
2.4” x
Heater type: None
Standby power consumption: 1 W
0.2” y
Energy consumption per dry: 0.0044 kWh
Construction
Die-cast aluminum casing with anti-microbial scuff resistant
lacquer coating on exterior surfaces 2”
Color finish: Metallic silver, gloss lacquer
Anti-microbially integrated external plastics, seals and air ducts 25.25”
Pressed anti-rust steel back plate / mounting bracket
Tamper-proof T30 type exterior screws
Filtration 13.7”
HEPA filter with anti-microbial coating
9.3”
99.97% particulate efficiency < 99.9% bacterial removal
Operation 2”
Hand dry time: 10 seconds (measured to method defined
Mounting
10.6” z
by National Sanitation Foundation protocol P.335)
locations (4)
Airspeed output: 400 mph *See table for
Operating airflow: 74 CFM recommended
Rated operating noise power: 85 dB(A) mounting height
Logistics
Serial number prefix: A02
Single unit order code: 14645-01 SIDE VIEW
Unit weight: 32 lb
6.5”
Packaged weight: 39 lb 4”
Pallet count: 13
Pallet type: US
Unit barcode: 879957001848
Standard warranty
Product Certification All dimensions

shown in inches
ETL listed in accordance with UL 507
ADA Compliant 25.25”
23.10”
US09025 02.26.09 ©2009 Dyson
*Recommended installation Male Female Child or

heights measured from floor Disabled
y To mounting bracket screw 39.0” 36.0” 32.0”
z To bottom of machine 16.0” 13.0” 9.0”
Manufactured materials
Plastic: ABS, polyurethane, polypropylene, BMC, PTFE
Rubber: Styrene, butadiene, EPDM
10”
Metal: Die cast aluminium, steel, copper, zinc, ferrite cores
Other: Powder coat, lacquer, glass, glass paper,
synthetic fiber fleece, hotmelt glass wool adhesive
For further information please contact Dyson at

1-888-DYSON-AB or email any questions to
airbladeinfo@dyson.com
AB04
120V
REAR VIEW
Electrical 11.9”
Electrical supply: 110-120 V AC, single phase 60 Hz 6”

0.2”
Rated power: 1400 W X
2.25”
Motor type: Dyson digital motor. Switched reluctance brushless
0.2”
Motor speed: 81,000 rpm Y
Heater type: None
Standby power consumption: 1 W Mounting
Energy consumption per dry: 0.00468 kWh bracket
Construction
Polycarbonate-ABS casing with homogenous anti-microbial additive 3.3” 3.3”
3.1”
Color finish: Metallic steel finish PC-ABS
3.1”
26.25”
Anti-microbially integrated external plastics, seals and air ducts
Galvanized steel back plate / mounting bracket Electrical
Tamper-proof T30 type exterior screws entrance
13.4”
Filtration
14.5”
HEPA filter with anti-microbial coating
11”
99.97% particulate efficiency < 99.9% bacterial removal
Operation
1.9”
Z
Hand dry time: 12 seconds (measured to method defined 1.8” 1.4”
by National Sanitation Foundation protocol P.335) 12.1”
Airspeed output: 400 mph Mounting

locations (4) *See table for
Operating airflow: 68 CFM
recommended
Rated operating noise power: 85 dB(A) mounting height
Logistics
Serial number prefix: A04-US
Single unit order code: 14225-01 SIDE VIEW
Unit weight: 22 lb 6.5”
Packaged weight: 28.7 lb 4”

Pallet count: 13
Pallet type: US
Unit barcode: 879957002210
Standard warranty
All dimensions
Product Certification shown in inches
ETL listed in accordance with UL 507
26.25”
ADA Compliant
24”
US09026 02.26.09 ©2009 Dyson
*Recommended installation Male Female Child or

heights measured from floor Disabled
y To mounting bracket screw 39.0” 36.0” 32.0”
z To bottom of machine 15.0” 12.0” 8.0”
Manufactured materials
Plastic: ABS, PC/ABS, PC, PP (+ PPGF and PPTF), PET-TS 9.7”
Thermoset (BMC/DMC), PEEK
Rubber: Styrene, butadiene, EPDM
Metal: Stainless steel, galvanized steel, zinc diecast alloy brass
For further information please contact Dyson at

1-888-DYSON-AB or email any questions to
airbladeinfo@dyson.com
DESIGN AND BUILD SPECIFICATION
Mobility access within washroom facilities

The Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) defines the accessible
requirements for the design and construction of washroom spaces in
the United States.* Detailed below are examples of the installation
requirements for hand dryers. The Dyson Airblade™ hand dryer (AB02,
AB04) has been designed to comply with these recommendations.
4" max
100mm Clearance for wall-mounted
protruding objects
Objects that protrude beyond 4”
higher than 27"
(100mm) from the wall must be

685mm
mounted so that part of the object

is below 27” (685mm) from the floor
in order to overlap the cane detection
range specified by ADA standards.
48"
Forward reach:
1220mm
Maximum high forward reach
allowed shall be: 48” (1220mm)
Minimum low forward reach
allowed shall be: 15” (381mm)
15" min
1220mm
381mm
48"
Forward reach over an obstruction:

When the reach x is less than 20”
(510mm) then the maximum height y
US09003 01.14.09 ©2009 Dyson
shall be 48” (1220mm) maximum.
*Source: ADA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG), Section 4. Accessible Elements and Spaces: Scope and Technical Requirements.
XLERATOR®
GREEN CERTIFICATIONS
the new standard for commercial facilities

LEED® (Leadership in Energy & Environmental Design) Sustainable Buildings Industry Council
In March 2000, the U.S. Green Building Council formally Excel Dryer is a member of the Sustainable
released the LEED Green Building Rating System. Today, Buildings Industry Council. Since its incep-
hundreds of public and private building projects in the tion in 1980 SBIC has been a national
United States and abroad use LEED as the standard for leader in defining the whole building
green building specifications. XLERATOR® helps approach to design, which results in high
facilities earn LEED credits in the following categories: performance buildings and favors sustainability as a prominent design
objective. SBIC members and partners share the common goal of delivering
buildings that provide long-term value and performance, reduce operating
• EA (Earth & Atmosphere) Prerequisite 2 - Minimum Energy Performance costs, keep occupants safe, comfortable and healthy, and protect the natu-
• EA (Earth & Atmosphere) Credit 1 - Optimizing Energy Performance ral environment.
(Now a mandatory credit for all LEED Facilities) Green Restaurant Association
The XLERATOR hand dryer is endorsed by the GRA
The Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design (LEED®) Green Building Rating System™ is a/the as the best environmental solution in the hand dryer
nationally accepted benchmark for the design, construction, and operations of high performance green build- category for the restaurant industry.
ings. LEED was developed by the U.S. Green Building Council (USGBC), a nonprofit working to transform the
building industry to sustainable practices.
Green Hotels Association
Environmental Building News – GreenSpec® Excel Dryer is an Ally Member and approved vendor of the Green
The leading newsletter on environmentally responsible Hotels Association. XLERATOR is the recommended hand dryer for
design and construction since 1992, EBN is green hotels.
independently published and advertisement free.
The research and reporting is uncompromised by Oikos Product Directory
corporate or industry sponsorships. EBN researchers independently tested The most comprehensive listing of products and services for energy-
XLERATOR for its performance and energy efficiency and determined efficient, environmentally-responsible building construction. XLERATOR
that XLERATOR clearly outperforms conventional electric hand dryers, hand dryers are listed in the directory. www.oikos.com.
both in energy savings and dry time which is why XLERATOR is the first
hand dryer to be GreenSpec Approved. Good for the Environment
• Voted Top Ten Product of 2002 by the editors of EBN
GreenSpec - is a database of green products, specifications and practices
Do you know the facts?
for use by architects and construction professionals. This database Includes
over 2,100 green building products carefully screened by the editors of Seventeen trees are consumed
Environmental Building News, organized according to the 16-division CSI to make one ton of paper.
MasterFormat™ system. The XLERATOR is listed in Division 10 28 00.
Green Building Initiative

Excel Dryer is a proud registered supporter of the Green One ton of paper production
Building Initiative. The mission of the Green Building pollutes 20,000 gallons of water.
Initiative is to accelerate the adoption of building
practices that result in energy-efficient, healthier and
environmentally sustainable buildings by promoting One ton of paper consumes
credible and practical green building approaches for three cubic yards of landfill.
residential and commercial construction.
EXCEL DRYER Inc.

Toll free: 1.800.255.9235
Email: sales@exceldryer.com Average cost of paper is 2 cents per
hand dry using paper towels vs.
Website: www.exceldryer.com 1/10th of a cent using dryers
®
XLERATOR® HAND DRYER
SPECIFICATIONS
Model XL-BW Model XL-W Model XL-GR Model XL-C Model XL-SB Model XL-SI*
Surface-mounted, Automatic, Surface-mounted, Automatic, Surface-mounted, Automatic, Surface-mounted, Automatic, Surface-mounted, Automatic, Surface-mounted, Automatic,
White Thermoset (BMC) Cover White Epoxy Painted Cover Graphite Textured Painted Cover Chrome Plated Cover Brushed Stainless Steel Cover Custom Special Image Cover
*Note: Exclusive digital image technology allows for the addition of Company, School or Team logos with any color, design or a 'green message'
Suggested Mounting Heights Units are 1500 Watts

From floor to Bottom of Dryer and available as Specified in:
Hand Dryers 110/120V 12.5 Amp 60 Hz
Mens' 45" (114 cm) 208V 7.0 Amp 60 Hz
Ladies' 43" (109 cm)
220/240 6.5 Amp 60 Hz
Teenagers' 41" (104 cm)
277V 5.5 Amp 60 Hz
Sm. Children 35" (89 cm)
Handicapped 37" (94 cm) 220/240V 6.5 Amp 50 Hz
Recess Kit - Meets ADA Protrusion Requirement of 4 inches (102 mm)
Dimensions: 11 3/4" lg. X 12 11/16" high x 6 11/16" deep

(298 mm lg. X 322 mm high x 170 mm deep)
Weight: XL-BW - 15 lbs. (6.80 kgs.) XL-SB 16 lbs. (7.26 kgs.)
XL-W, XL-GR, XL-C, XL-SI - 17 lbs. (7.71 kgs.)
MECHANISM
A. Motor shall be a thermally protected, series commutated through-flow discharge
vacuum motor/blower (5/8 HP / 20,000 RPM) which provides air velocity of 16,000
LFM (linear feet per minute) at the air outlet and 14,000 LFM at the hands (4 inches
RECESS KIT (Optional) [102 mm] below air outlet).
Dimensions: 16 3/8” wide x 26” high x 3 3/8” deep
(416 mm wide x 660 mm high x 86 mm deep) B. Heating element is constructed of Nichrome wire and mounted inside the blower
Weight: 11 lbs. (4.99 kgs.) housing, thereby being vandal proof. It shall be protected by an automatic resetting
thermostat, which shall open whenever air flow is cut off and shall close when flow
Note: Bottom of recessed wall box should be 10 1/2” (27 cm) below suggested mounting height for dryer (see chart).
of air is resumed. It shall produce an air temperature of up to 135°F (57°C) at a
72°F (22°C) ambient room temperature at the hands (4 inches [102 mm] below air
XLERATOR® HAND DRYER outlet).
CONSTRUCTION C. Control assembly is activated by an infrared optical sensor located next to the
A. Cover shall be one of the following: Die-cast zinc alloy - One-piece, heavy-duty, air outlet. The dryer shall operate as long as hands are under the air outlet.
rib-reinforced, lightweight, unbreakable, rustproof and all exposed surfaces shall There is a 35-second lockout feature if hands are not removed.
be bright chrome plated or finished with chip-proof, electrostatically applied epoxy
paint. White thermoset (BMC) – Fiberglass re-enforced bulk molding compound.
Stainless Steel – with a brushed finish. Special Image – Digital image applied to LIMITED WARRANTY
cover using patented KolorFusion Sublimation Decoration process. All covers will The dryer shall be guaranteed to be free from defects for a period of five (5) years.
be fastened to a wall plate by two chrome plated tamper-proof bolts. Warranty shall include factory performed labor as well as the repair or exchange of
defective parts, at manufacturer's option.
B. Wall plate shall be equipped with (3) 7/8" (22 mm) diameter holes, one of
which shall be suitable for use with surface conduit, for ease of wiring.
QUANTITY RECOMMENDATIONS
C. All internal parts shall be coated according to Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. One dryer for every two washbasins is sufficient for most applications. If restroom
requirements. traffic is unusually heavy, we suggest one dryer per washbasin in small installations
and two dryers for every three washbasins in larger installations. When a 54" wash-
D. Entire mechanism shall be internally grounded. fountain is used, we suggest four to five dryers.
E. Optional RECESS KIT includes a wall box fabricated of 22 GA 18-8 type 304
stainless steel with #4 satin finish and a 16 GA 18-8 type 304 stainless steel
dryer mounting plate. All welded construction. A stainless steel cable is connected
EXCEL DRYER Inc.
to the dryer mounting plate to hold the dryer in position when servicing. 357 Chestnut Street • P.O. Box 365
East Longmeadow, MA 01028 U.S.A.
Tel: (413) 525-4531, Fax: (413) 525-2853
Email: sales@exceldryer.com
www.exceldryer.com
Printed on recycled paper
Printed in the U.S.A. TIME TO THROW IN THE TOWEL. ® 090910

Wny 210 157 Part 6

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Исходное описание:

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Wny 210 157 Part 6

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

WNY 210 : Renovation Phase l - MIC Room, and 4th flr Hallway and Common Areas

Work Order Number TBD Date: 07/27/2010

– Design Sketches (Preliminary Renderings) provided for overall design intent,

– Product data (BOD):

Wall • Woodworks Ekos • Armstrong

Suspended • Woodworks ceiling Canopies • Armstrong

RFP WNY 210 157 Part_6.doc 7/27/2010 Page 1 of 3

Work Order Number TBD Date: 07/27/2010

Entrance mats Gridline LB frame • Construction Specialties

• Columbia Lighting: EPC22 -224G • Lutron : www.onesa.com

• LAM LIGHTING SYSTEM: SL20-

• ALBEO TECHNILOGIES: LS-

• ELECTRIX LUMILEDGE: LLSR-

RFP WNY 210 157 Part_6.doc 7/27/2010 Page 2 of 3

Work Order Number TBD Date: 07/27/2010

RFP WNY 210 157 Part_6.doc 7/27/2010 Page 3 of 3

Work Order Number TBD Date: 07/16/2010

Paragraph 3 POST AWARD KICKOFF MEETING (PAK)

Submit design drawings or sketches, calculations and manufacturer’s data to demonstrate

Small Project Part 2, Attachment A - Page 1 of 5

Work Order Number TBD Date: 07/16/2010

2. Construction submittals are to be Contractor-approved, except those listed below:

Paragraph 5 FIRE PROTECTION AND LIFE SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

Small Project Part 2, Attachment A - Page 2 of 5

Work Order Number TBD Date: 07/16/2010

Paragraph 6 QUALITY CONTROL

Paragraph 7 SUBMITTAL PROCESSING

S UBMITTAL/BENCHMARK DURATION BENCHMARK RECEIVED S TATUS

9 Operation and Maintenance

Small Project Part 2, Attachment A - Page 3 of 5

Work Order Number TBD Date: 07/16/2010

S UBMITTAL/BENCHMARK DURATION BENCHMARK RECEIVED S TATUS

Paragraph 8 SUPERVISION: Fluent in English and other language as necessary to be able to

Paragraph 10 BUDGET MANAGEMENT

Paragraph 14 SCHEDULE OF PRICES (values): To be provided to PM by contractor before start

Paragraph 15 INVOICES: WAWF system - coordinate with Contract specialist.

Paragraph 20 TEMPORARY UTILITIES

Small Project Part 2, Attachment A - Page 4 of 5

Work Order Number TBD Date: 07/16/2010

Paragraph 21 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS AND PROTECTION

Paragraph 22 WASTE MANAGEMENT

Paragraph 23 RECORD DRAWINGS AND OPERATION & MAINTENANCE (O&M) DATA

Paragraph 24 WARRANTY: Provide copy of warranties with submittals and OPMs.

Paragraph 25 PERFORMANCE EVALUATIONS

Paragraph 26 WORK HOURS, ACCESS AND PASSES

Paragraph 27 SECURITY REQUIREMENTS

Paragraph 28 REQUIRED INSURANCE

Paragraph 30 GOVERNMENT FURNISHED MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT

Paragraph 34 SAFETY AND OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH

a. Hot Work: To be addressed at the project kick-off meeting.

b. Pre-Outage Coordination Meeting: To be addressed at the project kick off meeting.

**End of PART 2 Attachment A**

Small Project Part 2, Attachment A - Page 5 of 5

VAULT AND SECURE ROOM (OPEN STORAGE AREA) CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS

a. Floor and Walls. Eight inches of reinforced-concrete to

a. Walls, Floor, and Roof. The walls, floor, and roof

A. American National Standards Institute/Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (ANSI/IEEE) ;

B. ASTM International (ASTM)

C. International Electrotechnical Commission.

D. International Organization for Standardization (ISO); 9001:2000 – Quality Management Systems.

E. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

F. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

End of PART 2 Attachment A